RC F (2024) - Automotive LEXUS - Free user manual and instructions

Product type	Automobile
Brand	Lexus
Model	RC F (2024)
Body type	Coupe
Number of seats	4
Engine	5.0L V8 gasoline
Maximum power	472 hp
Transmission	8-speed automatic
Drive type	Rear-wheel drive (RWD)
Length	4710 mm
Width	1845 mm
Height	1390 mm
Wheelbase	2730 mm
Curb weight	Approximately 1760 kg
Fuel tank capacity	64 L
Fuel type	Premium unleaded
Safety system	SRS airbags (front, side, curtain, knee), seatbelt pretensioners
Seatbelt maintenance	Cleaning with warm soapy water, regular inspection
Headlight adjustment	Via vertical adjustment bolts (Phillips screwdriver)
Regulatory compliance	FCC Part 15, ISED, CNR

Frequently Asked Questions - RC F (2024) LEXUS

How to properly use the seat belts?

Route the shoulder belt over the shoulder without touching the neck, place the lap belt low on the hips, sit up straight, and do not twist the belt.

How to maintain the seat belts?

Clean with a cloth or sponge moistened with warm soapy water. Regularly check for wear, fraying, or cuts. Do not use a damaged belt.

Where are the SRS airbags located?

Front airbags are in the steering wheel and dashboard, knee airbags under the steering column and glove box, side airbags in the front seats, and curtain airbags along the roof.

What to do if an airbag deploys?

Open a door or window to ventilate, wipe off residue as soon as possible and avoid touching hot components. If you have difficulty breathing, exit the vehicle if possible.

Can I install a child seat on the front passenger seat?

No, never install a rear-facing child seat on the front seat, even if the AIR BAG OFF indicator is on. Always use the rear seats for children.

How to adjust the headlights?

Park on a level surface, check fuel level and tire pressure. Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn bolts A and B the same number of turns in the same direction.

What does the 'AIR BAG OFF' indicator mean?

The AIR BAG OFF indicator means the system has deactivated the front passenger airbag based on detected weight (e.g., small child). Do not place heavy objects on the seat.

Can I use a seat belt extender?

Yes, but make sure to attach the extender to the buckle and the belt tongue. If the extender is hooked without being attached, the airbags may not deploy correctly.

What to do if the seat belt is damaged?

Do not use it and have it replaced by a Lexus dealer. A damaged belt does not protect properly in a collision.

How to clean the cabin after an airbag deployment?

Wipe off residue with a damp cloth, ventilate the cabin, and avoid breathing particles. Consult a dealer to check the system.

USER MANUAL RC F (2024) LEXUS

WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

Your Lexus dealer

Your Lexus dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.

If there is not a Lexus dealer near you, please call the following number:

U.S. OWNERS

• In the U.S. mainland or Canada: Lexus Roadside Assistance 1-800-25-LEXUS or 1-800-255-3987 (Toll-Free)

In Hawaii: Servco Automotive Roadside Assistance/Customer Services 1-800-25-LEXUS or 1-800-255-3987 (Toll-Free)

CANADIAN OWNERS

• In Canada or the U.S. mainland: Lexus Roadside Assistance/Customer Service 1-800-26-LEXUS or 1-800-265-3987 (Toll-Free)

Please access our websites for further information.

• The U.S. mainland: www.lexus.com
• Hawaii: www.servcolexus.com
• Canada : www.lexus.ca

©2023 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION

All rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of Toyota Motor Corporation.

Pictorial index

Search by illustration

For safety and security	Make sure to read through them (Main topics: Child seat, theft deterrent system)	1
Vehicle status information and indicators	Reading driving-related information (Main topics: Meters, multi-information display)	2
Before driving	Opening and closing the doors and windows, adjustment before driving (Main topics: Keys, doors, seats)	3
Driving	Operations and advice which are necessary for driving (Main topics: Starting engine, refueling)	4
Interior features	Usage of the interior features (Main topics: Air conditioner, storage features)	5
Maintenance and care	Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures (Main topics: Interior and exterior, light bulbs)	6
When trouble arises	What to do in case of malfunction and emergency (Main topics: Battery discharge, flat tire)	7
Vehicle specifications	Vehicle specifications, customizable features (Main topics: Fuel, oil, tire inflation pressure)	8
For owners	Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt, SRS airbag and headlight aim instructions for Canadian owners	9
Index	Search by symptom
	Search alphabetically

For your information......6

Reading this manual....11

How to search 12

Pictorial index......13

1 For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

Before driving....24

For safe driving....25

Seat belts 26

SRS airbags ....30

Front passenger occupant classification system 38

Exhaust gas precautions...... 43

1-2. Child safety

Riding with children...... 44

Child restraint systems .... 44

1-3. LEXUS Enform

Lexus Enform Safety Connect .. 55

1-4. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system...... 59

Alarm....60

Theft prevention labels ......62

2 Vehicle status information and indicators

2-1. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators.... 64

Gauges and meters 68

Multi-information display...... 75

Fuel consumption information... 84

3 Before driving

3-1. Key information

Keys......88

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Doors....92

Trunk......95

Smart access system with push-button start 98

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats....103

Power easy access system/driving position memory/memory recall function.... 105

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel....108

Inside rear view mirror .....109

Outside rear view mirrors...... 110

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows 112

Moon roof....114

4 Driving

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle.... 118

Cargo and luggage....124

Vehicle load limits....126

Trailer towing....127

Dinghy towing....127

4-2. Driving procedures

Engine (ignition) switch...... 128

Automatic transmission...... 132

Turn signal lever....135

Parking brake 136

Brake Hold....139

ASC (Active Sound Control) 140

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch.... 141

AHB (Automatic High Beam) 143

Windshield wipers and washer 146

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap......153

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Lexus Safety System + 2.5......156

PCS (Pre-Collision System).....160

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)......170

RSA (Road Sign Assist)......179

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range....181

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) .....192

Intuitive parking assist ....200

Driving mode select switch.....205

Launch control....207

Active rear wing 208

Driving assist systems...... 211

4-6. Driving tips

Winter driving tips....215

5 Interior features

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

Remote Touch......218

Center Display......220

5-2. Using the air conditioning system

Automatic air conditioning system 223

Heated steering wheel/seat heaters/seat ventilators....231

5-3. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list 233

5-4. Using the storage features

List of storage features ...... 235

Trunk features 237

5-5. Using the other interior features

Other interior features......238

Garage door opener ....241

Compass......246

6 Maintenance and care

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior....250

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior....255

6-2. Matte paint care guide

Basic knowledge about matte clear coat.... 259

Washing your vehicle 263

Frequently Asked Questions 264

6-3. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements..... 267

General maintenance...... 268

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs....271

6-4. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions 272

Hood....274

Positioning a floor jack...... 275

Engine compartment...... 276

Tires 283

Tire inflation pressure....290

Wheels....292

Air conditioning filter......294

Electronic key battery......295

Checking and replacing fuses 297

Headlight aim....299

Light bulbs....300

7 When trouble arises

7-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers......306

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency....306

If the vehicle is submerged or water on the road is rising ....307

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed 309

If you think something is wrong 312

Fuel pump shut off system......313

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds.... 314

If a warning message is displayed 323

If you have a flat tire (vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit) 326

If you have a flat tire (vehicles with a spare tire) 337

If the engine will not start ..... 344

If you lose your keys...... 345

If the fuel filler door cannot be opened 346

If the electronic key does not operate properly.... 346

If the vehicle battery is discharged 349

If your vehicle overheats...... 352

If the vehicle becomes stuck... 354

8 Vehicle specifications

8-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) 356

Fuel information.... 363

Tire information.... 365

8-2. Customization

Customizable features...... 374

8-3. Items to initialize

Items to initialize....384

9 For owners

9-1. For owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners....386

Reporting safety defects for Canadian owners....386

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) 387

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French) ......388

Headlight aim instructions for Canadian owners (in French) 394

Index

What to do if... (Troubleshooting) 396

Alphabetical Index......399

For your information

Main Owner's Manual

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle and the illustrations used may differ from your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. Over time, your vehicle may receive updates that modify the vehicle and make material in this manual incomplete and/or inaccurate. Because of Lexus' interest in continual product improvement, Lexus reserves the right to make changes to this manual at any time without notice.

If Lexus chooses to update the manual, updated versions can be viewed by selecting your vehicle by model and year at the following URL or on your mobile device if you have access to the Lexus app.

https://drivers.lexus.com

Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine

Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus

A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

Also, remodeling like this will have an effect on advanced safety equipment such as Lexus Safety System + 2.5 and there is a danger that it will not work properly or the danger that it may work in situations where it should not be working.

Cyber Attack Risk

Installing electronic devices and radios increases the risk of cyber attacks through the installed parts, which may lead to unexpected accidents and leakage of personal information. Lexus does not make any guarantees for

problems caused by installing non-genuine Lexus products.

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system

The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as:

• Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
• Lexus Safety System + 2.5
• Anti-lock brake system
  ● Vehicle dynamics integrated management
• SRS airbag system
• Seat belt pretensioner system

Be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.

Vehicle data recording

The vehicle is equipped with sophisticated computers that will record certain data, such as:

• Engine speed / Electric motor speed (traction motor speed)
- Accelerator status
- Brake status
- Vehicle speed
• Operation status of the driving assist systems
- Images from the cameras

Your vehicle is equipped with cameras. Contact your Lexus dealer for the location of recording cameras.

The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is equipped.

These computers do not record conversations or sounds, and only record images outside of the vehicle in certain situations.

● Data Transmission

Your vehicle may transmit the data recorded in these computers to Lexus without notification to you.

Data usage

Lexus may use the data recorded in this computer to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.

Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:

• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased
  • In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
  • For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner
• Recorded image information can be erased by your Lexus dealer.

The image recording function can be disabled. However, if the function is disabled, data from when the system operates will not be available.

- To learn more about the vehicle data collected, used and shared by Lexus, please visit www.lexus.com/privacyvts/.

Usage of data collected through Lexus Enform (U.S. mainland only)

If your Lexus has Lexus Enform and if you have subscribed to those services, please refer to the Lexus Enform Telematics Subscription Service Agreement for information on data collected and its usage.

To learn more about the vehicle data collected, used and shared by Lexus, please visit www.lexus.com/privacyvts/.

Statement on Warranty Coverage for Aftermarket and Recycled Parts (For U.S. Owners)

The Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. s.2301 et seq., makes it illegal for motor vehicle manufacturers to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage solely because an aftermarket or recycled part has been used to repair the vehicle or someone other than the authorized service provider performed service on the vehicle. This provision does not apply to a new motor vehicle purchased solely for commercial or industrial use.

Under federal law, a manufacturer may deny warranty coverage and charge for repairs to a vehicle if it is discovered that an aftermarket or recycled part installed on the vehicle is defective or was installed incorrectly and caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty.

The Federal Trade Commission requires that a manufacturer demonstrate that an aftermarket or recycled part or service performed by a person other than an authorized service provider caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty before denying warranty coverage. Additionally, federal law allows a manufacturer to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage if the manufacturer provides the article or service to consumers free of charge under the warranty or the manufacturer has secured a waiver from the Federal Trade Commission.

Event data recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
- Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or

brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

● Disclosure of the EDR data

Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:

- An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is obtained

• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency

- For use by Lexus in a lawsuit

However, if necessary, Lexus may:

- Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance

• Disclose the data to a third party for

research purposes without disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner

Scrapping of your Lexus

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Perchlorate Material

Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/per chlorate.

Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

"QR Code"

The word "QR Code" is registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and other countries.

WARNING

■ General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.

Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.

■ General precaution regarding children's safety

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

Reading this manual

Explains symbols used in this manual.

Symbols in this manual

Symbols Meanings
	WARNING:Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or serious injury to people.
	NOTICE:Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to or a malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment.
	Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps in numerical order.

Symbols in illustrations

Interior view of a car seatbelt with hand placement and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Symbols Meanings
	Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices.
	Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens).

Symbols Meanings
	Indicates the component or position being explained.
	Means Do not, Do not do this, or Do not let this happen.

How to search

• Searching by name
  ● Alphabetical index: →P.399

■ Searching by installation position
- Pictorial index: P.13

Line drawing of a person reading an open book with a lightbulb above, no text or symbols present

■ Searching by symptom or sound
● What to do if... (Troubleshooting): →P.396

Illustration of a person reading a book with a lightbulb and electric vehicle charging nearby (no text or symbols)

■ Searching by title
Table of contents: P.2

Line drawing of a person reading an open book with a lightbulb above, symbolizing ideas or learning (no text or symbols present)

Pictorial index

Exterior

The shape of the headlights may differ depending on the grade, etc.

A Doors P.92

Locking/unlocking....P.92

Opening/closing the side windows....P.112

Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key.....P.346

Warning lights/warning messages P.314, 323

B Trunk....P.95

Opening from inside the cabin P.96

Opening from outside....P.96

Opening by using the mechanical key....P.347

Warning lights/warning messages P.314, 323

C Outside rear view mirrors....P.110

Adjusting the mirror angle....P.110

Folding the mirrors.... P.111

Driving position memory P.105

Defogging the mirrors....P.227

D Windshield wipers P.146

Precautions for winter season.... P.215

To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer) ^* P.227

Precautions against car wash....P.252

E Fuel filler door....P.153

Refueling method....P.153

Fuel type/fuel tank capacity....P.357

F Tires....P.283

Tire size/inflation pressure P.361

Winter tires....P.215

Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system....P.283

Coping with flat tires....P.326, 337

G Hood P.274

Opening P.274

Engine oil....P.357

Coping with overheating....P.352

Warning messages....P.323

H Active rear wing ^* P.208

Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving

(Replacing method: P.300, Watts: P.362)

I Headlights....P.141

J Parking lights/daytime running lights....P.141

K Turn signal lights....P.135

L Side marker lights....P.141

M Tail lights P.141

Stop lights

N License plate lights P.141

0 Back up lights

Shifting the shift lever to R....P.132

*: If equipped

Instrument panel

A Engine switch....P.128

Starting the engine/changing the mode....P.128

Emergency stop of the engine....P.306

When the engine will not start....P.344

Warning messages....P.323

B Shift lever....P.132

Changing the shift position....P.132

Precautions for towing....P.309

When the shift lever does not move.... P.133

C Meters....P.68

Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel lights.....P.68

Warning lights/indicator lights P.64

When a warning light comes on.... P.314

D Multi-information display....P.75

Display....P.75

When the warning messages are displayed....P.323

E Parking brake switch P.136

Applying/releasing....P.136

Precautions for winter season....P.216

Warning buzzer/message....P.323

F Headlight switch P.141

Turn signal lever....P.135

Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/license plate lights/daytime running lightsP.141

G Windshield wiper and washer switch.... P.146

Usage....P.146

Adding washer fluid....P.282

Warning messages....P.323

Headlight cleaners ^*1 P.146

H Emergency flasher switch....P.306

I Trunk opener switch....P.96

J Hood lock release lever....P.274

K Tilt and telescopic steering control switch ^*1 P.108

Adjustment.....P.108

Driving position memory ^*1 P.105

L Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever ^*1 P.108

M Air conditioning system....P.223

Usage....P.223

Rear window defogger....P.227

N Audio system ^4

O Trunk opener main switch P.98

^*1 : If equipped

*2: Refer to "NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

Switches

A BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) main switch.....P.192
B Windshield wiper de-icer switch ^ ....P.227
C Active rear wing switch.... P.208
D Odometer/trip meter/trip meter reset button....P.74
E Instrument panel light control switches....P.75
F Intuitive parking assist switch ^ P.200
G Automatic High Beam switch....P.143

*: If equipped

A Driving position memory buttons....P.105

B Outside rear view mirror switches....P.110
C Door lock switches P.94
D Power window switches....P.112
E Window lock switch....P.113
F Tire pressure warning reset switch....P.287

*: If equipped

A Audio remote control switches*
B Paddle shift switches....P.133, 134
C Meter control switches....P.76
D Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch....P.186
E Cruise control switch

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range.....P.181

F LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch P.170
G Talk switch*
H Telephone switches*

*: Refer to "NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

A Seat heater switches ^1 P.231
B Seat ventilator switches ^1 P.232
C Heated steering wheel switch ^*1 P.231
D Driving mode select switch....P.205
E VSC OFF switch....P.212
F "LAUNCH" switch....P.207
G Brake hold switch....P.139
H Remote Touch ^2 P.218

*1: If equipped

*2: Refer to "NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

Interior

A SRS airbags....P.30
B Floor mats....P.24
C Front seats....P.103
D Seat belts....P.26
E Console box....P.237
F Inside lock buttons....P.94
G Cup holders ^* P.236
H Assist grips....P.239
I Coat hooks....P.239

*: If equipped

Ceiling

A Inside rear view mirror P.109
B Sun visors....P.240
C Vanity mirrors P.240
D Interior light P.233

Personal lights.....P.234

E Moon roof switches ^ P.114
F "SOS" button ^ P.55
G Garage door opener buttons....P.241

*: If equipped

1

1-1. For safe use

Before driving....24

For safe driving.... 25

Seat belts 26

SRS airbags ....30

Front passenger occupant classification system 38

Exhaust gas precautions...... 43

1-2. Child safety

Riding with children...... 44

Child restraint systems ..... 44

1-3. LEXUS Enform

Lexus Enform Safety Connect 55

1-4. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system..... 59

Alarm....60

Theft prevention labels ...... 62

Before driving

Observe the following before starting off in the vehicle to ensure safety of driving.

Installing floor mats

Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.

1 Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into the floor mat eyelets.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt fastening mechanism with two red arrows indicating fastening points (no text or symbols present)

2 Turn the upper knob of each retaining hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in place.

Always align the marAs.

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

- When installing the driver's floor mat

- Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats.

- Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat.

● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.

- Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.

- Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.

Before driving

- Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor.

Diagram of a mechanical component with an arrow pointing to a hole, no text or symbols present

With the engine stopped and the shift lever in P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat.

For safe driving

For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate position before driving.

Correct driving posture

A Adjust the angle of the seatback so that you are sitting straight up and so that you do not have to lean forward to steer. (→P.103)
B Adjust the seat so that you can depress the pedals fully and so that your arms bend slightly at the elbow when gripping the steering wheel. (→P.103)
C Wear the seat belt correctly. (→P.26)

WARNING

For safe driving

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
- Do not adjust the position of the driver's seat while driving. Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

• Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback. A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.
• Do not place anything under the front seats. Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
  ● Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.
• When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to feel tired. Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue driving and take a break immediately.

Correct use of the seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. (→P.26)

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (→P.44)

Adjusting the mirrors

Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside and outside rear view mirrors properly. (→P.109, 110)

Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

■ Wearing a seat belt

- Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.

● Always wear a seat belt properly.

● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children.

- Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.

- Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.

● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

■ Pregnant women

Two illustrations of a person seated in a car seat, showing different seatbelt configurations (no text or symbols present)

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P.27)

Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants, extending the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.

■ People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P.27)

■ When children are in the vehicle

→P.51

■ Seat belt damage and wear

- Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door.

WARNING

• Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
• Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus dealer.
• Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
• Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling may lead to incorrect operation.

Correct use of the seat belts

Silhouette of a person wearing a suit and seatbelt, holding a diagonal belt (no text or symbols)

• Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.
• Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.
• Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.

- Do not twist the seat belt.

Two-panel illustration showing a person seated in a car seat, labeled A and B (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

A Not twisted
B Twisted

Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (→P.44)
- When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt, follow the instructions regarding seat belt usage. (→P.26)

Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge.

Illustration of a person adjusting a car seatbelt in a vehicle seat (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■ Using a seat belt extender

- Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.

WARNING

• Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
  The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.

NOTICE

■ When using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

Fastening and releasing the seat belt

1 To fasten the seat belt, push the plate into the buckle until a click sound is heard.
2 To release the seat belt, press the release button A

Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you

lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully.

■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold a child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (→P.44)

Seat belt guide

Illustration of a medical or surgical procedure on a curved object, showing two steps with arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols present)

When fastening a front seat belt, ensure that it is passed through the seat belt guide. Passing the seat belt through the guide enables the seat belt to be easily extended.

When you get into or out of the rear seats, release the seat belt from the seat belt guide.

WARNING

■ When using the seat belt guide

● Always make sure that the belt is not twisted, and runs freely through the guide.
● Regardless of whether the guide is used or not, always secure the seat belt guide button.
- Do not hang from or pull the guide forcefully.

Seat belt pretensioners

Interior view of a car with multiple driver seats and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

The pretensioners help the seat belts to quickly restrain the occupants by retracting the seat belts when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal collision or a vehicle rollover.

The front seat belt pretensioners also activate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe side collision.

The pretensioners do not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a minor side impact or a rear impact.

■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.

WARNING

■ Seat belt pretensioners

- Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision.

- If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.

SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

SRS airbag system

■ Location of the SRS airbags

▶ SRS front airbags

A SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components

B SRS knee airbags

Can help provide driver and front passenger protection

▶ SRS side and curtain shield airbags

c SRS side airbags

Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants

D SRS curtain shield airbags

- Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats

- Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the event of vehi-

cle rollover

■ SRS airbag system components

A Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors)

B Side impact sensors (front door)

C Knee airbags

D Front passenger airbag

E Curtain shield airbags

F "AIR BAG ON" and "AIR BAG OFF" indicator lights

G Seat belt pretensioners and force limiters

H Side impact sensors (front)

I Front side airbags

J SRS warning light

K Driver airbag

L Side impact sensors (rear)

M Driver's seat position sensor

N Driver's seat belt buckle switch

Airbag sensor assembly

P Front passenger's seat belt buckle switch

Q Front impact sensors

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc.

shown in the system components diagram above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.

■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

- Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases.

● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.

● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.

● The windshield may crack.

For Lexus Enform Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event of a severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency call to the response center, notifying them of the vehicle's location (without needing to push the "SOS" button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency services. (→P.55)

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)

● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations:

• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an underride

collision, such as a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck

● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will activate.

- The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied.

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

- The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).

● The SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle rollover.

- The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of a severe frontal collision.

■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision

The SRS front airbags and SRS side and curtain shield airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
- Landing hard or falling

Four cartoon-style cars on a track with one moving rightward (no text or symbols)

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown in the illustration.

● The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.

● The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.

Two car interior views shown from different angles, no text or symbols present

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)

The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.

- Collision from the side

- Collision from the rear

● Vehicle rollover

Diagram showing car exterior and interior views with arrows indicating movement or damage (no text or symbols)

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

- Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment

- Collision from the side at an angle

Two identical car diagrams showing top-down views of a vehicle with red arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-speed frontal collision.

- Collision from the rear

● Vehicle rollover

Two car body diagrams with a pink arrow indicating motion direction (no text or symbols)

The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-speed frontal collision.

- Collision from the rear

- Pitching end over end

Diagram showing two cars on a surface with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

■ When to contact your Lexus dealer

In the following cases, the vehicle will

require inspection and/or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

● The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS front airbags to inflate.

Top-down diagram of a car showing the roof and side profile with directional arrows (no text or symbols)

A portion of a door or its surrounding area is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

Top-down view of a car with horizontal double-headed arrows indicating measurement or dimension (no text or symbols)

● The pad section of the steering wheel, dashboard near the front passenger airbag or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

● The surface of the seats with the SRS side airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

Technical line drawing of a vehicle cockpit with steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols)

The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the SRS curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

Technical line drawing of a car interior showing engine compartment and structural components (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■ SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

WARNING

The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises: Since the risk zone for the driver's airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breast-bone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.

- If the seat belt extender has been connected to the front seat belt buckles but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the seat belt, the SRS front airbags will judge that the driver and front passenger are wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the SRS front airbags may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.

Illustration of a person sitting on a vehicle seatbelt with a no-smoking symbol (no text or labels present)

The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
- Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (→P.44)

WARNING

- Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.

- Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.

- Do not allow the front seat occupants to hold items on their knees.

- Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.

Illustration of a person sitting on a car seatbelt with a no-smoking symbol (no text or labels present)

- Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seats toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.

Illustration of a person standing near a vehicle with a pink prohibition symbol (no text or labels)

- Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad and lower portion of the instrument panel. These items can become projectiles when the SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.

Diagram of a car interior with directional arrows and a no-smoking symbol (no text or labels)

- Do not attach anything to areas such as a door, windshield, side windshield, front or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist grip. (Except for the speed limit sticker →P.328)

Illustration of a cartoon character with wings and a large 'no' symbol, no readable text or symbols present

- Do not hang coat hangers or hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.

WARNING

• If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it.
• Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components. Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
• Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
• If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
• If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus dealer.
• Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may not deploy in the event of a collision.

■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.

● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment
● Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows, winches or roof luggage carrier
Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

Front passenger occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger.

System components

A Driver's and front passenger's seat belt reminder light
B SRS warning light
For the U.S.A.
C "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light
D "AIR BAG ON" indicator light
For Canada
E "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light
F "AIR BAG ON" indicator light

WARNING

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● Wear the seat belt properly.
Make sure the front passenger's seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.

WARNING

Make sure the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the "AIR BAG ON" indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the front passenger may not activate, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.

• Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seatback pocket).
• Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
• Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.
• Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
• Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.

If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the "AIR BAG ON" indicator light is illuminated. If the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
- When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (→P.45)
- Do not modify or remove the front seats.
- Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the front passenger occupant classification system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks.
- Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.
- Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
- Do not place anything between the console box and front passenger seat. Otherwise, the system may not detect the front passenger properly, leading to improper operation of the airbags.
- Adjust the front passenger seat so that the head restraint does not touch the ceiling. If the head restraint is left in contact with the ceiling, the system may not detect the front passenger properly, leading to improper operation of the airbags.

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

■ Adult ^*1

Indicator/warning light	“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights	“AIR BAG ON”
	SRS warning light Off
	Driver's and front passenger's seat belt reminder light	Off^*2 or flashing^*3
Devices	Front passenger airbag	Activated
	Side airbag on the front passenger seat
	Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
	Front passenger knee airbag
	Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner

Child ^*4

Indicator/warning light	“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights	“AIR BAG OFF” or “AIR BAG ON”*4
	SRS warning light Off
	Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light	Off*2 or flashing*3
Devices	Front passenger airbag	Deactivated or activated*4
	Side airbag on the front passenger seat	Activated
	Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
	Front passenger knee airbag	Deactivated or activated*4
	Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner A	Activated

■ Child restraint system with infant *5

Indicator/warning light	“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights	“AIR BAG OFF”*6
	SRS warning light Off
	Driver's and front passenger's seat belt reminder light	Off*2 or flashing*3
Devices	Front passenger airbag Deactivated
	Side airbag on the front passenger seat	Activated
	Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
	Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated
	Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner A	Activated

Unoccupied

Indicator/warning light	“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights	“AIR BAG OFF”
	SRS warning light	Off
	Driver's and front passenger's seat belt reminder light
Devices	Front passenger airbag Deactivated
	Side airbag on the front passenger seat	Activated
	Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
	Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated
	Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner Activated

There is a malfunction in the system

Indicator/warning light	“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights	“AIR BAG OFF”
	SRS warning light	On
	Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Devices	Front passenger airbag Deactivated
	Side airbag on the front passenger seat	Activated
	Curtain shield airbag in the front passen-ger side
	Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated
	Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner Activated

*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.
^3 : In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*4: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convertible seat, the system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors which may affect this can be the physique or posture.
*5: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (→P.44)
^6 : In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the child restraint system properly. ( P.45)

Exhaust gas precautions

Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust gases if inhaled.

WARNING

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

■ Important points while driving

- Keep the trunk lid closed.

- If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the trunk lid is closed, open the windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

When parking

- If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the engine.

- Do not leave the vehicle with the engine on for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

- Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

Exhaust pipe

The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer.

Riding with children

Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt.

• It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental contact with the shift lever, wiper switch, etc.
• Use the window lock switch to avoid children operating the power window accidentally. (→P.113)
• Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch body parts, such as the power window, hood, trunk, seats, etc.

WARNING

■ When children are in the vehicle

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

Child restraint systems

Before installing a child restraint system in the vehicle, there are precautions that need to be observed, different types of child restraint systems, as well as installation methods, etc., written in this manual.

Use a child restraint system when riding with a small child that cannot properly use a seat belt. For the child's safety, install the child restraint system to a rear seat. Be sure to follow the installation method that is in the operation manual enclosed with the restraint system.

Table of contents

Points to remember: P.44

Child restraint system: P.45

When using a child restraint system: P.46

Child restraint system installation method

• Fixed with a seat belt: P.48
- Fixed with a child restraint LATCH anchor: P.51
• Using an anchor bracket (for top tether strap): P.53

Points to remember

The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. as well as Canada now require the use of child restraint systems.

- Prioritize and observe the warn-

ings, as well as the laws and regulations for child restraint systems.

• Use a child restraint system until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt.
• Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.

WARNING

When a child is riding

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system which is correctly installed. For installation details, refer to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system. General installation instruction is provided in this manual.
- Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the weight and size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

- Holding a child in your or someone else's arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield or between the holder and the interior of the vehicle.

■ Handling the child restraint system

If the child restraint system is not properly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving, or an accident.

• If the vehicle were to receive a strong impact from an accident, etc., it is possible that the child restraint system has damage that is not readily visible. In such cases, do not reuse the restraint system.
  Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided with the child restraint system manufacturer and that the system is properly secured.
• Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.
• If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the trunk.

Child restraint system

■ Types of child restraint system installation methods

Confirm with the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system about the installation of the child restraint system.

Installation method Page
Seat belt attachment P.48
Child restraint LATCH anchors attachment		P.51
Anchor brackets (for top tether strap) attachment		P.53

When using a child restraint system

■ When installing a child restraint system to a front passenger seat

For the safety of a child, install child restraint systems to a rear seat. When installing child restraint system to a front passenger seat is unavoidable, adjust the passenger seat as follows and install the child restraint system.

Two 3D-rendered car seat models with pink directional arrows indicating movement or change (no text or symbols)

• Move the front seat fully rearward.
• Adjust the seat height to the upper most position.

- Adjust the seatback angle to the most upright position.

WARNING

■ When installing a child restraint system

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat.

A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. When installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, move the front seat fully rearward, adjust the seat height to the upper most position, and adjust the seatback angle to the most upright position, even if the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated.

Interior view of a car showing a person seated in a seatbelt, with no visible text or symbols

- Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front pillars or roof side rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

Illustration of a person wearing a seatbelt inside a car, with a no-smoking symbol (no text or labels present)

- When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder.

- Use child restraint system suitable to the age and size of the child and install it to the rear seat.

- If the driver's seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat.

- Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system.

Child restraint system fixed with a seat belt

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.

■ Installing child restraint system using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)

Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system.

■ Rear-facing—Infant seat/convertible seat

1 Place the child restraint system on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.

Line drawing of a car seat with a black leather seat, shown from front and side views (no text or symbols)

2 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate

into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Illustration of a car seatbelt buckle with a red arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols present)

3 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

Illustration of a car seatbelt buckle being lifted, showing a red arrow indicating the down force (no text or symbols present)

4 While pushing the child restraint system down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

Diagram of a car seatbelt buckle assembly with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

5 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. (→P.51)

■ Forward-facing—Convertible seat

1 When using the front passenger seat: Adjust the seat

If installing the child restraint system to the front passenger seat is unavoidable, refer to P.46 for front passenger seat adjustment.

2 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

Interior view of a car seatbelt seat with visible seatbelt and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

3 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a red arrow pointing to the seatbelt (no text or symbols present)

4 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock

mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

Illustration of a car seatbelt being lifted by a hand, showing seatbelt and seat (no text or symbols)

5 While pushing the child restraint system into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with two pink arrows indicating seatbelting direction (no text or symbols)

6 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, follow the child restraint manufacturer's operation manual regarding the installation, using the top tether strap to latch onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P.53)

7 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. (→P.51)

- Booster seat

1 If installing the child restraint system to the front passenger seat is unavoidable, refer to P.46 for front passenger seat adjustment.
2 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.
▶ Booster type

Interior view of a car seat with a dark leather buckle resting on the lower side (no text or symbols visible)

▶ High back type

Interior view of a car seat and backrest, showing front and rear seats with seatbelt (no text or symbols)

3 Sit the child in the child restraint system. Fit the seat belt to the child restraint system according to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible.

(→P.26)

Illustration of a child wearing a car seatbelt, seated inside a vehicle (no text or symbols)

■ Removing a child restraint system installed with a seat belt

Press the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.

When releasing the buckle, the child restraint system may spring up due to the rebound of the seat cushion. Release the buckle while holding down the child restraint system.

Since the seat belt automatically reels itself, slowly return it to the stowing position.

Interior view of a car seatbelt in the backrest, showing a black U-turn button and a pink downward arrow (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■ When installing a child restraint system

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

- Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child's neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

- Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.

● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure that it has been securely installed.

● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.

- When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder.

- Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

■ When installing a booster seat

To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to the child. (→P.28)

Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Child restraint system fixed with a child restraint LATCH anchor

■ Child restraint LATCH anchors

LATCH anchors are provided for the each rear seats. (Mark displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.)

■ When installing in the each rear seats

Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system.

▶ With flexible lower attachments

1 Latch the hooks of the lower attachments onto the LATCH anchors.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint sys-

tem indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

A Canada only

▶ With rigid lower attachments

1 Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint sys-

tem indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

A Canada only

2 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, follow the child restraint manufacturer's operation manual regarding the installation, using the top tether strap to latch onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P.53)

3 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely. (→P.51)

■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.

Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.

This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.

WARNING

■ When installing a child restraint system

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

• When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system.
  ● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.
• If the seat is adjusted, reconfirm the security of the child restraint system.

Using an anchor bracket (for top tether strap)

■ Anchor brackets (for top tether strap)

Anchor brackets are provided for the each rear seat.

Use anchor brackets when fixing the top tether strap.

A Anchor brackets
B Top tether strap

■ Fixing the top tether strap to the anchor bracket

Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system.

Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched. (→P.51)

A Top tether strap
B Hook

■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.

Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.

This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.

WARNING

■ When installing a child restraint system

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Firmly attach the top tether strap and make sure that the belt is not twisted.

WARNING

• Do not attach the top tether strap to anything other than the anchor bracket.
  ● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
  ● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

NOTICE

■ Anchor brackets (for top tether strap)

When not in use, make certain to close the lid. If it remains open, the lid may be damaged.

Lexus Enform Safety Con- nect

Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is supported by Lexus' designated response center, which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.

Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped vehicles.

By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available at Lexus.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such then-applicable Terms and Conditions.

System components

A "SOS" button
B LED light indicators
c Microphone

Services

Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:

● Automatic Collision Notification Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers. (→P.57)

*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2

● Stolen Vehicle Location

Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (→P.57)

● Emergency Assistance Button ("SOS")

Connects drivers to response-center support. (→P.57)

● Enhanced Roadside Assistance

Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (→P.57)

Subscription

After you have signed the Telematics

Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.

A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact your Lexus dealer, call the following or push the "SOS" button in your vehicle for further subscription details.

● The United States 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987)

● Canada 1-800-26-LEXUS (1-800-265-3987)

● Puerto Rico 1-877-539-8777

■ Safety Connect Services Information

- Phone calls using the vehicle's Bluetooth® technology will not be possible during Safety Connect.

● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Lexus models (in the contiguous United States only). Contact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available; charges vary by subscription term selected and location.

● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle Location will function in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, Puerto Rico and in Canada, and Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United States, Puerto Rico and in Canada.

● Automatic Collision Notification, Emer-

gency Assistance, Stolen Vehicle and Enhanced Road Assistance will not function in the United States Virgin Islands. For vehicles first sold in the USVI, no Safety Connect services will function in and outside the United States Virgin Islands.

● Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act and the device is not TTY compatible.

Languages

The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English, Spanish, and French. Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.

■ When contacting the response center

You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.

Safety Connect LED light Indicators

When the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the service is active.

The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage conditions:

● Green indicator light on = Active service
● Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process
- Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction (contact your Lexus dealer)
● No indicator light (off) = Safety

Connect service not active

Safety Connect services

■ Automatic Collision Notification

In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to automatically call the response center. The responding agent receives the vehicle's location and attempts to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent to the location.

■ Stolen Vehicle Location

If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-25-LEXUS

(1-800-255-3987) in the United States, 1-877-539-8777 in Puerto Rico or 1-800-265-3987 in Canada, and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service.

In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Further information is available at Lexus.com.

Emergency Assistance Button ("SOS")

In the event of an emergency on the road, push the "SOS" button to reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will determine your vehicle's location, assess the emergency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required.

If you accidentally press the "SOS" button, tell the response-center agent that you are not experiencing an emergency.

■ Enhanced Roadside Assistance

Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already included warranty-based Lexus roadside service.

Subscribers can press the "SOS" button to reach a Safety Connect response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Roadside Assistance services and their limitations, please see the Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are available at Lexus.com.

Safety information for Safety Connect

Important! Read this information about exposure to radio frequency signals before using Safety Connect;

The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals. In August 1996, the Federal Commu-

nications Commission (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.

● ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
● NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986]
● ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996]

Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and industries reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1).

The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to those standards.

Engine immobilizer system

The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.

Operating the system

Interior view of a car dashboard with a lock icon pointing to the left side (no text or symbols on the main components)

The indicator light flashes after the engine switch has been turned off to indicate that the system is operating.

The indicator light stops flashing after the engine switch has been turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode to indicate that the system has been canceled.

System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.

■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction

- If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object

- If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key registered to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle

NOTICE

■ To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

Alarm

The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is detected.

The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set:

• Except for Canada: A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry function, wireless remote control or mechanical key. (The doors will lock again automatically.)
• For Canada: A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry function or wireless remote control. (The doors will lock again automatically.)
  ● The trunk is opened in any way other than using the entry function or wireless remote control.
  ● The hood is opened.

Setting/deactivating/stopping the alarm system

■ Items to check before locking the vehicle

To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following:

● Nobody is in the vehicle.
● The windows and moon roof (if equipped) are closed before the alarm is set.
● No valuables or other personal

items are left in the vehicle.

Setting

Close the doors, trunk and hood, and lock both side doors. The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.

The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the system is set.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a lock icon and directional arrow pointing to the control panel (no text or symbols present)

■ Deactivating or stopping

Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:

• Unlock the doors.
• Open the trunk using the entry function or wireless remote control.
• Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)

System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.

■ Triggering of the alarm

The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:

(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)

- For Canada: The doors are unlocked using the mechanical key.

Simple line drawing of a car with a red flag attached to the side panel (no text or symbols)

● The trunk is opened using the mechanical key.

Sketch of a car interior with a magnified inset showing a hand holding a small object, no text or symbols present.

● A person inside the vehicle opens a door, the trunk or hood, or unlocks the vehicle using an inside lock button.

Line drawing of a person inside a car, viewed from the side (no text or symbols)

● The battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked. (→P.350)

Illustration of hands installing or adjusting a device component (no text or symbols visible)

■ Alarm-operated door lock

In the following cases, depending on the situation, the door may automatically lock to prevent improper entry into the vehicle:

- When a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door and the alarm is activated.

● While the alarm is activated, a person

remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door.

- When recharging or replacing the battery

NOTICE

■ To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)

These labels are attached to the vehicle to reduce vehicle theft by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. Do not remove under penalty of law.

2

2-1. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators 64

Gauges and meters .....68

Multi-information display...... 75

Fuel consumption information 84

Warning lights and indicators

The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster, center panel and outside rear view mirrors inform the driver of the status of the vehicle's various systems.

Warning lights and indicators displayed on the instrument cluster

For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations display all warning lights and indicators illuminated.

The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ depending on the target region.

Warning lights

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle systems.

(U.S.A.)
Brake system warning light ^*1 (→P.314)

(red)

Brake system warning light ^*1 (→P.314)

(Canada)

(yellow)

Brake system warning light ^*1 (→P.314)

High coolant temperature warning light ^*2 (→P.314)

Charging system warning light ^*1,2 (→P.315)

Low engine oil pressure warning light ^*2 (→P.315)

(U.S.A.)

Malfunction indicator lamp ^*1 (→P.315)

Malfunction indicator lamp ^*1 (→P.315)

SRS warning light ^*1 (→P.315)

ABS warning light ^*1 (→P.316)

ABS warning light ^*1 (→P.316)

Inappropriate pedal operation warning light ^*2 (→P.316)

Parking brake warning light ( P.316)

Parking brake warning light ( P.316)

Brake hold operated indicator ^*1 (→P.317)

Four black-and-white icons representing fuel, parking, car, and gas station (no text or symbols)

Electric power steering system warning light ^*1 (→P.317)

LTA indicator ( P.317)

PCS warning light ^*1 (→P.317)

Slip indicator ^*1 (→P.318)

Automatic headlight leveling system warning light ( P.318)

Open door warning light ( P.318)

Low fuel level warning light ( P.318)

Driver's and front passenger's seat belt reminder light ( P.318)

Rear passenger's seat belt reminder lights ^*3 (→P.319)

Master warning light ^*1 (→P.319)

Tire pressure warning light ^*1 (→P.320)

*1: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

*2: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

*3: This light illuminates on the center panel.

WARNING

If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.

Indicators

The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle's various systems.

Turn signal indicator ( P.135)

Headlight indicator ( P.141)

(U.S.A.)

Tail light indicator ( P.141)

(Canada)

Headlight high beam indicator ( P.142)

Automatic High Beam indicator ^*1 (→P.143)

PCS warning light ^*1,2 (→P.163)

Cruise control indicator ( P.181)

Dynamic radar cruise control indicator ( P.181)

Cruise control "SET" indicator ( P.181)

LTA indicator ( P.160, 175)

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) outside rear view mirror indicators ^*4,5 (→P.192)

Intuitive parking assist indicator (if equipped) ( P.200)

Slip indicator ^*1 (→P.211)

(flashes)

VSC OFF indicator ^*1,2 (→P.212)

Parking brake indicator ( P.136)

(U.S.A.)

Parking brake indicator ( P.136)

(Canada)

Brake hold standby indicator ^*1 (→P.139)

Brake hold operated indicator ^*1 (→P.139)

TRAC OFF indicator ^*1,2 (→P.212)

Smart access system with push-button start indicator ^*6 (→P.128)

Security indicator ^*7 (→P.59, 60)

Low outside temperature indicator ^*6,8 (→P.68)

Eco Driving Indicator Light ^*1 (→P.78)

"AIR BAG ON/OFF" indicator ^*1,7 (→P.38)

(U.S.A.)

"AIR BAG ON/OFF" indicator ^*1,7 (→P.38)

(Canada)

"EXPERT" indicator (→P.212)

"LAUNCH" indicator (→P.207)

- Drive mode indicators

"NORMAL" indicator ( P.205)

Eco drive mode indicator ( P.205)

"SPORTS" indicator ( P.205)

"SPORT S+" indicator (→P.205)

"CUSTOM" indicator (→P.205)

*1: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or

turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

^2 : The light comes on when the system is turned off.
^3 : Depending on the operating condition, the color and illuminating/flashing state of the light change.
*4: In order to confirm operation, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators illuminate in the following situations:
- When the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode while the BSM main switch is turned on.
- When the BSM main switch is turned on while the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

If the system is functioning correctly, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators will turn off after a few seconds. If the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators do not illuminate or do not turn off, there may be a malfunction in the system. If this occurs, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

^5 : This light illuminates on the outside rear view mirrors.
^6 : This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
*7: This light illuminates on the center panel.
*8: When the outside temperature is approximately 37°F (3°C) or lower, this indicator will flash for approximately 10 seconds, then stay on.

Gauges and meters

Meter display

■ Locations of gauges and meters

If the drive mode is changed, some of the meter displays and the gauge layout will be changed.

The units used on the meters may differ depending on the target region.

▶ Normal mode

A Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data ( P.75)

Displays warning messages in case of a malfunction ( P.323)

B Fuel gauge

c Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator () enters the red zone, a buzzer will sound and the indicator will turn red and start flashing. Also, a warning message will be displayed.

D Engine oil temperature gauge

Displays the engine oil temperature. If the engine oil temperature gauge indicator ( ) enters the red zone, the indicator will turn red and start flashing.

E Outside temperature

Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40^ ( -40^ ) to 122^ ( 50^ ). Low outside temperature indicator comes on when the ambient temperature is 37^ ( 3^ ) or lower.

F Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute

G Digital speedometer

H Analog speedometer

I Shift position/shift range/gear position ( P.132)

J Odometer and trip meter display ( P.74)

▶ Eco drive mode

A Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data ( P.75)

Displays warning messages in case of a malfunction ( P.323)

B Fuel gauge

C Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator () enters the red zone, a buzzer will sound and the indicator will turn red and start flashing. Also, a warning message will be displayed.

D Engine oil temperature gauge

Displays the engine oil temperature. If the engine oil temperature gauge indicator ( ) enters the red zone, the indicator will turn red and start flashing.

E Outside temperature

Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40^ ( -40^ ) to 122^ ( 50^ ). Low outside temperature indicator comes on when the ambient temperature is 37^ ( 3^ ) or lower.

F Eco driving meter

Displays the vehicle acceleration. The more rapidly the vehicle is accelerated, the lower the number of blue segments displayed, indicating that your driving is less ecofriendly. This meter is designed as a guideline to show the eco-friendliness of your driving.

G Digital speedometer

H Analog speedometer

I Shift position/shift range/gear position (→P.132)

J Odometer and trip meter display ( P.74)

▶ SPORTS mode

The units used on the meters may differ depending on the target region.

These illustrations show the default meter display for SPORT S mode. The meter displays for SPORT S mode can be changed on the settings display of the multi-information display.

A Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data ( P.75)

Displays warning messages in case of a malfunction (→P.323)

B Fuel gauge

C Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator (▼) enters the red zone, a buzzer will sound and the indicator will turn red and start flashing. Also, a warning message will be displayed.

D Engine oil temperature gauge

Displays the engine oil temperature. If the engine oil temperature gauge indicator ( ) enters the red zone, the indicator will turn red and start flashing.

E Outside temperature

Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C). Low

outside temperature indicator comes on when the ambient temperature is 37^ F ( 3^ C) or lower.

F Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute

G Digital speedometer

H Analog speedometer

I Shift position/shift range/gear position (→P.132)

J Odometer and trip meter display ( P.74)

▶ SPORT S+ mode

The units used on the meters may differ depending on the target region.

These illustrations show the default meter display for SPORT S+ mode. The meter displays for SPORT S+ mode can be changed on the settings display of the multi-information display.

A Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data ( P.75)

Displays warning messages in case of a malfunction ( P.323)

B Fuel gauge

C Outside temperature

Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40^ ( -40^ ) to 122^ ( 50^ ). Low outside temperature indicator comes on when the ambient temperature is 37^ ( 3^ ) or lower.

D Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator (▼) enters the red zone, a buzzer will sound and the indicator will turn red and start flashing. Also, a warning message will be displayed.

E Engine oil temperature gauge

Displays the engine oil temperature. If the engine oil temperature gauge indicator ( ) enters the red zone, the indicator will turn red and start flashing.

F Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute

G Digital speedometer

H Analog speedometer

Shift position/shift range/gear position (→P.132)

J Odometer and trip meter display ( P.74)

■ Speed indicator

When the vehicle reaches the set speed, the speed unit display will turn yellow.

The indicators will be displayed in yellow (corresponding to a speed set by a user) or red (fixed at 100 mph [160 km/h]).

This setting can be enabled on the multi-information display.

* : Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.

■ Rev indicator (SPORT S mode/SPORT S+ mode)

When the shift lever is in M, an indicator on the tachometer will be displayed in 3 steps. When the 3rd level indicator is displayed, the indicator will flash and a buzzer will sound to notify you of shift-up timing.

The indicator may be displayed when downshifting, depending on the engine speed.

These illustrations show the default meter display for SPORT S mode and SPORT S+ mode. The meter displays for SPORT S mode and SPORT S+ mode can be changed on the settings display of the multi-information display.

A SPORTS mode

B SPORT S+ mode

■ Rev peak (Normal mode/SPORT S mode)

The engine speed reaches or exceeds 3600 rpm, an afterimage of the tachometer will be displayed at the highest engine speed for approximately 1 second.

Changing the display

■ Meter display and layout

If the drive mode is changed, some of the meter displays and the gauge layout will be changed. (→P.205)

■ The meters and display illuminate when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■ Welcome illumination of the analog speedometer

- When the driver's door is opened, the analog speedometer will illuminate. Then, when the driver's door is closed, the analog speedometer will illuminate and go off (pulsate) 3 times.

In the following situations, the analog speedometer will not pulsate even though the driver's door is opened and closed:

• Within 60 seconds after the analog meter pulsation completes

- Within 60 seconds of turning the engine switch off

■ Variable red zone

To help protect the engine, the engine speed is controlled by starting the red zone of the tachometer at different engine speeds ranging from 3700 rpm to 7300 rpm depending on the engine coolant temperature. Before driving under extremely high load conditions, make sure to sufficiently warm up the engine.

Eco driving meter

The number of blue segments displayed on the eco driving meter decreases/increases depending on the vehicle acceleration. Use this meter as a guideline when you wish to drive in an eco-friendly manner that reduces fuel consumption. However, on a downward grade where the vehicle can accelerate without the accelerator pedal being depressed, the eco driving meter may not display the eco-driving state correctly.

- When the shift lever is moved to P, N or R, the segments will turn gray and the eco driving meter will not operate.

■ Dimming the analog speedometer lighting

The analog speedometer lighting will be dimmed when the ambient light is bright, such as during the daytime, and SPORT S or SPORT S+ mode is selected.

■ Outside temperature display

In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change:

- When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])

- When the outside temperature has

changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)

• When “__” or “E” is displayed, the system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.

■ Pop-up display

In some situations, such as when a switch operation is performed, a pop-up display will be temporarily displayed on the multi-information display.

Some pop-up displays can be set on/off. (→P.82)

Liquid crystal display

Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.

Customization

The meter display can be customized on the multi-information display. ( P.374)

WARNING

■ The information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

For example, there is a lag between the driver's shifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or injury.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
- Do not let the indicator of the tachometer enter the red zone, as it represents the engine speed range which exceeds the maximum safe engine speed.
In the following situations, the engine may be overheating. In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (→P.352)

- The engine coolant temperature gauge indicator ( ) in the red zone and flashing.

- The engine oil temperature gauge indicator ( ) in the red zone and flashing.

Odometer and trip meter display

■ Display items

- Odometer

Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
- Trip meter A/trip meter B

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.

To reset, display the desired trip meter and press and hold the odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button.

■ Changing the display

Each time the "ODO TRIP" switch is pressed, the displayed item will be changed. When the trip meter is displayed, pressing and holding the switch

will reset the trip meter.

Changing the instrument panel light brightness

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.

A Darker
B Brighter

■ Instrument panel brightness adjustment

The instrument panel brightness levels when the tail lights are on and off can be adjusted individually. However, when the surroundings are bright (daytime, etc.), turning on the tail lights will not change the instrument panel brightness. At this time, any adjustments made to the instrument panel brightness levels will be applied to both settings at once.

Multi-information display

The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data.

Displays and menu icons

■ Display

▶ Content display area

By selecting menu icons on the multi-information display, a variety of driving-related information can be displayed. The multi-information display can also be used to change display settings and other vehicle settings.

Warning or suggestion/advice pop-up displays are also displayed in certain situations.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

▶ Sub-content display area

Displays some "F" content in conjunction with the content display area.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

■ Menu icons

The menu icons will be displayed by pressing or of the meter control switch.

	Drive information
	“F” content
	Navigation system-linked display (if equipped)
	Audio system-linked display
	Driving assist system information
	Warning message display
	Settings display

■ Start-up display

When the engine is started, the name of the vehicle is displayed on the multi-information display.

While the start-up display is being displayed, the meter display cannot be changed even if the drive mode is changed. When the start-up display is finished, the meter display for the currently selected mode will be displayed.

- Liquid crystal display

→P.74

WARNING

■ The information display at low temperatures

→P.74

Changing the meter display

The multi-information display is operated using the meter control switches.

A < / : Select menu icons

^ / : Change displayed content, scroll up/down the screen and move the cursor up/down

B Press: Enter/Set

Press and hold: Reset

C Return to the previous screen

Pressing and holding the switch will display the first screen of the selected menu icon.

D Press: Display the top screen Press and hold: Register current screen as the top screen

E Call sending/receiving and history display

Linked with the hands-free system, sending or receiving call is displayed. For details regarding the hands-free system, refer to the "NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA

SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

■ Registering a top screen

The displayed top screen can be changed to a registered screen of your choice.

To register a screen as the top screen, display the desired screen and press and hold

• A message asking to confirm if registration is desired will be displayed. If the selected screen cannot be registered, a registration failure message will be displayed.
• When no screen has been registered, the drive information screen will be displayed.

■ Resetting drive information

To reset the average fuel economy (after reset)/average vehicle speed (after reset)/elapsed time (after reset) that are displayed on i display the desired item and press and hold.

If both of the displayed items are resettable, a message will be displayed asking which item(s) to reset.

Content displayed as drive information

■ Drive information 1/Drive information 2/Drive information 3

Select to display various drive data.

Up to 2 of the following items can be selected for each drive information screen:

Items displayed can be switched by

pressing or of the meter con- trol switches to select and pressing ^ or .√

Use the displayed values as a reference only.

• Drive information 1
• Current fuel consumption
  • Average fuel economy (after reset)
• Drive information 2
  • Distance (driving range)
  • Average vehicle speed (after reset)
• Drive information 3
  • Average fuel economy (after refuel)
• Elapsed time (after start)

Displayed items (listed below) can be changed on 📐→P.82)

● Current fuel consumption

Displays instantaneous current fuel consumption

● Average fuel economy
• After reset: Displays average fuel consumption since display reset ^1,2
• After start: Displays average fuel consumption since engine start ^2
• After refuel: Displays average fuel consumption since refuel ^*2,3

● Average vehicle speed

• After reset: Displays average vehicle speed since display reset ^*1

• After start: Displays average vehicle speed since engine start

- Elapsed time

- After reset: Displays elapsed time since the display was reset ^*1

• After start: Displays elapsed time since engine start

- Distance

- Driving range: Displays driving range with remaining fuel ^*3,4

• After start: Displays drive distance since vehicle start

- Other

Blank: No item

*1: Resetting: →P.77

*2: Use the displayed fuel consumption as a reference.

*3: When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated. When refueling, turn the engine switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the engine switch off, the display may not be updated.

*4: This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

■ Eco Driving Indicator

During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco driving), the Eco Driving Indicator Light will turn on.

When the acceleration exceeds the Zone of Eco driving, or when the vehicle is stopped, the light turns off.

Eco Driving Indicator will not operate under the following conditions:

● The shift lever is in any position other than D.
● A paddle shift switch is operated.
● Neither normal mode nor Eco drive mode is selected. (→P.205)
● The vehicle speed is approximately 80 mph (130 km/h) or higher.

Tire pressure

→P.285

Gear positions

Displays the current gear position when the shift lever is in D or M.

Units

The units of measure used can be changed while driving.

Unlike the units setting performed on

the units setting performed on i can be changed while driving.

Blank (No items)

Displays no drive information contents.

Tire pressure

It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode. It may also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted.

- “---” may be displayed if the tire position information cannot be determined due to unfavorable radio wave conditions.

● Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be different from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge.

"F" content

Lap timer

Measures and displays current lap time and previous lap times

- Reading the display

Measured lap times since the timer was last reset are displayed as follows:

- Content display area

A Total lap time

B Past lap times

C Fastest lap (marked with a star)

- Sub-content display area

A Current lap time

B Most recent lap time

● Operating the meter control switches

A Press: Start/stop lap timer Press and hold: Reset

B >: Mark off one lap

^ ∨ : Change displayed content

While a lap time is being measured, the display can be changed to show the following content:

• G - force
• Tire pressure
• Rear wing position
• Resetting/saving measured lap times

After stopping the lap timer, press and hold

When a confirmation screen is displayed, select to reset/save the measured lap times.

When saved, the lap time data will be displayed on the history screen. (→P.79)

■ History (Lap timer)

Displays the saved lap times

• Reading the display
  • History top screen

A Total lap time
B Fastest lap time

- Past lapscreen

A Page
B Past lap times (20 most recent lap times)

Press /ʌto scroll up and down the screen.

- Switching the display

To display the past lap screen, press 📋.

To return to the history top screen, press ↩.

- Deleting history

When the history top screen is displayed, press and hold to display a confirmation screen.

To delete the history, follow the instructions displayed on the screen.

G-force

Displays lateral G-forces on the vehicle

Also displays, around the periphery of the G-force display, the left and right steering amount, accelerator pedal input, and brake fluid pressure

- Reading the display

- Normal display

Displays the following on the content display area

A Acceleration G-force on the vehicle
B Current G-force value (analyzed value of front/rear and left/right G-forces)
C Accelerator pedal input
D Brake fluid pressure
E Steering amount

- Advanced display

Displays the following on the sub-content display area and content display area

▶ Content display area

A Acceleration G-force on the vehicle
B Record of the maximum G-forces
C Value of the maximum G-force since display reset (analyzed value of front/rear and left/right G-forces)
D Accelerator pedal input
E Brake fluid pressure
F Steering amount

▶ Sub-content display area

A G-force direction
B Current G-force value (analyzed value of front/rear and left/right G-forces)

This display is intended for use as a guideline. Depending on factors such as the road surface condition, temperature and vehicle speed, the display may not show the actual condition of the vehicle.

- Switching the display

To switch to advanced display, press

To return to normal display, press

• Resetting the record of maximum G-forces
  With the record of maximum G-forces displayed, press and hold to reset the display.
  ● Peak hold function (advanced display only)

If lateral G-forces of 0.5 G or greater are generated, the G-force value displayed on the sub-content display area will turn yellow and be held for 3 seconds.

■ Rear wing position (vehicles with an active rear wing)

Displays the raised/retracted state of the active rear wing

■ Using the lap timer

If the engine is stopped while a lap is being timed, the lap timer will stop and the lap time up to that point will be recorded.

G-force display

● The G-force values may not be zero even when the vehicle is parked, such as when it is parked on an incline.
The steering amount, accelerator pedal input, and brake fluid pressure displays are disabled until the engine has warmed up (the variable red zone of the tachome-

ter has retracted to 7300 rpm).

After the engine has warmed up, these displays will be enabled.

● Depending on the vehicle usage conditions, the brake fluid pressure display may not reach its maximum reading even though the brake pedal is fully depressed.
- If a battery terminal is disconnected and reconnected, the steering amount display may be disabled temporarily. After driving the vehicle for a while, the display will be enabled.

Navigation system-linked display (if equipped)

Select to display the following navigation system-linked information.

• Route guidance to destination
• Compass display (heading-up display)

Audio system-linked display

The operating conditions of the audio system can be displayed on the multi-information display.

Driving support system information display

Select to display the operational status of the following systems:

● LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) ( P.170)
● RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped) ( P.179)
● Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range ( P.181)

Warning message display

Select to display warning messages and measures to be taken if a malfunction is detected. ( P.323)

Settings display

■ Meter display settings that can be changed

- Language

Select to change the language on the display.

Units

Select to change the units of measure displayed.

● Eco Driving Indicator Light (→P.78)

Select to enable/disable the Eco Driving Indicator Light.

- switch settings

Displays a procedure to register a desired screen to

You can register 1 screen as a shortcut, which can be displayed by pressing

● Drive information screen ( P.77)

Select to select up to 2 items that will be displayed on each Drive information screen (Drive information 1 screen, Drive information 2 screen, and Drive information 3 screen) respectively.

- Pop-up display (→P.74)

Select to enable/disable the pop-up display.

• Intersection Guidance (if equipped)
- Telephone
- Audio Feedback

• Volume Feedback

- Adjust Brightness

- Rev indicator (→P.72)

- Select to enable/disable the Rev indicator.

- Select to set the desired engine speed at which the Rev indicator will begin to be displayed.

- Rev peak (→P.73)

Select to enable/disable the Rev peak.

- Gauge options

Select to change the displayed meters for each applicable drive mode.

- Default setting

Select to reset the meter display settings to the default setting.

■ Vehicle functions and settings that can be changed

→P.374

■ Suspension of the settings display

Some settings cannot be changed while driving. When changing settings, park the vehicle in a safe place.

- If a warning message is displayed, operation of the settings display will be suspended.

■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals

The following information data will be reset:

- Drive information

● Lap timer: Measured lap times, history

● G-force: Record of the maximum G-forces

Customization

Some functions can be customized. (→P.374)

WARNING

■ Caution for use while driving

- When operating the multi-information display while driving, pay extra attention to the safety of the area around the vehicle.

- Do not look continuously at the multi-information display while driving as you may fail to see pedestrians, objects on the road, etc. ahead of the vehicle.

■ Cautions during setting up the display

As the engine needs to be running during setting up the display, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE

■ While setting up the display

To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while setting up the display features.

Fuel consumption information

Fuel consumption information can be displayed on the Center Display.

Vehicles with a 10.3-inch display: The fuel consumption information can be displayed and operated on the side display.

System components

A Center Display

B "MENU" button

C Touchpad

Consumption

- Trip information

Press the "MENU" button on the Remote Touch, then select ⓘ the

menu screen, and then select "ECO". If a screen other than "Trip Information" is displayed, select "Trip Information".

A Resetting the consumption data

B Fuel consumption in the past 15 minutes

c Current fuel consumption

D Average vehicle speed since the engine was started.

E Elapsed time since the engine was started.

F Cruising range

Average fuel consumption for the past 15 minutes is divided by color into past averages and averages attained since the engine switch was last turned to IGNITION ON mode. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

History

Press the "MENU" button on the Remote Touch, then select the menu screen, and then select "ECO".

If a screen other than "History" is displayed, select "History".

A Best recorded fuel consumption
B Latest fuel consumption
C Previous fuel consumption record
D Resetting the history data
E Updating the latest fuel consumption data

The average fuel consumption history is divided by color into past averages and the average fuel consumption since the last updated. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

■ Updating the history data

Update the latest fuel consumption by selecting "Clip" to measure the current fuel consumption again.

■ Resetting the data

The fuel consumption data can be deleted by selecting "Clear".

Cruising range

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.

This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption.

As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

Using the side display (vehicles with a 10.3-inch display)

Display the vehicle information on the side display ( P.222), and then select

or ▶ display the desired

screen.

The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

- Trip information (type A)

Displays the average fuel consumption for the past 10 minutes in 1 minute intervals, as well as the cruising range.

Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

- Trip information (type B)

Displays the cruising range, latest fuel consumption and the amount of time elapsed since the engine was started.

Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

History

Displays the average fuel consumption and highest fuel consumption.

Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

3

3-1. Key information

Keys 88

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Doors....92

Trunk 95

Smart access system with push-button start....98

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats....103

Power easy access system/driving position memory/memory recall function....105

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel....108

Inside rear view mirror......109

Outside rear view mirrors.....110

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows.... 112

Moon roof 114

Keys

The keys

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

graph TD
    A["Units A and B"] --> C["Device C"]
    A --> D["Device D"]
    B --> D
    B --> B1["Switch"]
    B1 --> B2["Switch"]
    B2 --> B3["Switch"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style B1 fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style B2 fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

A Electronic keys

• Operating the smart access system with push-button start (→P.98)
• Operating the wireless remote control function (→P.90)
  B Mechanical keys
  C Key number plate
  D Card key (electronic key) (if equipped)

Operating the smart access system with push-button start ( P.98)

- Card key (if equipped)

● The card key is not waterproof.
● The mechanical key that is stored inside the card key should be used only if a problem arises, such as when the card

key does not operate properly.

• If it is difficult to take out the mechanical key, push down the lock release button using a pen tip etc. If it is still difficult to pull it out, use a coin etc.
• To store the mechanical key in the card key, insert it while pressing the lock release button.

Diagram showing a device with a handle and arrow indicating movement, no text or symbols present

- If the battery cover is not installed and the battery falls out or if the battery was removed because the key got wet, reinstall the battery with the positive terminal facing the Lexus emblem.

Diagram showing two devices with arrows indicating a process or connection, no text or symbols present.

■ When riding in an aircraft

When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.

■ Electronic key battery depletion

● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The card key battery life is about a year and a half.)
- If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin and a message will be shown on the multi-information display when the engine is stopped.

- As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary.

- The smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate.

• The detection area becomes smaller.

- The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.

● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:

• TVs

- Personal computers

• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers

- Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones

- Table lamps

- Induction cookers

■ Replacing the battery

→P.295

■ Confirmation of the registered key number

The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.

NOTICE

■ To prevent key damage

- Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.

- Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.

- Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.

- Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to such materials.

- Do not disassemble the keys.

- Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.

- Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio systems and induction cookers.

- Carrying the electronic key on your person

Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly.

In case of a smart access system with push-button start malfunction or other key-related problems

→P.346

■ When an electronic key is lost

→P.345

■ Handling the card key (if equipped)

- Do not apply excess force when inserting the mechanical key into the card key. Doing so may damage the card key.

- If the battery or card key terminals get wet, the battery may corrode. If the key is dropped into water, or if drinking water etc. is spilled on the key, immediately remove the battery cover and wipe the battery and terminals. (To remove the battery cover, lightly grasp and pull it.) If the battery is corroded, have your Lexus dealer replace the battery.

- Do not crush the battery cover or use a screwdriver to remove the battery cover. Forcibly removing the battery cover may bend or damage the key.

- If the battery cover is frequently removed, the battery cover may become loose.

NOTICE

• When installing the battery, make sure to check the direction of the battery. Installing the battery in the wrong direction may cause the battery to deplete rapidly.
  ● The surface of the card key may be damaged, or its coating may peel off in the following situations:
  • The card key is carried together with hard objects, such as coins and keys.
  • The card key is scraped with a sharp object, such as the tip of a mechanical pencil.
  • The surface of the card key is wiped with thinner or benzene.

Wireless remote control

The electronic keys are equipped with the following wireless remote control:

A Locks the doors ( P.92)
B Unlocks the doors ( P.92)
C Opens the windows and moon roof (if equipped) ^* ( P.92)
D Opens the trunk ( P.97)
E Sounds the alarm

*: This setting must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

Panic mode

When is pressed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.

To stop the alarm, press any button on the electronic key.

Illustration of a car with a person running on top and a smartphone displaying signal waves, no text or symbols present.

Using the mechanical key

To take out the mechanical key, push the release button and take the key out.

The mechanical key can only be inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt to insert it.

After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. (→P.346)

- When required to leave the vehicle's key with a parking attendant

Set the luggage security system ( P.98) on and lock the glove box ( P.236) as circumstances demand.

Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only.

If you lose your mechanical keys

→P.345

If a wrong key is used

The key cylinder rotates freely, isolated from the internal mechanism.

Doors

Unlocking and locking the doors from the outside

■ Smart access system with push-button start

Carry the electronic key to enable this function.

1 Grip the driver's door handle to unlock the door. Grip the passenger's door handle to unlock both side doors.*

Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle.

The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked.

*: The door unlock settings can be changed.

2 Touch the lock sensor (indentation on the side of the door handle) to lock the doors.

Check that the door is securely locked.

■ Wireless remote control

1 Locks both side doors Check that the door is securely locked.

2 Unlocks both side doors Pressing the button unlocks the driver's door. Pressing the button again within 5 seconds unlocks the other door.

Press and hold to open the windows and moon roof (if equipped).*

*: This setting must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

■ Side window open/close function linked to door operation

When a door is opened, its window opens slightly. When a door is closed, its window closes completely.

■ Switching the door unlock function

It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote control.

1 Turn the engine switch off. 2 When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold,

or for approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding

The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2.)

Multi-information display/Beep	Unlocking function
Exterior: Beeps 3 timesInterior: Pings once	Holding the driver's door handle unlocks only the driver's door.
	Holding the passenger's door handle unlocks both side doors.
Exterior: Beeps twiceInterior: Pings once	Holding either door handle unlocks both side doors.

To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open and close a door once after the settings have been changed. (If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after isporessed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.)

In a case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. ( P.60)

■ Impact detection door lock release system

In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, both side doors are unlocked. Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system may not operate.

Operation signals

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)

A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon roof are operating.

■ Welcome light illumination control

The side marker, parking, tail and license plate lights automatically turn on at night

when the doors are unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control if the light switch is in the APTG position.

■ Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

- When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the surface of the door handle

Use your palm to touch the lock sensor.

Illustration of a hand holding a small object, possibly a device or tool, with no visible text or symbols.

■ Open door warning buzzer

If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.

Setting the alarm

Locking the doors will set the alarm system. ( P.60)

■ Conditions affecting the operation of the smart access system with push-button start or wireless remote control →P.100

If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate properly

Use the mechanical key and/or inside lock buttons to lock and unlock the doors. (→P.346)

Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. ( P.295)

Customization

Some functions can be customized. (→P.374)

WARNING

■ To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.

Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant being thrown out of the vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury.

• Ensure that both side doors are properly closed and locked.
• Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.

The doors may be opened even if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.

■ Side window open/close function linked to door operation

Do not hold the upper edge of the side window when you close the door. Otherwise, your fingers or hand may be caught in the window.

Unlocking and locking the doors from the inside

■ Door lock switches (to lock/unlock)

1 Locks both side doors
2 Unlocks both side doors

■ Inside lock buttons (to lock/unlock)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Both side doors can be opened by pulling the inside handle even if the lock buttons are in the lock position.

■ Locking the doors from the outside without a key

1 Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
2 Close the door.

The door cannot be locked if the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle. However, the key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.

If a symbol indicating one or more of the doors open is shown on the multi-information display

The hood, one or more of the doors, or trunk is not fully closed. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h), the master warning light flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the door(s) are not fully closed. Make sure to close hood, all doors and trunk.

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems

The following functions can be set or canceled:

For instructions on customizing, refer to

P.374

Function Operation
Speed linked door locking function	Both side doors are automatically locked when vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Shift position linked door locking function	Both side doors are automatically locked when the shift lever is shifted to a position other than P.
Shift position linked door unlocking function	Both side doors are automatically unlocked when the shift lever is shifted to P.
Driver's door linked door unlocking function	Both side doors are automatically unlocked when driver's door is opened.

Trunk

The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener switch, entry function or wireless remote control.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Before driving

● Make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving and hit near-by objects or luggage in the trunk may be thrown out, causing an accident.

- Do not allow children to play in the trunk. If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could suffer from heat exhaustion, suffocation or other injuries.

- Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid. Doing so may cause the trunk lid to open unexpectedly, or cause the child's hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.

■ Important points while driving

Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.

Using the trunk

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury.

WARNING

- Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened.

- When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe.

- If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the trunk is about to open or close.

- Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind.

- On an incline it is more difficult to open or close the trunk lid than on a level surface, so beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk.

- When opening the trunk lid, take care so that it does not hit anyone in the face or any other part of the body.

Illustration of a person pushing a car with a large container, no text or symbols present

- When closing the trunk lid, take extra care to prevent your fingers etc. from being caught.

Illustration of a person cleaning a car with a no-smoking symbol (no text or labels)

- When closing the trunk lid, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface. If the trunk handle is used to fully close the trunk lid, it may result in hands or arms being caught.

- Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened.

Opening/closing the trunk

■ Trunk opener switch

Press the trunk opener switch.

■ Smart access system with push-button start

While carrying the electronic key, press the button on the trunk lid.

When both side doors are unlocked using one of the following methods, the trunk can be opened without the electronic key:

• Entry function
  ● Wireless remote control
• Door lock switches
  ● Automatic door unlocking system
• Mechanical key

■ Wireless remote control

Press and hold the switch.

A buzzer sounds.

Trunk grip

Using the trunk grip, lower the trunk without applying force to the side and push the trunk down from the outside to close it.

Diagram of a car interior showing a vehicle's rear panel with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

Trunk light

● The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.

- If the trunk light is left on when the engine switch is turned off, the light will go off

automatically after 20 minutes.

■ Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key inside

- When both side doors are locked, closing the trunk lid with the electronic key left inside the trunk will sound an alarm. In this case, the trunk lid can be opened by pressing the trunk release button on the trunk lid.

- If the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with both side doors locked, the key confinement prevention function is activated so the trunk can be opened. In order to prevent theft, take all electronic keys with you when leaving the vehicle.

- If the electronic key is put in the trunk with both side doors locked, the key may not be detected depending on the location of the key and the surrounding radio wave conditions. In this case, the key confinement prevention function cannot be activated, causing the doors to lock when the trunk is closed. Make sure to check where the key is before closing the trunk.

● The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if either door is unlocked. In this case, open the trunk using the trunk opener.

Internal trunk release lever

The trunk lid can be opened by pulling the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside of the trunk lid upward.

The lever will continue to glow for some time after the trunk lid is closed.

Diagram of a car interior showing a highlighted component with an arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols present)

■ Using the mechanical key

The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. ( P.347)

If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate properly

Use the mechanical key to unlock the trunk. (→P.347)

Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. ( P.295)

If a symbol indicating the trunk opens is shown on the multi-information display

$$ \rightarrow \mathrm{P.94} $$

Customization

Some functions can be customized. (→P.374)

Luggage security system

To protect luggage stored in the trunk against theft, the luggage security system can be set to on.

1 Close the inside trunk door. (if equipped) ( P.238)
2 To disable the trunk opener, turn the main switch in the glove box off.

A On
B Off

When the main switch is off, the trunk lid cannot be opened even with the wireless remote control or entry function.

■ When leaving a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant

$$ \rightarrow \mathrm{P.91} $$

Smart access system with push-button start

The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key (including the card key) on your person, for example in your pocket. The driver should always carry the electronic key.

• Locks and unlocks the doors (→P.92)
• Opens the trunk (→P.96)
• Starts the engine (→P.128)

Antenna location

A Antennas outside the cabin
B Antennas inside the cabin
C Antenna inside the trunk
D Antenna outside the trunk

■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)

A When locking or unlocking the doors

The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of an outside door handle. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.)

B When opening the trunk

The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of the trunk release button.

C When starting the engine or changing engine switch modes

The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.

- Alarms and warning messages

An alarm sounds and warning messages are displayed on the multi-information display to protect against unexpected accidents or theft of the vehicle resulting from erroneous operation. When a warning message is displayed, take appropriate measures based on the displayed message. (→P.323)

When only an alarm sounds, circumstances and correction procedures are as follows.

- When an exterior alarm sounds once for 5 seconds

Situation	Correction procedure
The trunk was closed while the electronic key was still inside the trunk and both side doors were locked.	Retrieve the electronic key from the trunk and close the trunk lid.
An attempt was made to lock the vehicle while a door was open.	Close both side doors and lock the doors again.

- When an interior alarm sounds continuously

Situation	Correction procedure
The engine switch was turned to ACCESSORY mode while the driver's door was open (or the driver's door was opened while the engine switch was in ACCESSORY mode).	Turn the engine switch off and close the driver's door.
The engine switch was turned off while the driver's door was open.	Close the driver's door.

Battery-saving function

The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key battery and the vehicle battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation for a long time.

- In the following situations, the smart access system with push-button start may take some time to unlock the doors.

• The electronic key has been left within approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.

- The smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 5 days or longer.

- If the smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 14 days or

longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at the passenger door. In this case, take hold of the driver's door handle, or use the wireless remote control or mechanical key, to unlock the doors.

Electronic Key Battery-Saving Function

When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the electronic key from receiving radio waves.

Press twice while pressing and holding

. Confirm that the electronic key indicator flashes 4 times.

While the battery-saving mode is set, the smart access system with push-button start cannot be used. To cancel the function, press any of the electronic key buttons.

Illustration of a car key with control buttons and a starburst symbol (no text or labels)

■ Conditions affecting operation

The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start, wireless remote control and engine immobilizer system from operating properly.

(Ways of coping: →P.346)

• When the electronic key battery is depleted
  ● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device
• When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached

• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
- Coins
- Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs

- When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby

- When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves

• Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
  • Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
• If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window
• When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic devices

■ Note for the entry function

● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:
- The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
- The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear bumper center when the trunk is opened.
- The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the door pockets or glove box when the engine is started or engine switch modes are changed.
- Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the doors will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle.
- As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only

the doors detecting the electronic key can be used to unlock the vehicle.

● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the engine if the electronic key is near the window.
● The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash, when the electronic key is within the effective range. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)
- If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)
- Touching the door lock or unlock sensor while wearing gloves may prevent lock or unlock operation.
- When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition signals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will be given.
- If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In this case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
- Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
- Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system with push-button start. (→P.100)
- If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock both side doors.
● The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again.

• A sudden handle operation or a handle operation immediately after entering the effective range may prevent the doors from being unlocked. Touch the door unlock sensor and check that the doors are unlocked before pulling the door handle again.
• Unlocking the vehicle may take more time if another electronic key is within the effective range.
  ■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
  ● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle.
• The smart access system with push-button start can be deactivated in advance.

■ To operate the system properly

● Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle.

Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.)

• Do not leave the electronic key inside the trunk.
  The key confinement prevention function may not operate, depending on the location of the key (close to a spare tire [if equipped], the inside edge of the trunk), conditions (inside a metal bag, close to metallic objects) and the radio waves in the surrounding area. ( P.98)
  If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly
• Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk: →P.346
  ● Starting the engine: →P.348
  Customization

Some functions can be customized. (→P.374)

If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a customized setting
- Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk: Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (→P.92, 96, 346)
Starting the engine and changing engine switch modes: →P.348
- Stopping the engine: P.129

WARNING

■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should keep away from the smart access system with push-button start antennas. (→P.99)

The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.

- Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

Ask your Lexus dealer for details on disabling the entry function.

Front seats

WARNING

■ When adjusting the seat position

Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.
- Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.

Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

Make sure to leave enough space around the feet so they do not get stuck.

Seat adjustment

To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary.

If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Adjustment procedure

A Seat position adjustment
B Seatback angle adjustment
C Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment
D Vertical height adjustment
E Lumbar support adjustment (driver's seat only)

Power easy access system

The driver's seat and steering wheel move in accordance with engine switch mode and the driver's seat belt condition. (→P.105)

■ When adjusting the seat

Take care when adjusting the seat so that the head restraint does not touch the ceiling.

Entering/exiting the rear seats (lever-operated "Front, Fold & Return" seat)

■ Before entering/exiting the rear seats

Remove the seat belt from the seat belt guide. (→P.28)

■ Entering/exiting the rear seat

1 Pull the lever.

The front seat will lower automatically.

Illustration of a car seat with an inset showing a highlighted section and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

2 Fold the seatback completely forward.

The front seat will move forward automatically.

Illustration of a gray ergonomic chair with a pink arrow pointing to the seat area (no text or symbols)

■ Returning the front seat to its original position

Move the seatback backward until it locks. The front seat will return to its original position automatically.

■ Lever-operated "Front, Fold & Return" seat

After the front seat is moved forward by operating the "Front, Fold & Return" seat lever, if a power seat adjusting switch or a driving position memory switch is pressed, the front seat will not return to its original position even if the front seatback is moved backward until it locks.

● The lever-operated "Front, Fold & Return" seat will not operate in the follow-

ing situations:

- The front seat belt of the seat to be operated is fastened.

- The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the shift lever is in a position other than P (driver's seat only).

Operation of the lever-operated "Front, Fold & Return" seat will stop in the following situations:

- A power seat adjusting switch or a driving position memory switch is pressed.

- The front seat belt of the seat which is operating is fastened.

- The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the shift lever is moved to a position other than P (driver's seat only).

Jam protection function

While the lever-operated "Front, Fold & Return" seat is operating, if an object is stuck either in front of or behind the front seat, the front seat will stop and then move in the opposite direction slightly.

WARNING

■ Lever-operated "Front, Fold & Return" seat
Before operating the lever-operated "Front, Fold & Return" seat, ensure that any surrounding passengers or objects will not contact the seat.
Make sure the seatback is locked securely before driving.
● Never operate the lever-operated "Front, Fold & Return" seat while the vehicle is moving.
Jam protection function

Do not use a hand, foot, or any other part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.

Power easy access sys- tem/driving position mem- ory\*/memory recall function\*

*: If equipped

This feature automatically adjusts the driver's seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors to make entering and exiting the vehicle easier or to suit your preferences.

Power easy access system

The seat and steering wheel ^* are automatically adjusted to allow the driver to enter and exit the vehicle easily.

When all of the following have been performed, the driver's seat and steering wheel* are automatically adjusted to a position that allows driver to enter and exit the vehicle easily.

● The shift lever has been shifted to P.
● The engine switch has been turned off.
- The driver's seat belt has been unfastened.

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel, dashboard, and seat area with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

When any of the following has been performed, the driver's seat and steering wheel ^* automatically return to their original positions.

● The engine switch has been turned to ACCESSORY mode or IGNITION ON mode.
- The driver's seat belt has been fastened.
*: Power type

■ Operation of the power easy access system

When exiting the vehicle, the power easy access system may not operate if the seat is already close to the rear position, etc.

Customization

Some functions can be customized. (→P.374)

Recording a driving position into memory (vehicles with driving position memory)

1 Check that the shift lever is in P.
2 Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
3 Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view mirrors to the desired positions.
4 While pressing the "SET" button, or within 3 seconds after the "SET" button is pressed, press button "1", "2" or "3" until the buzzer sounds.

If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position

will be overwritten.

WARNING

■ Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.

Recalling a driving position (vehicles with driving position memory)

1 Check that the shift lever is in P.
2 Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
3 Press one of the buttons for the driving position you want to recall until the buzzer sounds.

■ To stop the position recall operation part-way through

Perform any of the following:

- Press the "SET" button.

• Press button "1", "2" or "3".
• Operate any of the seat adjustment switches (only cancels seat position recall).
• Operate the tilt and telescopic steering control switch (only cancels steering wheel position recall).

■ Seat positions that can be memorized ( P.103)

The adjusted positions other than the position adjusted by lumbar support switch can be recorded.

■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the engine switch off

Recorded seat positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver's door is opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again.

In order to correctly use the driving position memory function

If a seat position is already in the furthest possible position and the seat is operated in the same direction, the recorded position may be slightly different when it is recalled.

Registering/canceling/recall a driving position to an electronic key (including a card key) (memory recall function) (vehicles with memory recall function)

■ Registering procedure

Record your driving position to button "1", "2" or "3" before performing the following:

Carry only the key you want to register, and then close the driver's door.

If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be recorded properly.

1 Check that the shift lever is in P.

2 Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
3 Recall the driving position that you want to record.
4 While pressing the recalled button, press and hold the door lock switch (either lock or unlock) until the buzzer sounds.

If the button could not be registered, the buzzer sounds continuously for approximately 3 seconds.

■ Cancelation procedure

Carry only the key you want to cancel and then close the driver's door.

If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be canceled properly.

1 Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
2 While pressing the "SET" button, press and hold the door lock switch (either lock or unlock) until the buzzer sounds twice.

If the button could not be canceled, the buzzer sounds continuously for approximately 3 seconds.

■ Recall procedure

1 Make sure that the doors are locked before recalling the driving position. Carry the electronic key

that has been registered to the driving position, and then unlock and open the driver's door using the smart access system with push-button start or wireless remote control.

The driving position will move to the recorded position (not including the steering wheel). However, the seat will move to a position slightly behind the recorded position in order to make entering the vehicle easier.

If the driving position is in a position that has already been recorded, the seat and outside rear view mirrors will not move.

2 Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode or IGNITION ON mode, or fasten a seat belt.

The seat and steering wheel will move to the recorded position.

■ Recalling the driving position using the memory recall function

● Different driving positions can be registered for each electronic key. Therefore, the driving position that is recalled may be different depending on the key being carried.
If a door other than the driver's door is unlocked with the smart access system with push-button start, the driving position cannot be recalled. In this case, press the driving position button which has been set.

Customization

Some functions can be customized. (→P.374)

Steering wheel

Adjustment procedure

▶ Manual type

1 Hold the steering wheel and push the lever down.

Illustration of a car steering wheel with a highlighted seatbelt, showing no text or symbols.

2 Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically.

After adjustment, pull the lever up to secure the steering wheel.

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel, dashboard, and steering wheel with directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

▶ Power type

Operating the switch moves the steering wheel in the following directions:

1 Up

2 Down
3 Toward the driver
4 Away from the driver

■ The steering wheel can be adjusted when (power type)

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode ^* .

*: If the driver's seat belt is fastened, the steering wheel can be adjusted regardless of engine switch mode.
■ Automatic adjustment of the steering position (if equipped)

A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory system. (→P.105)

■ Power easy access system (power type)

The steering wheel and driver's seat move in accordance with engine switch mode and the driver's seat belt condition. (→P.105)

WARNING

■ Caution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

WARNING

■ After adjusting the steering wheel (manual type)

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident, and resulting in death or serious injury. Also, the horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.

Horn

To sound the horn, press on or close to the ▶ mark.

Inside rear view mirror

The rear view mirror's position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view.

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror

The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture.

Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.

Close-up of a car seatbelt buckle with a pink bidirectional arrow indicating compression (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■ Caution while driving

Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.

Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

Anti-glare function

Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced.

Turn the automatic anti-glare function mode on/off

When the automatic anti-glare function is in ON mode, the indicator uminates.

The function will set to ON mode each time the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.

Pressing the button turns the function to OFF mode. (The indicator Also turns off.)

■ To prevent sensor error

To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.

Diagram showing two car door lockers with arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

Outside rear view mirrors

The rear view mirror's position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view.

■ When using the outside rear view mirrors in a cold weather

When it is cold and the outside rear view mirrors are frozen, it may not be possible to fold/extend them or adjust the mirror surface. Remove the ice, snow, etc. covering the outside rear view mirrors.

WARNING

■ Important points while driving

Observe the following precautions while driving.

Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

• Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
• Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
  ● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.

Adjustment procedure

1 To select a mirror to adjust, press the switch.

A Left

B Right

Pressing the same switch again will put the switch in neutral.

2 To adjust the mirror, press the switch.

A Up
B Right
C Down
D Left

■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

Defogging the mirrors

The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. (→P.227)

■ Auto anti-glare function

When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the driver's side outside rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (→P.109)

■ Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle (if equipped)

A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory. (→P.105)

■ Linked mirror function when reversing (if equipped)

When either "L" or "R" of the mirror select switch is selected, the outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground.

To disable this function, select neither "L" nor "R".

To set the mirror angle used when the vehicle is reversing, adjust the mirror angle at a desired position with the shift lever in R.

The adjusted angle will be memorized and the mirror will automatically tilt to the memorized angle whenever the shift lever is shifted to R from next time.

The memorized downward tilt position of the mirror is linked to the normal position (angle adjusted with the shift lever in other than R). Therefore, if the normal position is changed after adjustment, the tilt position will also change.

When the normal position is changed, readjust the angle in reversing.

WARNING

■ When the mirror defoggers are operating

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.

Folding the mirrors

Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicle's rear.

Diagram of a car's side panel with a highlighted grip and a pink curved arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Power windows

Opening and closing the power windows

The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.

Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:

1 Closing
2 One-touch closing
3 Opening
4 One-touch opening *

* : To stop the window partway, operate the switch in the opposite direction.

■ The power windows can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■ Operating the power windows after turning the engine off

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either door is opened.

Jam protection function

If an object becomes jammed between the window and the window frame while the window is closing, window movement is stopped and the window is opened slightly.

- Catch protection function

If an object becomes caught between the door and window while the window is opening, window movement is stopped.

■ When the window cannot be opened or closed

When the jam protection function or catch protection function operates unusually and the door window cannot be opened or closed, perform the following operations with the power window switch of that door.

• Stop the vehicle. With the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode, within 4 seconds of the jam protection function or catch protection function activating, continuously operate the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction or one-touch opening direction so that the door window can be opened and closed.
• If the door window cannot be opened and closed even when performing the above operations, perform the following procedure for function initialization.
  1 Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
  2 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction and completely close the door window.
  3 Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pulling the switch in the one-touch closing direction, and hold it there for approximately 6 seconds or more.
  4 Press and hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening direction. After the door window is completely opened, continue holding the switch for an additional 1 second or more.
  5 Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pushing the switch in the one-touch opening direction, and hold it there for approximately 4 seconds or more.
  6 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction again. After the door window is completely closed, continue holding the switch for a further 1 second or more.

If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning. If the window reverses and cannot be fully closed or opened, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■ Door lock linked window operation

The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. ^ (→P.347)
The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control. ^ ( P.92)

*: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

■ Power windows open warning buzzer

A buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the engine switch is turned off and the driver's door is opened with the power windows open.

Customization

Some functions can be customized. (→P.374)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ Closing the windows

The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power windows. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use the window lock switch. (→P.113)
- Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

- When using the wireless remote control or mechanical key and operating the power windows, operate the power window after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window. Also do not let a child operate window by the wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the power window.

- When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.

Jam protection function

● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
The jam protection function may not work if something gets jammed just before the window is fully closed. Be careful not to get any part of your body jammed in the window.

■ Catch protection function

● Never use any part of your body or clothing to intentionally activate the catch protection function.
The catch protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window is fully opened. Be careful not to get any part of your body or clothing caught in the window.

Preventing accidental operation (window lock switch)

This function can be used to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.

Press the switch.

The indicator A will come on and the passenger windows will be locked.

The passenger window can still be opened and closed using the driver's switch even if the lock switch is on.

■ When the battery is disconnected

The window lock switch is disabled. If necessary, press the window lock switch after reconnecting the battery.

Moon roof\*

*: If equipped

Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it up and down.

Operating the moon roof

■ Opening and closing

1 Opens the moon roof * The moon roof tilts up and then fully opens.

2 Closes the moon roof * *: Lightly press either way of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.

- Tilting up and down

1 Tilts the moon roof up *

2 Tilts the moon roof down *

*: Lightly press either way of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.

■ The moon roof can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

- Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either door is opened.

Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.

Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.

■ Door lock linked moon roof operation

● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. ^* (→P.347)

● The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control. ^* ( P.90)

*: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

■ If the moon roof does not close normally

Perform the following procedure:

1 Stop the vehicle.

2 Press and hold the "CLOSE" switch.

The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds. Then it will close again and stop at the completely closed position.

3 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.

* : If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.

If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■ If the moon roof does not move normally

If the moon roof does not open or close normally or the automatic opening function does not operate, perform the following initialization procedure.

1 Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
2 Operate the moon roof.

Depending on the kind of malfunction perform either of the following:

▶ If the moon roof does not open when the "OPEN" switch is pressed
3 Press and hold the "DOWN" switch or "CLOSE" switch until the moon roof is completely closed. The moon roof will open and close a few times before it closes completely.
4 Confirm that the moon roof has completely stopped and release the switch.
If the moon roof does not open completely automatically even though it tilts up and opens while the "OPEN" switch is being pressed and held
3 Press and hold the "OPEN" switch until the moon roof opens completely.
4 Press and hold the "CLOSE" switch until the moon roof closes completely.
5 Press and hold the "UP" switch until the moon roof tilts up and stops.
6 Press and hold the "DOWN" switch until the moon roof tilts down and stops at the completely closed position.

If you release the switch while the moon roof is moving, perform the procedure again from the beginning.

If, after performing the above procedures correctly, the moon roof still does not open or close normally or the automatic opening function does not operate, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■ Moon roof open warning buzzer

A buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the engine switch is turned off and the driver's door is opened with the moon roof open.

Customization

Some functions can be customized. (→P.374)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

■ Opening the moon roof

- Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving.

- Do not sit on top of the moon roof.

■ Opening and closing the moon roof

The driver is responsible for moon roof opening and closing operations. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the moon roof. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the moon roof.

- Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.

- When using the wireless remote control or mechanical key and operating the moon roof, operate the moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the moon roof. Also, do not let a child operate moon roof by the wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the moon roof.

- When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.

Jam protection function

● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.

The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof is fully closed. Also, the jam protection function is not designed to operate while the moon roof switch is being pressed. Take care so that your fingers, etc. do not get caught.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the moon roof

Before opening, make sure that there are no foreign objects such as stones or ice around the opening.

- Do not hit the face or edge of the moon roof with hard objects.

■ Operating the moon roof

There is the possibility that water or rain will get into the vehicle if you operate the moon roof after a rainfall, snowfall or car wash. Wipe the moon roof dry with a cloth before operating it.

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle....118

Cargo and luggage....124

Vehicle load limits...... 126

Trailer towing.... 127

Dinghy towing 127

4-2. Driving procedures

Engine (ignition) switch .....128

Automatic transmission......132

Turn signal lever....135

Parking brake 136

Brake Hold....139

ASC (Active Sound Control) 140

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch....141

AHB (Automatic High Beam) 143

Windshield wipers and washer 146

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap.....153

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Lexus Safety System + 2.5.....156

PCS (Pre-Collision System) 160

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist).....170

RSA (Road Sign Assist)......179

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range.... 181

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)..... 192

Intuitive parking assist......200

Driving mode select switch ..205

Launch control....207

Active rear wing....208

Driving assist systems......211

4-6. Driving tips

Winter driving tips...... 215

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:

Driving procedure

■ Starting the engine

→P.128

Driving

1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. ( P.132)

2 If the parking brake is in manual mode, release the parking brake. ( P.136)

3 Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

Stopping

1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

2 If necessary, set the parking brake.

If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P or N. ( P.132)

- Parking the vehicle

1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

2 Set the parking brake ( P.136), and shift the shift lever to P ( P.132).

3 Press the engine switch to stop the engine.

4 Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your person.

If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.

■ Starting off on a steep uphill

1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
2 Pull the parking brake switch to set the parking brake manually.
3 Release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
4 Press the parking brake switch to release the parking brake manually.

■ When starting off on an uphill

The hill-start assist control will activate. ( P.211)

- Driving with summer tires

When the outside temperature is low, operating the steering wheel while starting off may cause noise to occur. This is not a malfunction.

- Driving in the rain

• Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
• Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery.
• Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

■ Engine speed while driving

In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving. This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.

● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill

• When the accelerator pedal is released
• When the brake pedal is depressed while sport mode is selected
  ■ Restraining the engine output (Brake Override System)
• When the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, the engine output may be restrained.
  ● A warning message is displayed on the multi-information display while the system is operating.
  ■ Breaking in your new Lexus

To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:

● For the first 186 miles (300 km):

Avoid sudden stops.

● For the first 621 miles (1000 km):
- Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
- Avoid sudden acceleration.
- Do not drive continuously in low gears.
- Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding down operation.

■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. ( P.357)

■ Brake pads and discs

The brake pads and discs are designed for use under high load conditions. Therefore, brake noise may be generated depending on the vehicle speed, braking force and vehicle environment (temperature, humidity, etc.).

WARNING

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

■ When driving the vehicle

• Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
  • Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
  • Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
• Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials. The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

WARNING

During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way: →P.306

Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill. Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (→P.132)

- Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving. Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their body are not outside the vehicle.

- Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

■ When driving on slippery road surfaces

● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle.

● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid.

After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected.

■ When shifting the shift lever

- Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R. Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

- Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

- Do not shift the shift lever to a driving position while the vehicle is moving backward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

- Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

- Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.

WARNING

- Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

■ If a brake pad wear warning message is displayed

Have the brake pads visually checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.

Moderate levels of the brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced braking power. As a result, the discs may wear more quickly than conventional brake discs. Therefore, when replacing the brake pads, Lexus recommends that you also have the thickness of the discs measured.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.

■ When the vehicle is stopped

- Do not race the engine. If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.

In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.

- If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed.

- Avoid revving or racing the engine. Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby.

■ When the vehicle is parked

- Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun. Doing so may result in the following:

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.

• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.

- Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components.

- Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.

- Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.

- Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.

WARNING

● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
If the vehicle is parked with the shift lever in P but the parking brake is not set, the vehicle may start to move, possibly leading to an accident.

- Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off. Doing so may cause burns.

■ When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.

When braking

• When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
  Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

- If the brake booster device does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking. In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

- Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls. Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.

The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

For vehicles equipped with carbon ceramic brakes (CCB), in situations such as the following, braking performance may be temporarily reduced:

- When the brake pads or brake discs have recently been replaced

- When the brakes are wet, such as after washing the vehicle or when driving through water or snow

- When the temperature of the brake discs is low

If the wheels become full of snow, such as when driving through deep snow, ice may become stuck between a brake pad and disk and braking performance may be reduced.

Drive with sufficient space between your vehicle and preceding vehicles, at a moderate speed and depress the brake more firmly than normal when decelerating.

■ If the vehicle becomes stuck

Do not spin the wheels excessively when a driven wheel is up in the air, or the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may damage the driveline components or propel the vehicle forward or backward, causing an accident.

NOTICE

■ When driving the vehicle

- Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time while driving, as this may restrain the engine output.

NOTICE

- Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.

■ When parking the vehicle

● Always set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
● Vehicles with titanium mufflers: Be careful when parking in a parking spot with anything protruding from the surface, such as a multi-level parking system, as the protruding area may contact and damage the muffler.

Diagram of a mechanical device with a downward arrow indicating force or motion (no text or symbols present)

■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

• Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an extended period of time. Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
• When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
• Vehicles with titanium mufflers: As the vehicle's ground clearance is low, when driving over bumps or areas where the road height changes, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the muffler.

■ If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

• It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
  ● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
  ● The vehicle will lean abnormally.

Information on what to do in case of a flat tire ( P.326, 337)

■ When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:

Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Lexus dealer check the following:

- Brake function

● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission, differential, etc.

● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

■ Precaution for CCB (Carbon Ceramic Brake) discs (if equipped)

Be careful not to subject the CCB discs to any kind of strong impact.

Even if there is no obvious damage, in the following situations, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer:

NOTICE

• If the vehicle is involved in an accident that may affect the suspension or wheels
• If the brake pads have worn out and the metal part of the pad is in contact with the CCB disc surface

Sudden start restraint control (Drive-Start Control [DSC])

When the following unusual operation is performed with the accelerator pedal depressed, the engine output may be restrained.

• When the shift lever is shifted to ^*
• When the shift lever is shifted from P or R to forward drive shift position such as D^* .

When the system operates, a message appears on the multi-information display. Read the message and follow the instruction.

*: Depending on the situation, the shift position may not be changed.

Drive-Start Control (DSC)

When the TRAC is turned off ( P.212), sudden start restraint control also does not operate. If your vehicle have trouble escaping from the mud or fresh snow due to sudden start restraint control operation, deactivate TRAC ( P.212) so that the vehicle may become able to escape from the mud or fresh snow.

Cargo and luggage

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load:

Capacity and distribution

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) - (Total weight of occupants) Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -

(1) Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.

For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. (→P.126)

Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.

Calculation formula for your vehicle

graph TD
    A["Human Group 1"] --> B["Human Group 2"]
    B --> C["Two circular gauges labeled A and B"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

A Cargo capacity
B Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) ( P.356)

When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows:

$$ B ^ { 2} \text { lb. (kg) } - A ^ { 1} \text { lb. (kg) } = C ^ {* 3} \text { lb. (kg) } $$

*1: A = Weight of people
^* 2: B = Total load capacity

*3: C = Available cargo and luggage load In this condition, if 2 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:

$$ C \text { lb. (kg) } - D ^ { 4} \text { lb. (kg) } = E ^ { 5} \text { lb. (kg) } $$

*4: D = Additional weight of people
*5: E = Available cargo and luggage load

As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

WARNING

■ Things that must not be carried in the trunk

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:

●Receptacles containing gasoline
Aerosol cans
Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block the driver's vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly causing an accident.

● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.

WARNING

• Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• On the package tray
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard
  • In front of the Center Display
• Secure all items in the occupant compartment.
  ■ Capacity and distribution
• Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
  Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

Vehicle load limits

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity.

● Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): →P.356

Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.

- Seating capacity: →P.356

Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

- Towing capacity

Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.

- Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.

■ Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. ( P.290)

WARNING

■ Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle. It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.

Trailer towing

Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.

Silhouette of a car approaching a bus with a no-smoking symbol (no text or numbers present)

Dinghy towing

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.

Illustration of a car approaching a truck with a 'no' symbol (no text or labels)

NOTICE

■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with the four wheels on the ground.

Engine (ignition) switch

Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the engine or changes engine switch modes.

Starting the engine

1 Check that the parking brake is set.
2 Check that the shift lever is in P.
3 Firmly depress the brake pedal.

and a message will be displayed on ulti-information display.

If it is not displayed, the engine cannot be started.

4 Press the engine switch shortly and firmly.

When operating the engine switch, one short, firm press is enough.

It is not necessary to press and hold the switch.

The engine will crank until it starts or for up to 30 seconds, whichever is less.

Continue depressing the brake pedal until the engine is completely started.

The engine can be started from any engine switch mode.

If the engine does not start

● The engine immobilizer system may not

have been deactivated. (→P.59) Contact your Lexus dealer.

• Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The engine may not start if the shift lever is displaced out of P.
  Electronic key battery depletion →P.88
  ■ Conditions affecting operation →P.100
  Notes for the entry function →P.100
  Electronic key battery →P.295
  Operation of the engine switch
• If the switch is not pressed shortly and firmly, the engine switch mode may not change or the engine may not start.
• If attempting to restart the engine immediately after turning the engine switch off, the engine may not start in some cases. After turning the engine switch off, please wait a few seconds before restarting the engine.

Customization

If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a customized setting, refer to P.346.

WARNING

■ When starting the engine

Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ When starting the engine

- Do not race a cold engine.

NOTICE

• If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer immediately.
  ■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the engine switch

If the engine switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer immediately.

Stopping the engine

1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Set the parking brake ( P.136), and shift the shift lever to P.
3 Press the engine switch.
4 Release the brake pedal and check that the display on the meters is off.

■ Automatic engine shut off feature

● The vehicle is equipped with a feature that automatically shuts off the engine when the shift lever is in P with the engine running for an extended period.
● The engine will automatically shut off after approximately 1 hour if it has been left running while the shift lever is in P.
● The timer for the automatic engine shut off feature will reset if the brake pedal is depressed or if the shift lever is in a position other than P.
After the vehicle is parked, if the door is locked with the door lock switch (→P.94) from the inside or the mechanical key (→P.346) from the outside, the automatic engine shut off feature will be disabled. The timer for the automatic engine shut off feature will be re-enabled if the driver's door is opened.

■ Locking the door from outside with the engine running

1 With the driver's door open, pull the driver's door handle and insert the mechanical key.

Side view of a car with a highlighted door and arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols)

2 Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise.

Hand-drawn sketch of a car interior with a handle and arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

3 Pull out the mechanical key and close the door.

WARNING

■ Stopping the engine in an emergency
- If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and hold the engine switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. (→P.306)

However, do not touch the engine switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

- If the engine switch is operated while the vehicle is running, a warning message will be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer sounds.

WARNING

● To restart the engine after performing an emergency shutdown, shift the shift lever to N and then press the engine switch.

When parking

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases to enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

- If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the engine.

- Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

- Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

Changing engine switch modes

Modes can be changed by pressing the engine switch with brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)

1 Off

The emergency flashers can be used. The analog speedometer and the tachometer will not be illuminated. However, if the welcome illumination is operating, the analog speedometer will illuminate. (Welcome illumination: →P.73)

2 ACCESSORY mode

Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.

The analog speedometer is illuminated.

3 IGNITION ON mode

All electrical components can be used. The analog speedometer and the tachometer will be illuminated.

*: If the shift lever is in a position other than P when turning off the engine, the engine switch will be turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to off.

Auto power off function

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNITION ON mode (with the engine not running) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P,

the engine switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time when the engine is not running.

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

• Do not leave the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time without the engine running.
• If the analog speedometer is illuminated and the engine is not running, the engine switch is not off. Exit the vehicle after turning the engine switch off. However, if the welcome illumination is operating, the analog speedometer will be illuminated even though the engine switch is off. (Welcome illumination: P.73)

When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other than P

If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, the engine switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch off:

1 Check that the parking brake is set.
2 Shift the shift lever to P.
3 Check that "Turn Off Vehicle" is displayed on the multi-information display and then press the engine switch once.
4 Check that "Turn Off Vehicle" on the multi-information display is off.

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not stop the engine when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the engine is stopped in another shift lever position, the engine switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode, battery discharge may occur.

Automatic transmission

Select the shift position depending on your purpose and situation.

Shift position purpose and functions

Shift position	Objective or function
P	Parking the vehicle/starting the engine
R Reversing
N	Neutral(Condition in which the power is not transmitted)
D	Normal driving*1
M	M mode driving*2(→P.134)

*1: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noise, shift the shift lever to D for normal driving.
^*2 : Any gear range can be fixed when driving in M mode.

■ To protect the automatic transmission

If the automatic transmission fluid temperature is high, "Transmission Fluid Temp High See Owner's Manual" will be displayed on the multi-information display and the vehicle will go into transmission protection mode automatically. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■ When driving with dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range activated

Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine braking, engine braking will not occur because dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range will not be canceled.

● While driving in the D position,

downshifting to 7, 6, 5 or 4. (→P.133)

• When switching the driving mode to sport mode while driving in the D position. (→P.205)
  ■ Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start Control)

$$ \rightarrow \mathrm{P}. 1 2 4 $$

AI-SHIFT

● The AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver performance and driving conditions.

The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in D. (Shifting the shift lever to the M position cancels the function.)

WARNING

■ When driving on slippery road surfaces

Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning.

Shifting the shift lever

While the engine switch is in

IGNITION ON mode, move the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.

When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped.

Shift lock system

The shift lock system is a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever in starting.

The shift lever can be shifted from P only when the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the brake pedal is being depressed.

■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

First, check whether the brake pedal is being depressed.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.

Releasing the shift lock:

1 Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode and check that the parking brake is set. (→P.130, 136)
2 Turn the engine switch to off.
3 Depress the brake pedal.
4 Pry the cover up with a flathead screw-driver or equivalent tool.

To prevent damage to the cover, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

Interior view of a car gear shift lever with a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

5 Press the shift lock override button.

The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.

Interior view of a car dashboard with two highlighted buttons and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■ To prevent an accident when releasing the shift lock

Before pressing the shift lock override button, make sure to set the parking brake and depress the brake pedal. If the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed instead of the brake pedal when the shift lock override button is pressed and the shift lever is shifted out of P, the vehicle may suddenly start, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Selecting the driving mode

- Driving mode

→P.205

Selecting shift ranges in the D position

To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-” or “+” paddle shift switch.

When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated, the shift range will be downshifted to a range that enables engine braking force that is suitable to driving conditions. When the “+” paddle shift switch is operated, the shift range will be one gear higher than the gear in use during normal D position driving.

Changing the shift range allows restriction of the highest gear, preventing unnecessary upshifting and enabling the level of engine braking force to be selected.

1 Upshifting

2 Downshifting

The selected shift range, from D1 to D8, will be displayed on the meter.

To return to normal D position driving, the "+" paddle shift switch must be held down for a period of time.

Meter display	Function
D2 - D8	A gear in the range between 1 and the selected gear is automatically chosen depending on vehicle speed and driving conditions
D1 Setting	the gear at 1

A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift range.

■ Automatic deactivation of shift range selection in the D position

Shift range selection in the D position will be deactivated in the following situations:

● When the vehicle comes to a stop
- If the accelerator pedal is depressed for more than a certain period of time

• When the shift lever is shifted to a position other than D
  ■ Downshifting restriction warning buzzer

To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the paddle shift switch is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)

Selecting gears in the M position

To enter M mode, shift the shift lever to M. Gears can then be selected by operating the shift lever or paddle shift switches, allowing you to drive in the gear of your choosing.

1 Upshifting

2 Downshifting

The gear changes once every time the shift lever or paddle shift switch is operated.

The selected gear, from M1 to M8, will be fixed and displayed on the meter.

When in the M position, the gear will

not change unless the shift lever or paddle shift switches are operated.

However, even when in the M position, the gears will be automatically changed in the following situation:

• When vehicle speed drops (downshift only).
• When a gear change is necessary to protect the engine or automatic transmission when the engine coolant temperature or automatic transmission fluid temperature is low, or other reasons.

In the following situations, the gear will not shift even if the shift lever or paddle shift switches are operated.

• "Slippery Road. Cannot Shift to Lower Gear" is displayed on the multi-information display.
  ● The vehicle speed is low (upshift only).

■ Downshifting restriction warning buzzer

To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever or paddle shift switch is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)

Turn signal lever

Operating instructions

The lever will return to its original position immediately after operation.

1 Right turn
2 Lane change to the right (move the lever partway and release it)
The right hand signals will flash 3 times.
3 Lane change to the left (move the lever partway and release it)
The left hand signals will flash 3 times.

4 Left turn

If the turn signals do not stop flashing after turning left or right, or if you want to stop them flashing

Operate the lever in the opposite direction to either position 2 or 3. If you move the lever to either position 1 or 4, the selected turn signals will flash.

■ Turn signals can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.

If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed

Operate the lever again.

Customization

Some functions can be customized. (→P.374)

Parking brake

The parking brake can be set or released automatically or manually.

In automatic mode, the parking brake can be set or released automatically according to the shift lever operation. Also, even in automatic mode, the parking brake can be set or released manually.

Operating instructions

■ Using the manual mode

The parking brake can be set and released manually.

A U.S.A.
B Canada

1 Push the switch to set the parking brake

The parking brake indicator light will turn on.

Press and hold the parking brake switch if an emergency occurs and it is necessary to operate the parking brake while driving.

2 Pull the switch to release the parking brake

• Operate the parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal.
• Using the parking brake automatic release function, the parking brake can be released by depressing the accelerator pedal. When using this function, slowly depress the accelerator pedal.

Make sure that the parking brake indicator light turn off.

■ Turns automatic mode on

While the vehicle is stopped, press and hold the parking brake switch until "EPB Shift Interlock Function Activated" will be displayed on the multi-information display.

When the automatic mode is turned on, the parking brake operates as follows.

• When the shift lever is moved out of P, the parking brake will be released, and the parking brake indicator light will turn off.
• When the shift lever is moved into P, the parking brake will be set, and the parking brake indicator light will turn on.

Operate the shift lever with the vehicle stopped and the brake pedal depressed.

■ Turns automatic mode off

While the vehicle is stopped, pull and hold the parking brake switch until "EPB Shift Interlock Function Deactivated" will be displayed on the multi-information display.

Parking brake operation

• When the engine switch is not in IGNITION ON mode, the parking brake cannot be released using the parking brake switch.
• When the engine switch is not in IGNITION ON mode, automatic mode (automatic brake setting and releasing) is not available.

■ Parking brake automatic release function

The parking brake is automatically released when slowly depress the accelerator pedal.

The parking brake will be released automatically under the following conditions:

• The driver's door is closed.
• The driver's seatbelt is fastened.
- Shift the shift lever is in a forward or reverse position.
• The malfunction indicator lamp or brake system warning light is not illuminated.
If the automatic release function does not operate, manually release the parking brake.

If "Parking Brake Temporarily Unavailable" is displayed on the multi-information display

If the parking brake is operated repeatedly

over a short period of time, the system may restrict operation to prevent overheating. If this happens, refrain from operating the parking brake. Normal operation will return after about 1 minute.

If "EPB Activation Stopped Incompletely" or "Parking Brake Unavailable" is displayed on the multi-information display

Operate the parking brake switch. If the message does not disappear after operating the switch several times, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

■ Parking brake operation sound

When the parking brake operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■ Parking brake operation

● Depending on the engine switch mode, the parking brake indicator light will turn on and stay on as described below: IGNITION ON mode: Comes on until the parking brake is released. Not in IGNITION ON mode: Stays on for approximately 15 seconds.

- When the engine switch is turned off with the parking brake set, the parking brake indicator light will stay on for about 15 seconds. This does not indicate a malfunction.

Parking the vehicle

→P.118

■ Parking brake engaged warning buzzer

A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven with the parking brake engaged. "Parking Brake ON" is displayed on the multi-information display.

■ Warning messages and buzzers

Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.

■ If the brake system warning light comes on
→P.314
■ Usage in winter time
→P.215

WARNING

■ When parking the vehicle

Do not leave a child in the vehicle alone. The parking brake may be released unintentionally and there is the danger of the vehicle moving that may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ When parking the vehicle

Before you leave the vehicle, shift the shift lever to P, set the parking brake and make sure that the vehicle does not move.

■ When the system malfunctions

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the warning messages.

■ When the parking brake cannot be released due to a malfunction

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.

Brake Hold

The brake hold system keeps the brake applied when the shift lever is in D, M or N with the system on and the brake pedal has been depressed to stop the vehicle. The system releases the brake when the accelerator pedal is depressed with the shift lever in D or M to allow smooth start off.

Enabling the system

Turns the brake hold system on

The brake hold standby indicator (green)

A comes on. While the system is holding the brake, the brake hold operated indicator (yellow) B comes on.

■ Brake hold system operating conditions

The brake hold system cannot be turned on in the following conditions:

The driver's door is not closed.
● The driver is not wearing the seat belt.
● The parking brake is engaged.

If any of the conditions above are detected when the brake hold system is enabled, the system will turn off and the brake hold standby indicator light will go off. In addition, if any of the conditions are detected while the system is holding the brake, a warning buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information display. The parking brake will then be set automatically.

Brake hold function

• If the brake pedal is left released for a period of about 3 minutes after the system has started holding the brake, the parking brake will be set automatically. In this case, a warning buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display.
  ● To turn the system off while the system is holding the brake, firmly depress the brake pedal and press the button again.
  The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle when the vehicle is on a steep incline. In this situation, it may be necessary for the driver to apply the brakes. A warning buzzer will sound and the multi-information display will inform the driver of this situation. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.
• When do not wish for the parking brake to operate automatically, press and hold the brake hold switch until the standby indicator (green) turns off, and then turn the engine switch off.
  ■ When the parking brake is set automatically while the system is holding the brakes

Perform any of the following operations to release the parking brake.

• Depress the accelerator pedal. (The parking brake will not be released automatically if the seat belt is not fastened.)
• Operate the parking brake switch with the brake pedal depressed.

Make sure that the parking brake indicator light goes off. ( P.136)

■ When an inspection at your Lexus dealer is necessary

When the brake hold standby indicator (green) does not illuminate even when the brake hold switch is pressed with the brake hold system operating conditions met, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the

vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer.

If "Brake Hold Malfunction Press Brake to Deactivate Visit Your Dealer" or "Brake Hold Malfunction Visit Your Dealer" is displayed on the multi-information display

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■ Warning messages and buzzers

Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.

■ If the brake hold operated indicator flashes

→P.317

WARNING

■ When the vehicle is on a steep incline

When using the brake hold system on a steep incline, exercise caution. The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle in such a situation.

■ When stopped on a slippery road

The system cannot stop the vehicle when the gripping ability of the tires has been exceeded. Do not use the system when stopped on a slippery road.

NOTICE

■ When parking the vehicle

The brake hold system is not designed for use when parking the vehicle for a long period of time. Turning the engine switch off while the system is holding the brake may release the brake, which would cause the vehicle to move. When operating the engine switch, depress the brake pedal, shift the shift lever to P and set the parking brake.

ASC (Active Sound Control) ^*

*: if equipped

The ASC system sonically emphasizes the vehicle's response to the driver's operation of the accelerator pedal and shift lever or paddle shift switches. The dynamic engine sound enabled by this system helps the driver further enjoy the feeling of unity with the vehicle, particularly when driving in M mode. (→P.134)

The ASC system can be operated when The driving mode select switch is in SPORT S+ mode. (→P.205)

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

Operating instructions

Operating the switch turns on the lights as follows:

A U.S.A.

B Canada

1 The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, instrument panel lights, and daytime running lights (→P.141) turn on.

2 The headlights and all lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on.

3 The headlights, daytime running lights (→P.141) and all the

lights listed above turn on and off automatically. (When the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.)

4 DRL OFF (U.S.A.) Off (→P.141)

Daytime running light system

● The daytime running lights illuminate using the same lights as the parking lights and illuminate brighter than the parking lights.

To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving, the daytime running lights turn on automatically when all of the following conditions are met. (The daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.)

• The engine is running

• The parking brake is released

• The headlight switch is in the

AUTO ^* position

* : When the surroundings are bright

The daytime running lights remain on after they illuminate, even if the parking brake is set again.

For the U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.

- Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.

■ Headlight control sensor

Illustration of a car's side profile with a magnified inset showing a circular object (no text or symbols)

The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the wind-shield.

Doing so interferes with the sensor detect-

ing the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction.

■ Automatic light off system

When the light switch is in AUTOD DOE

D: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off and a door is opened and all of the doors and trunk are closed. (The lights turn off immediately if 📄 on the key is pressed twice after both side doors are closed.)

To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to ☑☐☐

or ≡D.

If any of the doors or trunk lid is left open, the lights automatically turn off after 20 minutes.

Light reminder buzzer

A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned off or turned to ACCESSORY mode and the driver's door is opened while the lights are turned on.

■ Automatic headlight leveling system

The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users.

Customization

Some functions can be customized. (→P.374)

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

Turning on the high beam headlights

1 With the headlights on, push the lever away from you to turn on the high beams.

Pull the lever toward you to the center position to turn the high beams off.

2 Pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the high beams once.

You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.

AHB (Automatic High Beam)

The Automatic High Beam uses a camera sensor located behind the upper portion of the windshield to assess the brightness of the lights of vehicles ahead, streetlights, etc., and automatically turns the high beams on or off as necessary.

WARNING

■ Limitations of the Automatic High Beam

Do not overly rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and turning the high beams on or off manually if necessary.

■ To prevent incorrect operation of the Automatic High Beam system

Do not overload the vehicle.

Activating the Automatic High Beam

1 Press the Automatic High Beam switch.

2 Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO or position.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will come on when the system is operating.

■ Conditions to turn the high beams on/off automatically

- When all of the following conditions are met, the high beams will be turned on automatically (after approximately 1 second):

• The vehicle speed is approximately 21 mph (34 km/h) or more.

• The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.

• There are no vehicles ahead with headlights or tail lights turned on.

• There are few streetlights on the road ahead.

- If any of the following conditions is met, the high beams will turn off automatically:

• The vehicle speed is below approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).

• The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.

• Vehicles ahead have their headlights or tail lights turned on.

• There are many streetlights on the road ahead.

■ Camera sensor detection information

● The high beams may not be automatically turned off in the following situations:

- When a vehicle suddenly appears from around a curve

- When the vehicle is cut in front of by another vehicle

- When vehicles ahead cannot be detected due to repeated curves, road dividers or roadside trees

- When vehicles ahead appear in a far-away lane on a wide road

- When the lights of vehicles ahead are not on

● The high beams may be turned off if a

vehicle ahead that is using fog lights without its headlights turned on is detected.

House lights, street lights, traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs and other reflective objects may cause the high beams to change to the low beams, or the low beams to remain on.

● The following factors may affect the amount of time taken for the high beams to turn on or off:

• The brightness of the headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of vehicles ahead

• The movement and direction of vehicles ahead

- When a vehicle ahead only has operational lights on one side

- When a vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled vehicle

• The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road surface, etc.)

• The number of passengers and amount of luggage in the vehicle

● The high beams may turn on or off unexpectedly.

● Bicycles or similar vehicles may not be detected.

In the following situations the system may not be able to correctly detect the surrounding brightness level. This may cause the low beams to remain on or the high beams to flash or dazzle pedestrians or vehicles ahead. In such a case, it is necessary to manually switch between the high and low beams.

- When driving in inclement weather (heavy rain, snow, fog, sandstorms, etc.)

- When the windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt, etc.

- When the windshield is cracked or damaged

- When the camera sensor is deformed or dirty

- When the temperature of the camera sensor is extremely high

- When the surrounding brightness level is equal to that of headlights, tail lights or fog lights

- When headlights or tail lights of vehicles ahead are turned off, dirty, changing color, or not aimed properly

- When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a preceding vehicle

- When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and darkness

- When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or roads with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved roads, gravel roads, etc.)

- When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding road

- When there is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or mirror

- When the back of a preceding vehicle is highly reflective, such as a container on a truck

- When the vehicle's headlights are damaged or dirty, or are not aimed properly

- When the vehicle is listing or titling due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed, etc.

- When the headlights are changed between the high beams and low beams repeatedly in an abnormal manner

- When the driver believes that the high beams may be flashing or dazzling pedestrians or other drivers

■ Temporarily lowering sensor sensitivity

The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered.

1 Turn the engine switch off while the following conditions are met.

● The headlight switch is in

AUTO

● The headlight switch lever is in the original position.

● Automatic High Beam switch is on.

2 Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

3 Within 30 seconds after 2, repeat pushing the headlight switch lever to the high beam position then pulling it to the original position quickly 10 times, then leave the lever in original position.

4 If the sensitivity is changed, the Automatic High Beam indicator is turn on and off 3 times.

Turning the high beams on/off manually

■ Switching to the high beams

Push the lever away from you.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off and the high beam indicator will turn on.

Pull the lever to its original position to activate the Automatic High Beam system again.

Interior view of a car showing a hand turning a car's steering wheel, with a red arrow indicating the left side (no text or symbols present)

■ Switching to the low beams

Press the Automatic High Beam switch.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off.

Press the switch to activate the Automatic High Beam system again.

■ Temporarily switching to the low beams

Pull the lever toward you and then

return it to its original position.

The high beams are on while the lever is pulled toward you, however, after the lever is returned to its original position, the low beams remain on for a certain amount of time. Afterwards, the Automatic High Beam will be activated again.

Illustration of a person's head being held by a car, with a red arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols present)

■ Temporarily switching to the low beams

It is recommended to switch to the low beams when the high beam may cause problems or distress to other drivers or pedestrians nearby.

Windshield wipers and washer

Operating the lever can use the windshield wipers or the washer.

NOTICE

■ When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

Operating the wiper lever

Operating the lever operates the wipers or washer as follows. The lever will return to its original position after operation.

▶ Intermittent windshield wipers with interval adjuster

1 (U.S.AFF or (Canada) o

Move the lever up by 2 levels

2 Move the lever up by 1 level

3 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)

Move the lever down by 1 level

4 (US.AI) or (Canada)

Move the lever down by 2 levels

Depending on the operating state of the wipers when the wiper lever is operated, the wipers will operate as follows.

- Current wiper operation: Off

Wiper lever operation	Wiper operation
	Temporary operation
	Temporary operation
	Intermittent operation
	High speed operation

- Current wiper operation: Intermittent operation

Wiper lever operation	Wiper operation
	Off
	Off
	Low speed operation
	High speed operation

- Current wiper operation: Low speed operation

Wiper lever operation	Wiper operation
OFF or O	Off
	Intermittent operation
▼ or ▼	High speed operation
HEI or Ψ	High speed operation

- Current wiper operation: High speed operation

Wiper lever operation	Wiper operation
OFF or O	Off
	Low speed operation
▼ or ▼	No change
HEI or Ψ	No change

Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected.

5 Increases the intermittent wind-shield wiper frequency

6 Decreases the intermittent wind-shield wiper frequency

7 Washer/wiper dual operation

Pulling the lever operates the wipers and washer.

The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

Vehicles with headlight cleaners: When the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the headlights are on, if the lever is pulled, the headlight cleaners will operate once. After this, the headlight cleaners will operate every 5th time the lever is pulled.

▶ Rain-sensing windshield wipers

1 (U.S.A.F) for (Canada)

Move the lever up by 2 levels

2 Move the lever up by 1 level

3 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)

Move the lever down by 1 level

4 (U.S.H.) or (Canada)

Move the lever down by 2 levels

5 AUTO mode on/off switch

With AUTO mode selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.

The AUTO mode indicator ▶A will turn on when AUTO mode is selected.

Depending on the operating state of the wipers when the wiper lever is operated, the wipers will operate as follows.

- Current wiper operation: Off

Wiper lever operation	Wiper operation
OFF or O	Temporary operation
	Temporary operation
▼ or ▼	Low speed operation
HI or ≧	High speed operation

- Current wiper operation: Low speed operation

Wiper lever operation	Wiper operation
OFF or O	Off
	Off

Wiper lever operation	Wiper operation
▼ or ▼	High speed operation
≡ HI or ≡	High speed operation

- Current wiper operation: High speed operation

Wiper lever operation	Wiper operation
OFF or O	Off
	Low speed operation
▼ or ▼	No change
HEI or Ψ	No change

- Current wiper operation: AUTO mode (Intermittent operation)

Wiper lever operation	Wiper operation
OFF or O	Off
△	Temporary operation*1
▼ or ▼	Low speed operation*2
Hl or Σ	High speed operation*2

- Current wiper operation: AUTO mode (Continuously)

Wiper lever operation	Wiper operation
OFF or O	Off
△	No change
	Low speed operation*2
	High speed operation*2

*1: After temporary operation, the mode will return to AUTO mode.
*2: AUTO mode will be canceled.

When AUTO mode is selected, the sensor sensitivity can be adjusted by turning the switch ring.

6 Increases the sensitivity
7 Decreases the sensitivity

8 Washer/wiper dual operation

Pulling the lever operates the wipers and washer.

The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

Vehicles with headlight cleaners: When the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the headlights are on, if the lever is pulled, the headlight cleaners will operate once. After this, the headlight cleaners will operate every 5th time the lever is pulled.

Switching between the intermittent windshield wipers and rain-sensing windshield wipers (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

The wipers can be used as intermittent windshield wipers, which operate regardless of vehicle speed or amount of raindrops. The intermittent windshield wiper operation can be switched when the vehicle is stopped and the wiper is off. The wiper operation cannot be switched during AUTO mode or while the intermittent windshield wipers are operating.

Press and hold until the AUTO mode indicator stops flashing.

If is pressed and held until the AUTO mode indicator stops flashing again, it will return to its previous state.

The wiper can be switched when the vehicle is stopped and the wipers are off.

Operation of the intermittent windshield wipers with interval adjuster

1 (USA) For (Canada) o

Move the lever up by 2 levels

2 Move the lever up by 1 level

3 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)

Move the lever down by 1 level

4 (U.S.H.) or (Canada)

Move the lever down by 2 levels

Depending on the operating state of the wipers when the wiper lever is operated, the wipers will operate as follows.

- Current wiper operation: Off

Wiper lever operation	Wiper operation
OFF or O	Temporary operation
	Temporary operation

Wiper lever operation	Wiper operation
	Intermittent operation
	High speed operation

- Current wiper operation: Intermittent operation

Wiper lever operation	Wiper operation
OFF or O	Off
	Off
▼ or ▼	Low speed operation
HEI or Ψ	High speed operation

- Current wiper operation: Low speed operation

Wiper lever operation	Wiper operation
OFF or O	Off
	Intermittent operation
▼ or ▼	High speed operation
HEI or Ξ	High speed operation

- Current wiper operation: High speed operation

Wiper lever operation	Wiper operation
OFF or O	Off
	Low speed operation
▼ or ▼	No change
≦ HI or ≡	No change

Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected.

5 Increases the intermittent wind-shield wiper frequency

6 Decreases the intermittent wind-shield wiper frequency

7 Washer/wiper dual operation

Pulling the lever operates the wipers and washer.

The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

Vehicles with headlight cleaners: When the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the headlights are on, if the lever is pulled, the headlight cleaners will operate

once. After this, the headlight cleaners will operate every 5th time the lever is pulled.

■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■ Dripping prevention wiper sweep

After performing a washing and wiping operation several times, the wipers operate one more time after a short delay to prevent dripping.

However, this final wiper operation will not be performed while driving.

■ Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation (vehicles with rain-sensing wind-shield wipers)

Vehicle speed affects the following even when the wipers are not in AUTO mode.

- Intermittent wiper interval

● Wiper operation when the washer is being used (delay until drip prevention wiper sweep occurs)

With low speed windshield wiper operation selected, wiper operation will be switched from low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary.

Raindrop sensor (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

The raindrop sensor judges the amount of raindrops. An optical sensor is adopted. It may not operate properly when sunlight from the rising or setting of the sun intermittently strikes the windshield, or if bugs etc. are present on the windshield.

Diagram of a car interior showing a window with a black arrow pointing to the top panel (no text or symbols present)

- If the wiper is turned to AUTO mode while the engine switch is in IGNITION

ON mode, the wipers will operate once to show that AUTO mode is activated.

• If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 185°F (85°C) or higher, or -22°F (-30°C) or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate the wipers in any mode other than AUTO mode.
  ■ When the windshield wipers are in temporary operation (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

AUTO mode cannot be activated even if

is pressed.

■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

WARNING

■ Caution regarding the use of wind-shield wipers in AUTO mode

The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the windshield is subject to vibration in AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers or anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.

■ Caution regarding the use of washer fluid

When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle

Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually.

■ When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact your Lexus dealer. Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

Opening the fuel tank cap

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:

Before refueling the vehicle

• Close both side doors and windows, and turn the engine switch off.
• Confirm the type of fuel.

Fuel types

→P.363

■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

■ If the malfunction indicator lamp illuminates

The malfunction indicator lamp may illuminate erroneously if refueling is performed repeatedly when the fuel tank is nearly full.

WARNING

■ When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.

● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it. A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.

- Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to come close to an open fuel tank.

- Do not inhale vaporized fuel. Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

- Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle. Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

- Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged. This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.

When refueling

Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:

• Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.
• Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.
• Do not top off the fuel tank.

NOTICE

Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling. Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted surface.

Opening the fuel tank cap

1 With the doors unlocked, press the center of the rear edge of the fuel filler door.

Push until you hear a click and take your hand away to slightly open the fuel filler door. Then open the door fully by hand.

Close-up of a gray rounded square object with a white arrow pointing upward and a pink arrow pointing left, against a cloudy sky background (no text or symbols)

2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly and remove it, then put it into the holder on the fuel filler door.

Diagram of a car fuel plug with a valve and directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

If the fuel filler door cannot be opened →P.346

Closing the fuel tank cap

1 After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap until you hear a click. Once the

cap is released, it will turn slightly in the opposite direction.

Diagram of a car fuel injector with a highlighted valve and arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

2 Close the fuel filler door, and press the center of the rear edge of the fuel filler door until you hear a click.

When you lock the doors, the fuel filler door will also lock.

Close-up of a car's side panel with a pink arrow pointing upward (no text or symbols visible)

■ When closing the fuel filler door

Do not lock the doors before closing the fuel filler door, as the fuel filler door cannot be closed if the doors are locked. If the doors are locked and the fuel filler door cannot be closed, unlock the doors and then close the fuel filler door.

■ Fuel filler door lock condition

The fuel filler door may not be locked even when the vehicle's doors are locked in the following situations:

• When operating the door lock button inside the vehicle
• When the automatic door locking system is operated (→P.94)

WARNING

■ When replacing the fuel tank cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.

Lexus Safety System + 2.5

The Lexus Safety System + 2.5 consists of the following drive assist systems and contributes to a safe and comfortable driving experience:

Driving assist system

■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) →P.160
■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) →P.170
■ AHB (Automatic High Beam) →P.143
■ RSA (Road Sign Assist) ^* →P.179

*: If equipped

■ Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range →P.181

WARNING

Lexus Safety System + 2.5

The Lexus Safety System + 2.5 is designed to operate under the assumption that the driver will drive safely, and is designed to help reduce the impact to the occupants and the vehicle in the case of a collision or assist the driver in normal driving conditions.

As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance that this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The driver is always responsible for paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings and driving safely.

Sensors

Two types of sensors, located behind the front grille and windshield, detect information necessary to operate the drive assist systems.

A Radar sensor
B Front camera

WARNING

■ To avoid malfunction of the radar sensor

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the radar sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

- Keep the radar sensor and the radar sensor cover clean at all times.

A Radar sensor
B Radar sensor cover

WARNING

If the front of the radar sensor or the front or back of the radar sensor cover is dirty or covered with water droplets, snow, etc., clean it.

Clean the radar sensor and radar sensor cover with a soft cloth to avoid damaging them.

- Do not attach accessories, stickers (including transparent stickers) or other items to the radar sensor, radar sensor cover or surrounding area.

- Do not subject the radar sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact. If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper has been subjected to a strong impact, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

- Do not disassemble the radar sensor.

- Do not modify or paint the radar sensor or radar sensor cover.

In the following cases, the radar sensor must be recalibrated. Contact your Lexus dealer for details.

- When the radar sensor or front grille are removed and installed, or replaced

- When the front bumper is replaced

■ To avoid malfunction of the front camera

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the front camera may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

- Keep the windshield clean at all times.

- If the windshield is dirty or covered with an oily film, water droplets, snow, etc., clear the windshield.

- If a glass coating agent is applied to the windshield, it will still be necessary to use the windshield wipers to remove water droplets, etc. from the area of the windshield in front of the front camera.

• If the inner side of the windshield where the front camera is installed is dirty, contact your Lexus dealer.

- Do not attach objects, such as stickers, transparent stickers, etc., to the outer side of the windshield in front of the front camera (shaded area in the illustration).

A From the top of the windshield to approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm) below the bottom of the front camera

B Approximately 7.9 in. (20 cm) (Approximately 4.0 in. [10 cm] to the right and left from the center of the front camera)

- If the part of the windshield in front of the front camera is fogged up or covered with condensation or ice, use the windshield defogger to remove the fog, condensation or ice. (→P.227)

- If water droplets cannot be properly removed from the area of the windshield in front of the front camera by the windshield wipers, replace the wiper insert or wiper blade.

- Do not attach window tint to the wind-shield.

WARNING

• Replace the windshield if it is damaged or cracked.
  After replacing the windshield, the front camera must be recalibrated. Contact your Lexus dealer for details.

- Do not allow liquids to contact the front camera.

- Do not allow bright lights to shine into the front camera.

- Do not dirty or damage the front camera.

When cleaning the inside of the wind-shield, do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens of the front camera. Also, do not touch the lens. If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact your Lexus dealer.

- Do not subject the front camera to a strong impact.

- Do not change the installation position or direction of the front camera or remove it.

- Do not disassemble the front camera.

- Do not modify any components of the vehicle around the front camera (inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.

- Do not attach any accessories to the hood, front grille or front bumper that may obstruct the front camera. Contact your Lexus dealer for details.

- If a surfboard or other long object is to be mounted on the roof, make sure that it will not obstruct the front camera.

- Do not modify the headlights or other lights.

If a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display

A system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in the system.

In the following situations, perform the actions specified in the table. When the normal operating conditions are detected, the message will disappear and the system will become operational.

If the message does not disappear, contact your Lexus dealer.

Situation Actions
When the area around a camera is covered with dirt, moisture (fogged up, covered with condensation, ice, etc.), or other foreign matter	Using the wiper and A/C function, remove the dirt and other attached matter. (→P.227).
When the temperature around the front camera is outside of the operational range, such as when the vehicle is in the sun or in an extremely cold environment	If the front camera is hot, such as after the vehicle had been parked in the sun, use the air conditioning system to decrease the temperature around the front camera.If a sunshade was used when the vehicle was parked, depending on its type, the sun-light reflected from the surface of the sun-shade may cause the temperature of the front camera to become excessively high.
	If the front camera is cold, such after the vehicle is parked in an extremely cold environment, use the air conditioning system to increase the temperature around the front camera.
The area in front of the front camera is obstructed, such as when the hood is open or a sticker is attached to the part of the windshield in front of the front camera.	Close the hood, remove the sticker, etc. to clear the obstruction.
When “Pre-Collision System Radar In Self Calibration Unavailable See Owner’s Manual” is displayed.	Check whether there is attached materials on the radar sensor and radar sensor cover, and if there is, remove it.

• In the following situations, if the situation has changed (or the vehicle has been driven for some time) and the normal operating conditions are detected, the message will disappear and the system will become operational. If the message does not disappear, contact your Lexus dealer.
• When the temperature around the radar sensor is outside of the operational range, such as when the vehicle is in the sun or in an extremely cold environment
• When the front camera cannot detect objects in front of the vehicle, such as when driving in the dark, snow, or fog, or when bright lights are shining into the front camera
• Depending on the conditions in the vicinity of the vehicle, the radar may judge the surrounding environment can not be properly recognized. In that case, “Pre-Collision System Unavailable See Owner’s Manual” is displayed.

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

The pre-collision system uses a radar sensor and front camera to detect objects ( P.160) in front of the vehicle. When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with an object is high, a warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action and the potential brake pressure is increased to help the driver avoid the collision. If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with an object is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or help reduce the impact of the collision.

The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning timing can be changed. (→P.163)

Detectable objects

The system can detect the following (The detectable objects differs depending on the function.):

• Vehicles
• Bicyclists
• Pedestrians

System functions

■ Pre-collision warning

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, a buzzer will sound and a warning mes-

sage will be displayed on the multi-information display to urge the driver to take evasive action.

■ Pre-collision brake assist

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the system applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed.

■ Pre-collision braking

If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or reduce the impact of the collision.

Emergency steering assist

If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high and that there is sufficient space for the vehicle to be steered into within its lane, and the driver has begun evasive maneuver or steering, emergency steering assist will assist the steering movements to help enhance the vehicle stability and for lane departure prevention. During operation, the indicator will illuminate in green.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard, showing a close-up of a road sign (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

■ Intersection right/left turn assistance

If the system determines that there is a high possibility of a collision in the following situations, it will assist with Pre-collision warning and, if necessary Pre-collision braking.

Depending on the configuration of the intersection, it may not be possible to support.

- When you turn right/left at an intersection and cross the path of an oncoming vehicle

Top-down view of a road intersection with two cars ahead, showing motion lines and lane markings (no text or symbols)

- When you turn right/left, pedestrian is detected in the forward direction and estimated to enter your vehicle's path (bicyclists are not detected.)

Top-down view of a car with a camera cone projecting onto a road, no text or symbols visible

■ Suspension control

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the Adaptive Variable Suspension System ( P.211) will control the damping force of the shock absorbers to help maintain an appropriate vehicle posture.

WARNING

■ Limitations of the pre-collision system

The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings. Do not use the pre-collision system instead of normal braking operations under any circumstances. This system will not prevent collisions or lessen collision damage or injury in every situation. Do not overly rely on this system. Failure to do so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

Although this system is designed to help avoid a collision or help reduce the impact of the collision, its effectiveness may change according to various conditions, therefore the system may not always be able to achieve the same level of performance. Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system and always drive carefully.

- Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision: P.166

WARNING

- Conditions under which the system may not operate properly: P.168

- Do not attempt to test the operation of the pre-collision system yourself. Depending on the objects used for testing (dummies, cardboard objects imitating detectable objects, etc.), the system may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident.

■ Pre-collision braking

- When the pre-collision braking function is operating, a large amount of braking force will be applied.

- If the vehicle is stopped by the operation of the pre-collision braking function, the pre-collision braking function operation will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds. Depress the brake pedal as necessary.

The pre-collision braking function may not operate if certain operations are performed by the driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly or the steering wheel is being turned, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly prevent the pre-collision braking function from operating.

In some situations, while the pre-collision braking function is operating, operation of the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is depressed strongly or the steering wheel is turned and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive action.

- If the brake pedal is being depressed, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of the pre-collision braking function.

Emergency steering assist

As emergency steering assist operation will be canceled when the system determines that lane departure prevention function has been completed.

Emergency steering assist may not operate or may be cancel in the following cases as the system may determine the driver is taking actions.

- If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly, the steering wheel is being operated sharply, the brake pedal is being depressed or the turn signal lever is being operated. In this case, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and the emergency steering assist may not operate.

• In some situations, while the emergency steering assist is operating, operation of the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is depressed strongly, the steering wheel is operated sharply or the brake pedal is being depressed and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive action.

- When the emergency steering assist is operating, if the steering wheel is held firmly or is operated in the opposite direction to that which the system is generating torque, the function may be canceled.

■ When to disable the pre-collision system

In the following situations, disable the system, as it may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:

- When the vehicle is being towed

- When your vehicle is towing another vehicle

- When transporting the vehicle via truck, boat, train or similar means of transportation

WARNING

• When the vehicle is raised on a lift with the engine running and the tires are allowed to rotate freely
• When inspecting the vehicle using a drum tester such as a chassis dynamometer or speedometer tester, or when using an on vehicle wheel balancer
• When a strong impact is applied to the front bumper or front grille, due to an accident or other reasons
• If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehicle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning
• When the vehicle is driven in a sporty manner or off-road
• When the tires are not properly inflated
• When the tires are very worn
• When tires of a size other than specified are installed
• When tire chains are installed
• When a compact spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair kit is used
• If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may obstruct the radar sensor or front camera is temporarily installed to the vehicle

Changing settings of the pre-collision system

■ Enabling/disabling the pre-collision system

The pre-collision system can be enabled/disabled on P.75) of the multi-information display.

The system is automatically enabled each time the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.

If the system is disabled, the PCS warning light will turn on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

■ Changing the pre-collision warning timing

The pre-collision warning timing can be changed on P.75) of the multi-information display.

The warning timing setting is retained when the engine switch is turned off. However, if the pre-collision system is disabled and re-enabled, the operation timing will return to the default setting (middle).

If the pre-collision warning timing is changed, emergency steering assist timing will also be changed accordingly.

If late is selected, emergency steering assist would not operate in case of an emergency.

1 Early

2 Middle

This is the default setting.

3 Late

■ Operational conditions for each pre-collision function

The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a detected object is high.

The system may not operate in the following situations:

- If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time

• If the shift position is in R

The operation speeds and operation cancellation for each function is listed below.
● Pre-collision warning

Detectable objects Vehicle speed		Relative speed between your vehicle and object
Preceding and stopped vehicles	Approx. 7 to 110 mph (10 to 180 km/h)	Approx. 7 to 110 mph (10 to 180 km/h)
Oncoming vehicles	Approx. 7 to 110 mph (10 to 180 km/h)	Approx. 13 to 110 mph (20 to 180 km/h)
Bicyclists and pedestrians	Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10 to 80 km/h)	Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10 to 80 km/h)

While the pre-collision warning function is operating, if the steering wheel is operated heavily or suddenly, the pre-collision warning may be cancelled.

● Pre-collision brake assist

Detectable objects Vehicle speed		Relative speed between your vehicle and object
Preceding and stopped vehicles	Approx. 20 to 110 mph (30 to 180 km/h)	Approx. 20 to 110 mph (30 to 180 km/h)
Bicyclists and pedestrians	Approx. 20 to 50 mph (30 to 80 km/h)	Approx. 20 to 50 mph (30 to 80 km/h)

● Pre-collision braking

Detectable objects Vehicle speed		Relative speed between your vehicle and object
Preceding and stopped vehicles	Approx. 7 to 110 mph (10 to 180 km/h)	Approx. 7 to 110 mph (10 to 180 km/h)
Oncoming vehicles	Approx. 7 to 110 mph (10 to 180 km/h)	Approx. 13 to 110 mph (20 to 180 km/h)
Bicyclists and pedestrians	Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10 to 80 km/h)	Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10 to 80 km/h)

If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is operating, it will be canceled:

• The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.

• The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly.

● Emergency steering assist

When the turn signal lights are flashing, emergency steering assist will not operate in case of an emergency.

When VSC OFF indicator is illuminated, emergency steering assist will not operate.

Detectable objects Vehicle speed		Relative speed between your vehicle and object
Preceding and stopped vehicles, bicyclists and pedestrians	Approx. 25 to 50 mph (40 to 80 km/h)	Approx. 25 to 50 mph (40 to 80 km/h)

If any of the following occur while the emergency steering assist function is operating, it will be canceled:

• The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.

• The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly.

• The brake pedal is depressed.

- Intersection right/left turn assistance (pre-collision warning)

When the turn signal lights are not flashing, support for turning left or right at an intersection which targets oncoming vehicles does not work.

Detectable objects Vehicle speed		Oncoming vehicle speed	Relative speed between your vehicle and object
Oncoming vehicles	Approx. 7 to 15 mph (10 to 25 km/h)	Approx. 20 to 35 mph (30 to 55 km/h)	Approx. 25 to 50 mph (40 to 80 km/h)
Pedestrians	Approx. 7 to 15 mph (10 to 25 km/h)	-	Approx. 7 to 15 mph (10 to 25 km/h)

● Intersection right/left turn assistance (pre-collision braking)

When the turn signal lights are not flashing, support for turning left or right at an intersection which targets oncoming vehicles does not work.

Detectable objects Vehicle speed		Oncoming vehicle speed	Relative speed between your vehicle and object
Oncoming vehicles	Approx. 10 to 15 mph (15 to 25 km/h)	Approx. 20 to 28 mph (30 to 45 km/h)	Approx. 28 to 43 mph (45 to 70 km/h)
Pedestrians	Approx. 7 to 15 mph (10 to 25 km/h)	-	Approx. 7 to 15 mph (10 to 25 km/h)

■ Object detection function

The system detects objects based on their size, profile, motion, etc. However, an object may not be detected depending on the surrounding brightness and the motion, posture, and angle of the detected object, preventing the system from operating properly. (→P.168)

The illustration shows an image of detectable objects.

Silhouette icons representing vehicles, pedestrians, and bicycles (no text or symbols)

■ Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision

In some situations such as the following, the system may determine that there is a possibility of a frontal collision and operate.

• When passing a detectable object, etc.
• When changing lanes while overtaking a detectable object, etc.
• When approaching a detectable object in an adjacent lane or on the roadside, such as when changing the course of travel or driving on a winding road

Diagram showing two cars driving on a curved road with sound waves, no text or symbols present

• When rapidly closing on a detectable object, etc.
• When approaching objects on the roadside, such as detectable objects, guardrails, utility poles, trees, or walls
• When there is a detectable object or other object by the roadside at the entrance of a curve

Diagram showing two cars approaching a curved road with sensor waves, no text or symbols present

- When there are patterns or paint in front of your vehicle that may be mistaken for a detectable object

- When the front of your vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc.

- When overtaking a detectable object that is changing lanes or making a right/left turn

Diagram showing two cars on a road with a traffic cone and directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

- When passing a detectable object in an oncoming lane that is stopped to make a right/left turn

Top-down diagram of two cars on a road with sound waves, no text or symbols present

- When a detectable object approaches very close and then stops before entering the path of your vehicle

- If the front of your vehicle is raised or lowered, such as when on an uneven or undulating road surface

- When driving on a road surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron bridge

- When there is a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, or a protrusion in front of your vehicle

- When passing under an object (road sign, billboard, etc.)

Illustration of a car driving on a road with traffic signals and overhead barriers (no text or symbols)

- When approaching an electric toll gate barrier, parking area barrier, or other barrier that opens and closes

- When using an automatic car wash

- When driving through or under objects that may contact your vehicle, such as thick grass, tree branches, or a banner

Illustration of a car driving on a road with motion lines indicating speed (no text or symbols)

- When driving through steam or smoke

- When driving near an object that reflects radio waves, such as a large truck or guardrail

- When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant, radar equipped vehicles, etc., or other location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be present

- When there are many things which can reflect the radio waves of the radar in the vicinity (tunnels, truss bridges, gravel roads, snow covered road that have tracks, etc.)

- While making a right/left turn, when an oncoming vehicle or a crossing pedestrian has already exited the path of your vehicle

- While making a right/left turn, closely in front of an oncoming vehicle or a crossing pedestrian.

- While making a right/left turn, when an oncoming vehicle or a crossing pedestrian stops before entering the path of your vehicle

- While making a right/left turn, when an oncoming vehicle turns right/left in front of your vehicle

Top-down view of a car with two cars approaching each other on a road, no visible text or symbols

• While steering into the direction of oncoming traffic

■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly

In some situations such as the following, an object may not be detected by the radar sensor and front camera, preventing the system from operating properly:

- When a detectable object is approaching your vehicle

- When your vehicle or a detectable object is wobbling

- If a detectable object makes an abrupt maneuver (such as sudden swerving, acceleration or deceleration)

- When your vehicle approaches a detectable object rapidly

- When a detectable object is not directly in front of your vehicle

Diagram showing two cars emitting sound waves from a central point, with no text or symbols present.

- When a detectable object is near a wall, fence, guardrail, manhole cover, vehicle, steel plate on the road, etc.

- When a detectable object is under a structure

- When part of a detectable object is hidden by an object, such as large baggage, an umbrella, or guardrail

- When there are many things which can reflect the radio waves of the radar in the vicinity (tunnels, truss bridges, gravel roads, snow covered road that have tracks, etc.)

- When there is an effect on the radio waves to the radar that is installed on

another vehicle

- When multiple detectable objects are close together

- If the sun or other light is shining directly on a detectable object

- When a detectable object is a shade of white and looks extremely bright

- When a detectable object appears to be nearly the same color or brightness as its surroundings

- If a detectable object cuts or suddenly emerges in front of your vehicle

- When the front of your vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc.

- When a very bright light ahead, such as the sun or the headlights of oncoming traffic, shines directly into the front camera

- When approaching the side or front of a vehicle ahead

• If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle

- If a vehicle ahead is narrow, such as a personal mobility vehicle

- If a preceding vehicle has a small rear end, such as an unloaded truck

• If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end, such as a low bed trailer

Illustration of a car and a truck with motion lines indicating speed or signal transmission (no text or symbols)

- If a vehicle ahead has extremely high ground clearance

Illustration of a car approaching a truck with sensor beams (no text or symbols)

• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which protrudes past its rear bumper

- If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped, such as a tractor or side car

• If a vehicle ahead is a child sized bicycle, a bicycle that is carrying a large load, a

bicycle ridden by more than one person, or a uniquely shaped bicycle (bicycle with a child seat, tandem bicycle, etc.)

- If a pedestrian/or the riding height of a bicyclist ahead is shorter than approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than approximately 6.5 ft. (2 m)

• If a pedestrian/bicyclist is wearing oversized clothing (a rain coat, long skirt, etc.), making their silhouette obscure

• If a pedestrian is bending forward or squatting or bicyclist is bending forward

• If a pedestrian/bicyclist is moving fast

- If a pedestrian is pushing a stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or other vehicle

- When driving in inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm

- When driving through steam or smoke

- When the surrounding area is dim, such as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in a tunnel, making a detectable object appear to be nearly the same color as its surroundings

- When driving in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel

• After the engine has started the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time

• While making a left/right turn and for a few seconds after making a left/right turn

• While driving on a curve and for a few seconds after driving on a curve

• If your vehicle is skidding

- If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered

Two cars with sound waves projecting onto a road, no text or symbols present

• If the wheels are misaligned

- If a wiper blade is blocking the front camera

• The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds

- When driving on a hill

- If the radar sensor or front camera is mis-aligned

- When driving in a traffic lane separated by more than one lane where oncoming vehicles are driving while making a right/left turn

- When largely out of place with the opposite facing targeted oncoming vehicle during a right/left turn

Top-down view of a road intersection with two cars, one emitting a focused light beam (no text or symbols visible)

• While making a right/left turn, when a pedestrian approaches from behind or side of your vehicle

Illustration of a traffic accident scene with a car, a person falling, and a road barrier (no text or symbols)

In addition to the above, in some situations, such as the following, the emergency steering assist may not operate.

- When the white (yellow) lane lines are difficult to see, such as when they are faint, diverging/merging, or a shadow is cast upon them

- When the lane is wider or narrower than normal

- When there is a light and dark pattern on the road surface, such as due to road repairs

- When the target is too close

- When there is insufficient safe or unobstructed space for the vehicle to be steered into

• If oncoming vehicle is present

• If VSC function is operating

In some situations such as the following, sufficient braking force or steering force may not be obtained, preventing the system from performing properly:

- If the braking functions cannot operate to their full extent, such as when the brake

parts are extremely cold, extremely hot, or wet

• If the vehicle is not properly maintained (brakes or tires are excessively worn, improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)
- When the vehicle is being driven on a gravel road or other slippery surface
- When the road surface has deep wheel tracks
- When driving on a hill road
- When driving on a road that has inclines to the left or right

If VSC is disabled

• If VSC is disabled (→P.212), emergency steering assist is disabled.
  ● The PCS warning light will turn on.

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

While driving on a road with clear white (yellow) lane lines, the LTA system warns the driver if the vehicle may deviate from the current lane or course ^ , and also can slightly operate the steering wheel to help avoid deviation from the lane or course ^ . Also, while the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range (→P.181) is operating, this system will operate the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's lane position.

The LTA system recognizes white (yellow) lane lines or a course using the front camera. Additionally, it detects preceding vehicles using the front camera and radar.

*: Boundary between asphalt and the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

Illustration of a modern sedan with visible grille and roof details (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Before using LTA system

- Do not rely solely upon the LTA system. The LTA system does not automatically drive the vehicle or reduce the amount of attention that must be paid to the area in front of the vehicle. The driver must always assume full responsibility for driving safely by paying careful attention to the surrounding conditions and operating the steering wheel to correct the path of the vehicle. Also, the driver must take adequate breaks when fatigued, such as from driving for a long period of time.

● Failure to perform appropriate driving operations and pay careful attention may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Situations unsuitable for LTA system

In the following situations, use the LTA switch to turn the system off. Failure to do so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Vehicle is driven on a road surface which is slippery due to rainy weather, fallen snow, freezing, etc.

● Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road.

● White (yellow) lines are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.

● Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or restricted lane due to construction work.

● Vehicle is driven in a construction zone.

● A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are equipped.

- When the tires have been excessively worn, or when the tire inflation pressure is low.

During emergency towing.

■ Preventing LTA system malfunctions and operations performed by mistake

- Do not modify the headlights or place stickers, etc. on the surface of the lights.

- Do not modify the suspension etc. If the suspension etc. needs to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.

- Do not install or place anything on the hood or grille. Also, do not install a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).

- If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Conditions in which functions may not operate properly

In the following situations, the functions may not operate properly and the vehicle may depart from its lane. Drive safely by always paying careful attention to your surroundings and operate the steering wheel to correct the path of the vehicle without relying solely on the functions.

- When the follow-up cruising display is displayed (→P.175) and the preceding vehicle changes lanes. (Your vehicle may follow the preceding vehicle and also change lanes.)

Top-down view of a vehicle with two cars connected by a dashed line, no visible text or symbols

- When the follow-up cruising display is displayed (→P.175) and the preceding vehicle is swaying. (Your vehicle may sway accordingly and depart from the lane.)

WARNING

• When the follow-up cruising display is displayed (→P.175) and the preceding vehicle departs from its lane. (Your vehicle may follow the preceding vehicle and depart from the lane.)
• When the follow-up cruising display is displayed ( P.175) and the preceding vehicle is being driven extremely close to the left/right lane line. (Your vehicle may follow the preceding vehicle and depart from the lane.)
  ● Vehicle is being driven around a sharp curve.
• Objects or patterns that could be mistaken for white (yellow) lines are present on the side of the road (guardrails, reflective poles, etc.).

Simple line drawing of a car driving on a paved road with four vertical posts (no text or symbols)

● Vehicle is driven where the road diverges, merges, etc.

graph TD
    A["Left Vehicle"] --> B{Dashed Arrow}
    B --> C["Left Vehicle"]
    B --> D["Right Vehicle"]
    E["Left Vehicle"] --> F{Dashed Arrow}
    F --> G["Left Vehicle"]
    F --> H["Right Vehicle"]
    I["Left Vehicle"] --> J{Dashed Arrow}
    J --> K["Left Vehicle"]
    J --> L["Right Vehicle"]

● Repair marks of asphalt, white (yellow) lines, etc. are present due to road repair.

Simple line drawing of a bottle with a dashed arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

There are shadows on the road that run parallel with, or cover, the white (yellow) lines.
The vehicle is driven in an area without white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a tollgate or checkpoint, or at an intersection, etc.
The white (yellow) lines are cracked, "Botts' dots", "Raised pavement marker" or stones are present.
● The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen or are difficult to see due to sand, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a road surface that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.
● The traffic lines are yellow (which may be more difficult to recognize than lines that are white).
● The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a bright surface, such as concrete.
- If the edge of the road is not clear or straight.
● The vehicle is driven on a surface that is bright due to reflected light, etc.
The vehicle is driven in an area where the brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrances and exits of tunnels, etc.

WARNING

● Light from the headlights of an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the camera.
● The vehicle is driven on a slope.
● The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts left or right, or a winding road.
● The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or rough road.
● The traffic lane is excessively narrow or wide.
● The vehicle is extremely tilted due to carrying heavy luggage or having improper tire pressure.
● The distance to the preceding vehicle is extremely short.
The vehicle is moving up and down a large amount due to road conditions during driving (poor roads or road seams).
- When driving in a tunnel or at night with the headlights off or when a headlight is dim due to its lens being dirty or it being misaligned.
● The vehicle is struck by a crosswind.
● The vehicle is affected by wind from a vehicle driven in a nearby lane.
● The vehicle has just changed lanes or crossed an intersection.
● Tires which differ by structure, manufacturer, brand or tread pattern are used.
- When tires of a size other than specified are installed.
● Snow tires, etc. are equipped.
● The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds.

Functions included in LTA system

Lane departure alert function

When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane or course ^* , a warning is displayed on the multi-information display, and either a warning buzzer will sound or the steering wheel will vibrate to alert the driver.

When the warning buzzer sounds or the steering wheel vibrates, check the area around your vehicle and carefully operate the steering wheel to move the vehicle back to the center of the lane.

*: Boundary between asphalt and the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

Diagram showing three cars on a road with directional arrows and a lightning bolt symbol (no text or labels)

Steering assist function

When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane or course ^* , the system provides assistance as necessary by operating the steering wheel in small amounts for a

short period of time to keep the vehicle in its lane.

* : Boundary between asphalt and the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

Top-down view of a multi-lane road with cars and a curved arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

■ Vehicle sway warning function

When the vehicle is swaying within a lane, the warning buzzer will sound and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display to alert the driver.

Diagram of two cars driving on a road with an upward arrow indicating speed, no text or symbols present

Lane centering function

This function is linked with dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range and provides the required assistance by operating the steering wheel to keep the vehicle in its current lane.

When dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is not operating, the lane centering function does not operate.

In situations where the white (yellow) lane lines are difficult to see or are not visible, such as when in a traffic jam, this function will operate to help follow a preceding vehicle by monitoring the position of the preceding vehicle.

Top-down diagram of three cars driving on a curved road with an upward arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Turning LTA system on

Press the LTA switch to turn the LTA system on.

The LTA indicator illuminates and a message is displayed on the multi-information display.

Press the LTA switch again to turn the LTA system off.

When the LTA system is turned on or off, operation of the LTA system continues in the same condition the next time the engine is started.

Indications on multi-information display

A LTA indicator

The illumination condition of the indicator informs the driver of the system operation status.

Illuminated in white: LTA system is operating.

Illuminated in green: Steering wheel assistance of the steering assist function or lane centering function is operating.

Flashing in orange: Lane departure alert function is operating.

B Operation display of steering wheel operation support

Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving assist system information.

Indicates that steering wheel assistance of the steering assist function or lane centering function is operating.

Both outer sides of the lane are displayed: Indicates that steering wheel assist of the lane centering function is operating.

One outer side of the lane is displayed: Indicates that steering wheel assist of the steering assist function is operating.

Both outer sides of the lane are flashing: Alerts the driver that their input is necessary to stay in the center of the lane (lane centering function).

C Lane departure alert function display

Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving assist system information.

▶ Inside of displayed lines is white

Black and white photo of a car with two bright light trails against a dark background (no text or symbols)

Indicates that the system is recognizing white (yellow) lines or a course ^* . When the vehicle departs from its lane, the white line displayed on the side the vehicle departs from flashes orange.

▶ Inside of displayed lines is black

Close-up of a car with two white triangular blades against a dark background (no text or symbols visible)

Indicates that the system is not able to recognize white (yellow) lines or a course ^* or is temporarily canceled.

*: Boundary between asphalt and the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

D Follow-up cruising display

Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving assist system information.

Indicates that steering assist of the lane centering function is operating by monitoring the position of a preceding vehicle.

When the follow-up cruising display is displayed, if the preceding vehicle moves, your vehicle may move in the same way.

Always pay careful attention to your surroundings and operate the steering wheel as necessary to correct the path of the vehicle and ensure safety.

■ Operation conditions of each function

● Lane departure alert function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.

- LTA is turned on.

- Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more. ^*1

- System recognizes white (yellow) lane lines or a course ^2 . (When a white [yellow] line or course ^2 is recognized on only one side, the system will operate only for the recognized side.)

- Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.

- Turn signal lever is not opera

- Vehicle is not being driven around a sharp curve.

- No system malfunctions are detected. ( P.178)

*1: The function operates even if the vehicle speed is less than approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) when the lane centering function is operating.

^*2 : Boundary between asphalt and the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

- Steering assist function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met in addition to the operation conditions for the lane departure alert function.

- Vehicle is not accelerated or decelerated by a fixed amount or more.

- Steering wheel is not operated with a steering force level suitable for changing lanes.

• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not oper-

ating.

• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
  ● Vehicle sway warning function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.

- Setting for "Sway Warning" in multi-information display is set ( P.75)

• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.
- Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
- No system malfunctions are detected. ( P.178)

● Lane centering function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.

- LTA is turned on.

• Setting for "Lane Center" in
  multi-information display are set to "On". (→P.75)
• This function recognizes white (yellow) lane lines or the position of a preceding vehicle (except when the preceding vehicle is small, such as a motorcycle).
• The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is operating in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 10 to 13 ft. (3 to 4 m).
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
• Vehicle is not being driven around a sharp curve.
• No system malfunctions are detected. (→P.178)
  • Vehicle does not accelerate or decelerate by a fixed amount or more.
• Steering wheel is not operated with a steering force level suitable for changing lanes.
  • ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not operating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• Hands off steering wheel warning is not displayed. (→P.177)
• The vehicle is being driven in the center of a lane.
• Steering assist function is not operating.

■ Temporary cancelation of functions

- When operation conditions are no longer

met, a function may be temporarily canceled. However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation of the function is automatically restored. (→P.176)

- If the operation conditions (→P.176) are no longer met while the lane centering function is operating, the steering wheel may vibrate and the buzzer may sound to indicate that the function has been temporarily canceled. However, if the "Alert"

customization setting is set to

system will notify the driver by vibrating the steering wheel instead of sounding the buzzer.

■ Steering assist function/lane centering function

• Depending on the vehicle speed, lane departure situation, road conditions, etc., the driver may not feel the function is operating or the function may not operate at all.
• The steering control of the function is overridden by the driver's steering wheel operation.
• Do not attempt to test the operation of the steering assist function.

■ Lane departure alert function

The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear due to external noise, audio play-back, etc. Also, it may be difficult to feel steering wheel vibrations due to the road conditions, etc.
- If the edge of the course ^* is not clear or straight, the lane departure alert function may not operate.
- Do not attempt to test the operation of the lane departure alert function.

*: Boundary between asphalt and the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

■ Hands off steering wheel warning

In the following situations, a warning message urging the driver to hold the steering wheel and the symbol shown in the illustration are displayed on the multi-information display to warn the driver. The warning stops when the system determines that the driver holds the steering wheel. Always

keep your hands on the steering wheel when using this system, regardless of warnings.

Diagram showing a car and steering wheel on a road, no text or symbols present

- When the system determines the driver is not holding the steering wheel while the lane centering function is operating.

If the driver continues to keep their hands off of the steering wheel, the buzzer sounds, the driver is warned and the function is temporarily canceled. This warning also operates in the same way when the driver continuously operates the steering wheel only a small amount.

The buzzer also sounds even if the alert

type is set to

- When the system determines that the vehicle may deviate from the lane while driving around a curve while the lane centering function is operating.

Depending on the vehicle condition and road conditions, the warning may not operate.

- When the system determines that the driver is driving without holding the steering wheel while the steering wheel assist of the steering assist function is operating.

If the driver continues to keep their hands off of the steering wheel and the steering wheel assist is operating, the buzzer sounds and the driver is warned. Each time the buzzer sounds, the continuing time of the buzzer becomes longer.

The buzzer also sounds even if the alert

type is set to

■ Vehicle sway warning function

When the system determines that the vehicle is swaying while the vehicle sway warning function is operating, a buzzer sounds and a warning message urging the driver to rest and the symbol shown in the illustration are simultaneously displayed on the multi-information display.

Simple icon of a steaming cup on a saucer, no text or symbols present

Depending on the vehicle and road conditions, the warning may not operate.

Warning message

If the following warning message is displayed on the multi-information display and the LTA indicator illuminates in orange, follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedure. Also, if a different warning message is displayed, follow the instructions displayed on the screen.

● "LTA Malfunction Visit Your Dealer"

The system may not be operating properly. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

● "LTA Unavailable"

The system is temporarily canceled due to a malfunction in a sensor other than the front camera. Turn the LTA system off, wait for a little while, and then turn the LTA system back on.

● "LTA Unavailable at Current Speed"

The function cannot be used as the vehicle speed exceeds the LTA operation range. Drive slower.

Customization

Function settings can be changed. (Customizable features:→P.374)

RSA (Road Sign Assist) ^*

*: If equipped

Summary of function

The RSA system recognizes specific road signs using the front camera and/or navigation system (when speed limit information is available) to provide information to the driver via the display.

Side view of a car with a window and arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

If the system judges that the vehicle is being driven over the speed limit, performing prohibited actions, etc. according to the recognized road signs, it notifies the driver through a visual notification and notification buzzer.

WARNING

Before using the RSA

Do not rely solely upon the RSA system. RSA is a system which supports the driver by providing information, but it is not a replacement for a driver's own vision and awareness. Drive safely by always paying careful attention to the traffic rules.

Indication on the multi-information display

When the front camera recognizes a sign and/or information of a sign is available from the navigation system, the sign will be displayed on the multi-information display.

- When the driving support system information is selected, a maximum of 3 signs can be displayed. (→P.75)

- When a tab other than the driving support system information is selected, the following types of road signs will be displayed (→P.75)

• Speed limit sign
• Do Not Enter sign (when notification is necessary)

If signs other than speed limit signs are recognized, they will be displayed in an overlapping stack under the current speed limit

sign.

Supported types of road signs

The following types of road signs, including electronic signs and blinking signs, are recognized.

A non-official or a recently introduced traffic sign may not be recognized.

Speed limit

Do Not Enter

Stop

Yield

Notification function

In the following situations, the RSA system will notify the driver.

• When the vehicle speed exceeds the speed notification threshold of the speed limit sign displayed, the sign display will be emphasized and a buzzer will sound.
• When the RSA system recognizes a do not enter sign and determines that your vehicle has entered a no-entry area, the displayed sign will flash and a buzzer will sound.

Depending on the situation, a notification function may not operate properly.

Setting procedure

1 Press or of the meter control switches and select

2 Press or of the meter control switches and select when press

3 Press or of the meter control switches and select "RSA", then press

■ Automatic turn-off of RSA sign display

In the following situations, a displayed speed limit sign and/or do not enter sign will stop being displayed automatically:

• No sign has been recognized for a certain distance.
  ● The road changes due to a left or right turn, etc.

In the following situations, stop and yield signs will stop being displayed automatically:

● The system determines that your vehicle has passed the sign.
● The road changes due to a left or right turn, etc.

■ Conditions in which the function may not operate or detect correctly

In the following situations, RSA does not operate normally and may not recognize signs, display the incorrect sign, etc. However, this does not indicate a malfunction.

● The front camera is misaligned due to a strong impact being applied to the sensor, etc.
- Dirt, snow, stickers, etc. are on the wind-shield near the front camera.
- In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms.
● Light from an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the front camera.
● The sign is dirty, faded, tilted or bent.
● The contrast of electronic sign is low.
● All or part of the sign is hidden by the leaves of a tree, a pole, etc.

● The sign is only visible to the front camera for a short amount of time.

● The driving scene (turning, lane change, etc.) is judged incorrectly.

- If a sign not appropriate for the currently traveled lane, but the sign exists directly after a freeway branches, or in an adjacent lane just before merging.

- Stickers are attached to the rear of the preceding vehicle.

● A sign resembling a system compatible sign is recognized.

- Side road speed signs may be detected and displayed (if positioned in sight of the front camera) while the vehicle is traveling on the main road.

Roundabout exit road speed signs may be detected and displayed (if positioned in sight of the front camera) while traveling on a roundabout.

● The front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load.

● The surrounding brightness is not sufficient or changes suddenly.

- When a sign intended for trucks, etc. is recognized.

● The navigation system map data is outdated.

● The navigation system is not operating.

● The speed information displayed on the meter and on the navigation system may be different due to the navigation system using map data.

■ Speed limit sign display

If the engine switch was last turned off while a speed limit sign was displayed on the multi-information display, the same sign displays again when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.

If "RSA Malfunction Visit Your Dealer" is shown

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Customization

Some functions can be customized. (Customizable features:→P.374)

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates, decelerates and stops to match the speed changes of the preceding vehicle even if the accelerator pedal is not depressed. In constant speed control mode, the vehicle runs at a fixed speed.

Use the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range on freeways and highways.

● Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode ( P.183)
- Constant speed control mode (→P.188)

System Components

A Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch
B Multi-information display
C Set speed
D Indicators

E Cruise control switch

WARNING

■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

● Driving safely is the sole responsibility of the driver. Do not rely solely on the system, and drive safely by always paying careful attention to your surroundings.
The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range provides driving assistance to reduce the driver's burden. However, there are limitations to the assistance provided. Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system and always drive carefully.
- When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead: P.190
- Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not function correctly: P.191
- Set the speed appropriately depending on the speed limit, traffic flow, road conditions, weather conditions, etc. The driver is responsible for checking the set speed.
Even when the system is functioning normally, the condition of the preceding vehicle as detected by the system may differ from the condition observed by the driver. Therefore, the driver must always remain alert, assess the danger of each situation and drive safely. Relying solely on this system or assuming the system ensures safety while driving can lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
- Switch the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range setting to off, using the "ON/OFF" button when not in use.

■ Cautions regarding the driving assist systems

Observe the following precautions, as there are limitations to the assistance provided by the system.

Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Assisting the driver to measure following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is only intended to help the driver in determining the following distance between the driver's own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle's surroundings.

● Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range determines whether the following distance between the driver's own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead is within a set range. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.

● Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range does not include functions which will prevent or avoid collisions with vehicles ahead of your vehicle. Therefore, if there is ever any possibility of danger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved.

WARNING

■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

Do not use dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Roads where there are pedestrians, cyclists, etc.
In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● At entrances to freeways and highways
- When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from detecting correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)
- When there is rain, snow, etc. on the front surface of the radar or front camera
In traffic conditions that require frequent repeated acceleration and deceleration
During emergency towing
- When an approach warning buzzer is heard often

Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

This mode employs a radar to detect the presence of vehicles up to approximately

328 ft. (100 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-to-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle ahead. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.

When driving on downhill slopes, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance may become shorter.

A Example of constant speed cruising

When there are no vehicles ahead

The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver.

B Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising

When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed appears

When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this time). The system will respond to changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver. Approach warning warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.

When the vehicle ahead of you stops, your vehicle will also stop (vehicle is stopped by system control). After the vehicle ahead starts off, pushing the cruise control lever up or depressing the accelerator pedal (start-off operation) will resume follow-up cruising. If the start-off operation is not performed, system control continues to keep your vehicle stopped.

When the turn signal lever is operated and your vehicle moves to an overtaking lane while driving at 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the vehicle will accelerate to help to overtake a passing vehicle.

The system's identification of what is an overtaking lane may be determined solely based on the location of the steering wheel in the vehicle (left side driver position versus right side driver position.) If the vehicle is driven to a region where the overtaking lane is on a different side from where the vehicle is normally driven, the vehicle may accelerate when the turn

signal lever is operated in the opposite direction to the overtaking lane (e.g., if the driver normally operates the vehicle in a region where the overtaking lane is to the right but then drives to a region where the overtaking lane is to the left, the vehicle may accelerate when the right turn signal is activated).

C Example of acceleration

When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower than the set speed

The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to constant speed cruising.

Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

1 Press the "ON/OFF" button to activate the cruise control.

Dynamic radar cruise control indicator will come on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.

If the "ON/OFF" button is pressed and held for 1.5 seconds or more, the system turns on in constant speed control mode. (→P.188)

2 Accelerate or decelerate, with accelerator pedal operation, to the desired vehicle speed (at or above approximately 20 mph [30 km/h]) and push the lever down to set the speed.

Cruise control "SET" indicator will come on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed.

Adjusting the set speed

- Adjusting the set speed by the lever To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is displayed.

1 Increases the speed (Except when the vehicle has been stopped by system control in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

2 Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction.

Large adjustment: Hold the lever up or down to change the speed, and release when the desired speed is reached.

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

For the U.S. mainland and Hawaii

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h) ^1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph) ^2 each time the lever is operated

Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 1 mph (1.6 km/h) ^1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph) ^2 increments for as long as the lever is held

For Canada and Puerto Rico

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h) ^1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph) ^2 each time the lever is operated

Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 5 mph (8 km/h) ^1 or 5 km/h (3.1 mph) ^2 increments for as long as the lever is held

In the constant speed control mode ( P.188), the set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h) ^1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph) ^2 each time the lever is operated

Large adjustment: The speed will continue to change while the lever is held.

*1: When the set speed is shown in "MPH"
*2: When the set speed is shown in "km/h"

● Increasing the set speed by the accelerator pedal

1 Accelerate with accelerator pedal operation to the desired vehicle speed
2 Push the lever down

Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

Pressing the switch changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows:

graph TD
    A["A"] --> Step1["Step 1"]
    Step1 --> Step2["Step 2"]
    Step2 --> Step3["Step 3"]

1 Long
2 Medium
3 Short

If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the preceding vehicle mark Aill also be displayed.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed. When the vehicle is stopped by system control, the vehicle stops at a certain vehicle-to-vehicle distance depending on the situation.

Distance options	Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long	Approximately 160 ft. (50 m)
Medium	Approximately 130 ft. (40 m)
Short	Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)

Resuming follow-up cruising when the vehicle has been stopped by system control (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

After the vehicle ahead of you starts off, push the lever up.

Your vehicle will also resume follow-up cruising if the accelerator pedal is depressed after the vehicle ahead of you starts off.

Canceling and resuming the speed control

1 Pulling the lever toward you cancels the speed control.

The speed control is also canceled when the brake pedal is depressed. (When the vehicle has been stopped by system control, depressing the brake pedal does not cancel the setting.)

2 Pushing the lever up resumes the cruise control and returns vehicle speed to the set speed.

Approach warning (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a vehicle. Depress the brake pedal to ensure an appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle distance.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing the steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

■ Warnings may not occur when

In the following instances, warnings may not occur even when the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is small.

• When the speed of the preceding vehicle matches or exceeds your vehicle speed
• When the preceding vehicle is traveling at an extremely slow speed
• Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
• When depressing the accelerator pedal

Curve speed reduction function

While driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, this function will reduce the vehicle speed, if it is determined to be necessary.

Function operation

When the steering wheel begins to be turned, the vehicle speed will begin being reduced. When the steering wheel is returned to the center position, the vehicle speed reduction will end.

Depending on the situation, the vehicle speed will then return to the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode set speed.

In situations where vehicle-to-vehicle distance control needs to operate, such as when a preceding vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle, the curve speed reduction function will be canceled.

Operation display

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, with an inset showing a road sign indicating a winding road ahead (no text or symbols present)

Displayed when the vehicle speed is being reduced.

When the vehicle speed reduction ends, the display will disappear.

■ Changing the settings of the curve speed reduction function

The curve speed reduction function can be enabled/disabled and the vehicle speed reduction strength can be adjusted on the multi-information display.

The setting will change each time the "OK" meter control switch is pressed.

Selecting constant speed control mode

When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance. Select this mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode does not function correctly due to a dirty radar, etc.

1 With the cruise control off, press and hold the "ON/OFF" button for 1.5 seconds or more.

Immediately after the "ON/OFF" button is pressed, the dynamic radar cruise control indicator will come on. Afterwards, it switches to the cruise control indicator.

Switching to constant speed control mode is only possible when operating the lever with the cruise control off.

2 Accelerate or decelerate, with accelerator pedal operation, to the desired vehicle speed (at or above approximately 20 mph [30 km/h]) and push the lever down to set the speed.

Cruise control "SET" indicator will come on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed.

Adjusting the speed setting: →P.185

Canceling and resuming the speed setting:

→P.187

■ Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range can be set when

● The shift lever is in D.

● The desired set speed can be set when the vehicle speed is approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.

(However, when the vehicle speed is set while driving at below approximately 20 mph [30 km/h], the set speed will be set to approximately 20 mph [30 km/h].)

■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

The vehicle can accelerate by operating the accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the set speed resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the preceding vehicle.

■ When the vehicle stops while follow-up cruising

- Pushing the lever up while the vehicle ahead stops will resume follow-up cruising if the vehicle ahead starts off within approximately 3 seconds after the lever is pushed up.

- If the vehicle ahead starts off within 3 seconds after your vehicle stops, follow-up cruising will be resumed.

■ Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations.

• VSC is activated.

● TRAC is activated for a period of time.

• When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off.
  ● The sensor cannot detect correctly because it is covered in some way.
• When the brake control or output restriction control of a driving support system operates. (For example: Pre-Collision System, Drive-Start Control)
  ● The parking brake is operated.
  ● The vehicle is stopped by system control on a steep incline.
  ● The following are detected when the vehicle has been stopped by system control:
  • The driver is not wearing a seat belt.
  • The driver's door is opened.
  • The vehicle has been stopped for about 3 minutes.

If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled for any reasons other than the above, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Automatic cancelation of constant speed control mode

Constant speed control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations:

● Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set vehicle speed.
● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of time.
- When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off.
- When the brake control or output restriction control of a driving support system operates. (For example: Pre-Collision System, Drive-Start Control)
● The parking brake is operated.

If constant speed control mode is automatically canceled for any reasons other than the above, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Situations in which the curve speed reduction function may not operate

In situations such as the following, the curve speed reduction function may not operate:

- When the vehicle is being driven around a gentle curve

- When the accelerator pedal is being depressed

- When the vehicle is being driven around an extremely short curve

■ The Dynamic Radar Cruise Control with Road Sign Assist may not operate properly when

As the Dynamic Radar Cruise Control with Road Sign Assist may not operate properly in conditions in which RSA may not operate or detect correctly ( P.180), when using this function, make sure to check the speed limit sign displayed.

In the following situations, the set speed may not be changed to the recognized speed limit by pushing the lever up or down.

• If speed limit information is not available
• When the recognized speed limit is the same as the set speed
• When the recognized speed limit is outside of the speed range that the dynamic radar cruise control system can operate

Brake operation

A brake operation sound may be heard and the brake pedal response may change, but these are not malfunctions.

■ Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions. (→P.158, 323)

■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead

In the case of the following and depending on the conditions, operate the brake pedal when deceleration of the system is insufficient or operate the accelerator pedal

when acceleration is required.

As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the approach warning ( P.187) may not be activated.

● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving in the same lane
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board, etc.)

Diagram showing a truck and two cars on a road, with no visible text or symbols

● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
- When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the detecting of the sensor
- When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the luggage compartment, etc.)

Two cars on a road with a curved arrow indicating motion or collision (no text or symbols)

● Preceding vehicle has an extremely high ground clearance

Illustration of a truck and a car on a road, no text or symbols present

■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not function correctly

In the case of the following conditions, operate the brake pedal (or accelerator pedal, depending on the situation) as necessary.

As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, the system may not operate properly.

- When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow

Diagram showing three curved road scenarios with cars on each, indicating navigation or traffic flow (no text or symbols)

- When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable

Top-down view of a multi-lane road scenario with cars on both sides, showing lane markings and motion paths (no text or symbols)

• When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly
• When driving on a road surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on a bridge
  ● While the vehicle speed is decreasing to the set speed after the vehicle accelerates by depressing the accelerator pedal
  ■ Situations in which the curve speed reduction function may not operate properly

In situations such as the following, the curve speed reduction function may not operate properly:

• When the vehicle is being driven around a curve on an incline/decline
• When the course of the vehicle differs

from the shape of the curve

• When the vehicle speed is excessively high when entering a curve
• When the steering wheel is suddenly operated

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)

The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that uses rear side radar sensors installed on the inner side of the rear bumper on the left and right side to assist the driver in confirming safety when changing lanes.

Summary of the Blind Spot Monitor

The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that has 2 functions:

● The BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) function Assists the driver in making a decision when changing lanes
● The RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) function Assists the driver when backing up These functions use same sensors.

A BSM main switch

This switch is for both the BSM function and RCTA function.

Pressing the switch turns the system on or off. When the switch is turned on, the indicator on the switch illuminates.

B Outside rear view mirror indicators BSM function:

When a vehicle is detected in a blind spot of the outside rear view mirrors or approaching rapidly from behind into a blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator on the detected side will illuminate. If the turn signal lever is operated toward the detected side, the outside rear view mirror indicator will flash.

RCTA function:

When a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, both outside rear view mirror indicators will flash.

Center Display

If a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, the RCTA icon ( P.197) for the detected side will be displayed on the Center Display.

This illustration shows an example of a vehicle approaching from both sides of the vehicle.

D RCTA buzzer (RCTA function only)

If a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, a buzzer will sound. The buzzer also sounds for approximately 1 second immediately after the BSM main switch is operated to turn the system on.

■ Outside rear view mirror indicator visibility

In strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to see.

■ Hearing the RCTA buzzer

The RCTA buzzer may be difficult to hear over loud noises, such as if the audio system volume is high.

- When "Blind Spot Monitor Unavailable" is shown on the multi-information display

Ice, snow, mud, etc., may be attached to the rear bumper around the sensors. ( P.193) The system should return to normal operation after removing the ice, snow, mud, etc. from the rear bumper. Additionally, the sensors may not operate normally when driving in extremely hot or cold environments.

■ When there is a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor

If a system malfunction is detected due to any of the following, a warning message will be displayed: (→P.323)

● A sensor is malfunctioning
● A sensor is dirty or covered with snow or a sticker
● The outside temperature is extremely high or low
● Sensor voltage is abnormal
● A sensor is misaligned

WARNING

■ Handling the radar sensor

Blind Spot Monitor sensors are installed behind the left and right sides of the rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot Monitor can function correctly.

WARNING

- Keep the sensors and the surrounding areas on the rear bumper clean at all times.

If a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper is dirty or covered with snow, the Blind Spot Monitor may not operate and a warning message ( P.323) will be displayed. In this situation, clear off the dirt or snow and drive the vehicle with the operation conditions of the BSM function ( P.196) satisfied for approximately 10 minutes. If the warning message does not disappear, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Side profile illustration of a car's rear bumper and side-mounted sensors (no text or symbols)

- Do not subject a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper to a strong impact.

If a sensor is moved even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and vehicles may not be detected correctly.

In the following situations, have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

• A sensor or its surrounding area is subject to a strong impact.

- If the surrounding area of a sensor is scratched or dented, or part of them has become disconnected.

- Do not disassemble the sensor.

- Do not attach stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on the rear bumper.

- Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the rear bumper.

- Do not paint the rear bumper any color other than an official Lexus color.

■ Cautions regarding the use of the function

The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.

The BSM function is a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a vehicle is in a blind spot of the outside rear view mirrors or is approaching rapidly from behind into a blind spot. Do not overly rely on the BSM function. As the function cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, over reliance could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

As the system may not function correctly under certain conditions, the driver's own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

The RCTA function is only a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a vehicle is approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle. As the RCTA function may not function correctly under certain conditions, the driver's own visual confirmation of safety is necessary. Over reliance on this function may lead to an accident resulting death or serious injury.

BSM function

The BSM function uses radar sensors to detect the following vehicles traveling in adjacent lanes and advises the driver of the presence of such vehicles via the indicators on the outside rear view mirrors.

A Vehicles that are traveling in areas that are not visible using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)

B Vehicles that are approaching rapidly from behind in areas that are not visible using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)

BSM function detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

The range of each detection area is:

A Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from either side of the vehicle ^*1
B Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper
C Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper
D Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) to 197 ft. (60 m) from the rear bumper ^2

*1: The area between the side of the vehicle and 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of the vehicle cannot be detected.

*2: The greater the difference in speed between your vehicle and the detected vehicle is,

the farther away the vehicle will be detected, causing the outside rear view mirror indicator to illuminate or flash.

■ The BSM function is operational when

The BSM function is operational when all of the following conditions are met:

●The BSM main switch is on.

● The shift lever is in a position other than R.

● The vehicle speed is greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).

■ The BSM function will detect a vehicle when

The BSM function will detect a vehicle present in the detection area in the following situations:

● A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle.

- You overtake a vehicle in an adjacent lane slowly.

● Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.

■ Conditions under which the BSM function will not detect a vehicle

The BSM function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects:

- Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.*

● Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction

- Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects *

- Following vehicles that are in the same lane*

● Vehicles traveling 2 lanes away from your vehicle *

- Vehicles which are being overtaken rapidly by your vehicle *

*: Depending on the conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

■ Conditions under which the BSM function may not function correctly

● The BSM function may not detect vehi-

cles correctly in the following situations:

- When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area

- When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is covering the sensor or surrounding area on the rear bumper

- When driving on a road surface that is wet with standing water during bad weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog

- When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle

- When the distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle is short

- When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area

- When the difference in speed between your vehicle and another vehicle is changing

- When a vehicle enters a detection area traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle

- As your vehicle starts from a stop, a vehicle remains in the detection area

- When driving up and down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the road, etc.

- When driving on roads with sharp bends, consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces

- When vehicle lanes are wide, or when driving on the edge of a lane, and the vehicle in an adjacent lane is far away from your vehicle

- When a bicycle carrier or other accessory is installed to the rear of the vehicle

- When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area

- Immediately after the BSM main switch is turned on

- Instances of the BSM function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase in the following situations:

- When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area

- When the distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc. that enters the detection area is short

• When driving up and down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the road, etc.

• When vehicle lanes are narrow, or when driving on the edge of a lane, and a vehicle traveling in a lane other than the adjacent lanes enters the detection area

• When driving on roads with sharp bends, consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces

• When the tires are slipping or spinning
• When the distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle is short
• When a bicycle carrier or other accessory is installed to the rear of the vehicle

RCTA function

Operation of the RCTA function

The RCTA function uses radar sensors to detect vehicles approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle and alerts the driver of the presence of such vehicles by flashing the outside rear view mirror indicators and sounding a buzzer.

graph TD
    A["Car A"] -->|→| B1["B"]
    B1 -->|→| A2["A"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style A2 fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

A Approaching vehicles

B Detection areas of approaching vehicles

■ RCTA icon display

When a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, the following will be displayed on the Center Display.

vehicle.

The RCTA function is malfunctioning ( P.193)

Simple cartoon-style face with arrow-like symbols on a gray background (no text or symbols)

This illustration shows an example of a vehicle approaching from both sides of the

RCTA function detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

The buzzer can alert the driver of faster vehicles approaching from farther away. Example:

Approaching vehicle Speed		A Approximate alert distance
Fast 34 mph (56 km/h)	100 ft. (30 m)
Slow 5 mph (8 km/h)	13 ft. (4 m)

■ The RCTA function is operational when

The RCTA function operates when all of the following conditions are met:

●The BSM main switch is on.

● The shift lever is in R.

● The vehicle speed is less than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).

● The approaching vehicle speed is between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and 34 mph (56 km/h).

■ Conditions under which the RCTA function will not detect a vehicle

The RCTA function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects:

● Vehicles approaching from directly behind

● Vehicles backing up in a parking space next to your vehicle

● Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect due to obstructions

• Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
• Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.*
  ● Vehicles moving away from your vehicle
• Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle *

* : Depending on the conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

■ Conditions under which the RCTA function may not function correctly

● The RCTA function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following situations:
- When the sensor is misaligned due to a

strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area

- When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is covering the sensor or surrounding area on the rear bumper

- When driving on a road surface that is wet with standing water during bad weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog

- When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle

- When a vehicle is approaching at high speed

- When backing up on a slope with a sharp change in grade

- When backing out of a shallow angle parking spot

Top-down diagram of two cars on a road with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

- Immediately after the BSM main switch is turned on

- Immediately after the engine is started with the BSM main switch on

- When the sensors cannot detect a vehicle due to obstructions

- Instances of the RCTA function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase in the following situations:

- When a vehicle passes by the side of your vehicle

- When the parking space faces a street and vehicles are being driven on the street

- When the distance between your vehicle and metal objects, such as a guardrail, wall, sign, or parked vehicle, which may reflect electrical waves toward the rear of the vehicle, is short

Intuitive parking assist\*

*: If equipped

The distance from your vehicle to nearby obstacles when parallel parking or maneuvering into a garage is measured by the sensors and communicated via the multi-information display, Center Display and a buzzer. Always check the surrounding area when using this system.

Types of sensors

A Front corner sensors
B Rear corner sensors
C Rear center sensors

Intuitive parking assist switch

Turns the intuitive parking assist on/off When on, the indicator light comes on to inform the driver that the system is opera- tional.

Display

When the sensors detect an obstacle, a graphic is shown on the multi-information display and Center Display depending on the position and distance to the obstacle.

■ Multi-information display

A Front corner sensor detection
B Rear corner sensor detection
C Rear center sensor detection

■ Center Display

A graphic is shown when the Lexus parking assist monitor is displayed (insert display).

A simplified image is displayed on the

Center Display when an object is detected.

Simple diagram showing a car with an arrow pointing to it, above a gray horizontal bar (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■ When using the intuitive parking assist

Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.

• Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
  The sensor's detection areas and reaction times are limited. When moving forward or reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially the sides of the vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to control the vehicle's speed.
• Do not install accessories within the sensor's detection areas.
  ● The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.

Thin posts or objects lower than a sensor may not be detected when approached, even if they have been detected once.

■ When to disable the function

In the following situations, disable the function as it may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision.

● The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole, wireless antenna or fog lights.

● The front or rear bumper or a sensor receives a strong impact.
- A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered suspension, etc.) is installed.
● Towing eyelets are installed.
● A backlit license plate is installed.
■ When using intuitive parking assist

In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a sensor malfunction, etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.

● The intuitive parking assist operation display flashes or shows continuously, and a buzzer sounds when no objects are detected.
- If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to strong impact.
- If the bumper or grille collides with something.
- If the display flashes or is displayed continuously and a buzzer does not sound, except when the mute function has been turned on.
- If a display error occurs, first check the sensor. If the error occurs even when there is no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is likely that the sensor is malfunctioning.

■ Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.

Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.

- When using a high pressure washer to wash the vehicle, do not spray the sensors directly, as doing so may cause a sensor to malfunction.

WARNING

- When using steam to clean the vehicle, do not direct steam too close to the sensors as doing so may cause a sensor to malfunction.

■ The intuitive parking assist can be operated when
- Front corner sensors:

• The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
  • The shift lever is in a position other than P.
  • The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h). (At any speed when the shift lever is in R)

● Rear corner and rear center sensors:
- The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
• The shift lever is in R.
■ Muting the buzzer sound
● To mute the buzzer sound:

The buzzer can be temporarily muted by pressing "OK" of the meter control switches while an obstacle detection display is shown on the multi-information display.

To cancel the mute:

Mute will be automatically canceled in the following situations.

• When the shift lever is changed (except shifting from D to N, or N to D).
• When the vehicle speed has reached or exceeded 6 mph (10 km/h) with the shift lever in D.
• When the intuitive parking assist is turned off once and turned on again.
• When the engine switch is turned off once and turned to IGNITION ON mode again.

If "Clean Parking Assist Sensor" is displayed on the multi-information display

A sensor may be covered with ice, snow, dirt, etc. Remove the ice, snow, dirt, etc., from the sensor to return the system to normal.

Also, due to ice forming on a sensor at low temperatures, a warning message may be displayed or the sensor may not be able to detect an object. Once the ice melts, the system will return to normal.

■ Sensor detection information

● The following situations may occur during use.
• The sensors may be able to only detect objects near the front and rear bumpers.
- Depending on the shape of the object and other factors, the detection distance may shorten, or detection may be impossible.
- There will be a short delay between object detection and display. Even at low speeds, there is a possibility that the object will come within the sensor's detection areas before the display is shown and the warning beep sounds.
- It might be difficult to hear the buzzer due to the volume of the audio system or air flow noise of the air conditioning system.
- It may be difficult to hear the buzzer if buzzers for other systems are sounding.

■ Conditions under which the function may not function correctly

Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of a sensor to correctly detect objects. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below.

There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor. (Cleaning the sensors will resolve this problem.)
- A sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.) In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the sensor display may be displayed abnormally, or objects, such as a wall, may not be detected.
● A sensor is covered in any way.
- When a sensor or the area around a sensor is extremely hot or cold.
● On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
● The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.
There is another vehicle equipped with

parking assist sensors in the vicinity.

● A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
- If a sensor is hit by a large amount of water, such as when driving on a flooded road.
- If the vehicle is significantly tilted.
● The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.
- If objects draw too close to the sensor.
■ Objects which may not be properly detected

The shape of the object may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particular attention to the following objects:

● Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
- Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves
● Sharply-angled objects
Low objects
● Tall objects with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle

People may not be detected if they are wearing certain types of clothing.

Customization

Settings can be changed. ( P.381)

Sensor detection display, obstacle distance

■ Multi-information display and Center Display

Sensors that detect an obstacle will illuminate continuously or blink.

- Approximate distance to object: 4.9 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm) (Rear center sensor)

Multi-information display Insert display (Center Display)

(continuous) (blinking slowly)

- Approximate distance to object: 2.3 ft. (70 cm) to 1.6 ft. (50 cm) (Front corner sensor)

Approximate distance to object: 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm) (Rear corner sensor, Rear center sensor)

Multi-information display Insert display (Center Display)

(continuous) (blinking)

- Approximate distance to object: 1.6 ft. (50 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm) (Front corner sensor)

Approximate distance to object: 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm) (Rear corner sensor)

Approximate distance to object: 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.1 ft. (35 cm) (Rear center sensor)

Multi-information display Insert display (Center Display)
(continuous) (blinking rapidly)

● Approximate distance to object: Less than 1.0 ft. (30 cm) (Corner sensor) Approximate distance to object: Less than 1.1 ft. (35 cm) (Rear center sensor)

Multi-information display Insert display (Center Display)
(blinking) (continuous)

■ Buzzer operation and distance to an obstacle

A buzzer sounds when the sensors are operating.

- The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle. When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the obstacle, the buzzer sounds continuously:

• Corner sensors: Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm)

- Rear center sensors: Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm)

- When 2 or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the buzzer system responds to the nearest obstacle. If one or both come within the above distances, the beep will repeat a long tone, followed by fast

Detection range of the sensors

A Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)

B Approximately 2.3 ft. (70 cm)

C Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)

The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot detect obstacles that are extremely close to the vehicle.

The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object, etc.

Setting up intuitive parking assist

You can change the warning beep volume and Center Display operating conditions.

1 Press the "MENU" button on the Remote Touch. (→P.218)
2 Select "Setup" on the "Menu" screen.
3 Select "Vehicle" on the "Setup" screen.
4 Select "LEXUS Park Assist" on the vehicle settings screen.
5 Select the desired button.

A The alert volume can be adjusted.
B Rear center sensor display and tone indication can be set.

Driving mode select switch

The driving modes can be selected to suit driving condition.

Selecting a drive mode

1 Normal mode/Custom mode

Normal mode and custom mode are selected by pressing the driving mode select switch. Each time the switch is pressed, the driving mode changes between normal mode and custom mode. When custom mode is selected, the "CUS-TOM" indicator will be illuminated.

When Eco drive mode or sport mode is selected, pressing the switch changes the driving mode to normal mode.

- Normal mode

Provides an optimal balance of fuel economy, quietness, and dynamic performance. Suitable for city driving.

- Custom mode

Allows you to drive with the following functions set to your preferred settings.

Custom mode settings can only be changed on the drive mode customization display of the Center Display. (→P.220)

Function Setting
Powertrain	Normal
	Power
	Eco
Chassis	Normal
	Sport
Air conditioning sys-tem	Normal
	Eco

2 Eco drive mode

Helps the driver accelerate in an eco-friendly manner and improve fuel economy through moderate throttle characteristics and by controlling the operation of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling).

When not in Eco drive mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned to the left, the Eco drive mode indicator will come on.

3 Sport mode

- SPORTS mode

Controls the transmission and engine to provide quick, powerful acceleration. Also, gear shift timing is controlled to suit sporty driving, making this mode is suitable for when agile driving response is desired, such as when driving on roads with many curves.

When not in SPORT S mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned to the right, the "SPORT S" indicator will come on.

- SPORTS + mode

Provides earlier downshift timing than SPORT S mode in order to maintain a high engine speed and provides faster gear changes. This mode also changes the steering feel, suspension control and VDIM control, making it suitable for powerful sporty driving.

When in SPORT S mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned to the right, the "SPORT S+" indicator will come on.

Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency ( P.223). To improve air conditioning performance, adjust the fan speed or turn off Eco drive mode.

■ Automatic deactivation of sport mode and custom mode

If the engine switch is turned off after driving in sport mode or custom mode, the drive mode will be changed to normal mode.

- Driving mode pop-up display (vehicles with a 10.3-inch display)

When the driving mode is changed, the selected driving mode will be temporarily displayed on the side display. ( P.220)

Launch control

By controlling the engine torque, this function restrains tire slippage, providing optimal acceleration when starting off. (Do not use this function on public roads.)

Operating instruction

■ Operating launch control

1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Firmly and fully depress the brake pedal with your left foot.

Continue depressing the brake pedal.

3 Shift the shift lever to D.

4 Select SPORT S+ mode.

5 Press the switch.

The "EXPERT" indicator will come on together with the "TRAC OFF" and VSC OFF indicators.

6 Press the "LAUNCH" switch.

The "LAUNCH" indicator will illuminate.

7 Firmly and fully depress the accelerator pedal.

The control standby state will be entered and the engine speed will be automatically maintained between 1500-2000 rpm.

If the "LAUNCH" indicator turns off, release the accelerator pedal and perform this procedure again from 6.

8 Within 3 seconds of depressing the accelerator pedal, release the brake pedal to start off.

The "LAUNCH" indicator will turn off 3 seconds after the accelerator pedal is depressed.

If the brake pedal is not released before the "LAUNCH" indicator turns off, release the accelerator pedal and perform this procedure again from 6.

After starting off, when the accelerator pedal is released, launch control will stop operating.

■ Canceling launch control

Perform any of the following:

• Shift the shift lever to any position other than D.
• Operate the drive mode switch to select any mode other than SPORT S+ mode.

- Press the switch.

- Press the "LAUNCH" switch.

Operation condition

When all of the following conditions are met, launch control can be enabled:

● The engine and transmission are sufficiently warmed up.
● The engine, transmission, driving support systems, etc. are not malfunctioning.

■ Launch control will not operate properly when

In the following situations, launch control may not operate properly:

- When the brake pedal is not firmly depressed and the rear wheels slip.

• When starting off on a road surface that is wet with rain, standing water, etc.
• When starting off on a slick road surface.
• When the vehicle has not been properly maintained (tires are worn out, tire pressure is low, etc.).

WARNING

■ Launch control precautions

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

• Do not use on public roads.
• Use only when road and ambient conditions are safe.
  Before use, ensure that no people or obstructions are nearby.
  ● Proper use of launch control requires an expert level of driving skill. When using launch control, always check the track conditions and surrounding area.
• Do not start off with the rear wheels spinning.

NOTICE

■ To avoid damage to the vehicle when using launch control

As launch control applies a large load on vehicle components, do not use it excessively.
● Always follow the correct operation procedures as described in this manual.
- Only use launch control on dry, paved roads, as slippery or loose road surfaces may cause damage to the vehicle.
- When using launch control repeatedly, wait approximately 10 minutes between each use.

Active rear wing

*: If equipped

The RC F is equipped with an active rear wing that operates automatically while the vehicle is being driven. This active rear wing enhances aerodynamic performance, especially at high speeds, contributing to a more stable ride. The active rear wing can be controlled using a switch.

System components

A Multi-information display ( P.75)

Displays the status of the active rear wing

B Active rear wing switch

Operates the active rear wing manually

C Indicator

Illuminates when the active rear wing is raised and turns off when it is retracted

Operating conditions

● The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

● The trunk is closed.
● The active rear wing has been activated in a customized setting.
■ Conditions which stop the operation

In the following situations operation of the active rear wing will stop:

● The engine switch is turned off while the active rear wing is operating.
● The trunk is opened while the active rear wing is operating.
● The raising operation of the active rear wing is interrupted by an object, etc.
● The active rear wing is operated in an unusual manner causing it to stop at an irregular position.

In such cases, pressing the active rear wing switch will fully raise the active rear wing.

Or, begin driving the vehicle and the active rear wing will raise automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 16 mph (25 km/h).

■ When there is a malfunction in the system

A warning message will be displayed on the multi-information display. ( P.324)

Customization

Some functions can be customized. (→P.374)

NOTICE

■ To prevent system damage

• Do not apply pressure to the active rear wing when pushing or pulling the vehicle.
• Do not lean on the active rear wing.
• Do not attach any accessories or other objects to the active rear wing.
• Do not modify or disassemble the active rear wing.
• Do not subject the active rear wing to severe impact.

Automatic operation

The active rear wing will operate automatically at the following speeds according to the selected driving mode ( P.205). (Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.)

- When other than Eco drive mode is selected

Up: Approximately 50 mph (80 km/h)

Down: Approximately 25 mph (40 km/h)

- When Eco drive mode is selected

Up: Approximately 80 mph (130 km/h)

Down: Approximately 25 mph (40 km/h)

Manual operation

Operate the active rear wing switch to raise/retract the active rear wing manually. (The active rear wing retracts when it is raised and raises when retracted.)

Operation by switch

Vehicle speed Up	/Down
0 mph (0 km/h)(vehicle stopped)	Press/Press and hold*
Approximately 0 -12 mph (0 - 20km/h)	Operation not possible
Approximately 12 -80 mph (20 - 130km/h)	Press/Press
Approximately 80mph (130 km/h) or more	Operation not possible

* : Press and hold the switch until the indi-

cator turns off. If the switch is released while the active rear wing is moving, it will return to the raised position automatically.

■ Manual operation

Even if the active rear wing is changed to manual operation using the active rear wing switch, the setting will not be maintained. Automatic operation will resume if the engine switch is turned off or at certain vehicle speeds.

WARNING

■ When manually operating the active rear wing

Observe the following precautions before operating the active rear wing. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

- Ensure that the surrounding area is free of any objects that may come into contact with or get caught on the active rear wing.

- If there are people near the active rear wing, make sure that there is no possibility of their clothing, personal belongings or body parts getting caught. Children especially should be warned not to touch the active rear wing while it is being operated.

Illustration of a hand pressing down on a car's side panel with a no-smoking symbol (no text or labels)

- If there is a risk that an object may become caught on the active rear wing during operation, stop operation immediately.

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not operate the active rear wing repeatedly while the engine is turned off.

Driving assist systems

To keep enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

Summary of the driving assist systems

■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface

Brake assist

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation

■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces

■ Enhanced VSC (Enhanced Vehicle Stability Control)

Provides cooperative control of the ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS.

Helps to maintain directional stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling steering performance.

■ TRAC (Traction Control)

Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads

■ Hill-start assist control

Helps to reduce the backward movement of the vehicle when starting on an uphill

■ EPS (Electric Power Steering)

Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel

■ Adaptive Variable Suspension System

By independently controlling the damping force of the shock absorbers for each of the 4 wheels according to the road and driving conditions, this system combines riding comfort with superior vehicle stability, and helps good vehicle posture.

■ VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management)

Provides integrated control of the ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC, hill-start assist control and EPS systems Helps to maintain vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling the brakes, engine output and steering assist.

■ When the TRAC/VSC systems are operating

The slip indicator light will flash while the TRAC/VSC systems are operating.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and gear shift (no text or symbols visible)

■ Disabling the TRAC system

If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRAC system may reduce power from

the engine to the wheels. Pressing the switch to turn the system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.

To turn the TRAC system off, quickly press and release the switch.

The "TRAC OFF" indicator light will come on.

Press the switch again to turn the system back on.

■ Turning off both TRAC and VSC systems

To turn the TRAC and VSC systems off, press and hold the switch for more than 3 seconds.

The "TRAC OFF" indicator light and the VSC OFF indicator light will come on. *

Press the switch again to turn the systems back on.

* : Emergency steering assist will also be disabled. The PCS warning light will come on. (→P.170)

Expert mode

When expert mode is selected, it is possible to drive in a more sporty manner than other drive modes. Expert mode disables the TRAC and VSC systems but the engine and brakes may be controlled depending on the vehicle behavior.

To select expert mode, press the switch when in SPORT S+ mode.

The "EXPERT" indicator will come on together with the TRAC OFF and VSC OFF indicators.

To cancel expert mode, press the switch or use the driving mode select switch to select a driving mode other than SPORT S+ mode.

■ When the "TRAC OFF" indicator light

comes on even if the been pressed

tch has not

TRAC is temporary deactivated. If the indicator light continues to remain on, contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Operating conditions of hill-start assist control

When the following four conditions are met, the hill-start assist control will operate:

● The shift lever is in a position other than P or N (when starting off forward/backward on an upward incline).

● The vehicle is stopped.

● The accelerator pedal is not depressed.

● The parking brake is not engaged.

■ Automatic system cancelation of hill-start assist control

The hill-start assist control will turn off in any of the following situations:

● The shift lever is moved to P or N.

● The accelerator pedal is depressed.

● The parking brake is engaged.

- Approximately 2 seconds elapse after the brake pedal is released.

■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRAC and hill-start assist control systems

● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly, when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.

● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.

- The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.

- The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

EPS operation sound

When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■ Reactivation of the TRAC/VSC systems

Even after the TRAC/VSC systems have been turned off, turning the engine off and then on again will automatically reactivate the TRAC/VSC systems.

■ Reactivation of the TRAC system linked to vehicle speed

When only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when vehicle speed increases. However, when both TRAC/VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on even when vehicle speed increases.

■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system

The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes.

WARNING

■ The ABS does not operate effectively when

● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).

● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.

■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle's stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following situations:

- When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads

- When driving over bumps in the road

WARNING

• When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces
  ■ TRAC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating. Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

■ Hill-start assist control does not operate effectively when

• Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.
  ● Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may lead to an accident.

■ When the TRAC/VSC is activated

The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.
■ When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.

■ Expert mode precautions
- Do not use on public roads.
- Use only when the road conditions and safety of the surrounding area can be ensured.

● Proper use of expert mode requires a professional level of driving skill. When using expert mode, always check the road conditions and surrounding area and drive more carefully than usual.
■ Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level.

The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle.

Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.

■ Handling of tires and the suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.

Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.

Preparation for winter

• Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
  ● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.
  ● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires.

Ensure that all tires are the specified size and the same brand.

WARNING

- Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.

• Use tires of the specified size.
• Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
• Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used.
• Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.

NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing snow tires

Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire retailers.

This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.

Before driving the vehicle

Perform the following according to the driving conditions:

• Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
• To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.
• Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on the exterior lights, outside rear view mirrors, windows, vehicle's roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes.
• Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the vehicle.

When driving the vehicle

Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced

speed suitable to road conditions.

When parking the vehicle

- Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, make sure to block the wheels. Failure to do so may be dangerous because it may cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly, possibly leading to an accident.

When the parking brake is in automatic mode, release the parking brake after shifting the shift lever to P. ( P.137)

- If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, confirm that the shift lever cannot be moved out of P^* .

*: The shift lever will be locked if it is attempted to be shifted from P to any other position without depressing the brake pedal. If the shift lever can be shifted from P, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Selecting tire chains

Tire chains cannot be mounted.

Snow tires should be used instead.

5

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

Remote Touch......218

Center Display......220

5-2. Using the air conditioning system

Automatic air conditioning system 223

Heated steering wheel/seat heaters/seat ventilators....231

5-3. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list......233

5-4. Using the storage features

List of storage features......235

Trunk features.....237

5-5. Using the other interior features

Other interior features .....238

Garage door opener......241

Compass......246

Remote Touch

The Remote Touch can be used to operate the Center Display.

For details on the Remote Touch, refer to "NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

Remote Touch operation

Switches

▶ Vehicles with a 10.3-inch display

A "MAP" button

Press this button to display the vehicle's current position.

B "MENU" button

Press this button to display the menu screen.

C Back button

Press this button to display the previous screen.

D Touchpad

Slide your finger on the touchpad and move the pointer to select a function, letter and screen button.

Press the touchpad to enter the selected function, letter or screen button. Certain finger movements on the touchpad can perform functions, such as changing map scalings and scrolling list screens.

E Sub function button

When is displayed on the screen, a function screen assigned to the screen can be displayed.

▶ Vehicles with a 8-inch display

A "HOME" button

Press this button to display the "Home" screen.

B "MENU" button

Press this button to display the menu screen.

C Back button

Press this button to display the previous screen.

D Touchpad

Slide your finger on the touchpad and move the pointer to select a function, letter and screen button.

Press the touchpad to enter the selected function, letter or screen button. Certain

finger movements on the touchpad can perform functions, such as scrolling list screens.

E Sub function button

When is displayed on the screen, a function screen assigned to the screen can be displayed.

■ Using the touchpad

1 Select: Touch the touchpad to select the desired button on the screen.

2 Enter: Buttons on the screen can be selected by either depressing or double tapping the touchpad. Once a button has been selected, the screen will change.

■ Touch operation

Operations are performed by touching the touchpad with your finger.

- Trace

Trace the pad surface while maintaining contact with the touchpad. Moving the cursor and the pointer.

- Double tap

Tap the touchpad twice, quickly. Select the button on the screen.

- Flick

Quick and short movement along the touchpad with you finger. Move the list screen.

- Pinch in/Pinch out

Slide fingers toward each other or apart on the touchpad. Change the scale of the map.

Diagram showing hand positioning of a smartphone with two pink arrows indicating movement direction (no text or symbols present)

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the Remote Touch

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage to the Remote Touch.

• Do not allow food, liquid, stickers or lit cigarettes to contact the Remote Touch.
• Do not subject the Remote Touch to excessive pressure or strong impact.
• Do not push the touchpad with a strong force or use a sharp pointed object to operate the pad.

Center Display

Center Display overview

■ Menu screen

Press the "MENU" button on the Remote Touch to display the menu screen.

This system can also be operated by the touch screen.

The displays shown in the illustrations are used for example only and may differ from the actual vehicle.

▶ Vehicles with a 10.3-inch display

▶ Vehicles with a 8-inch display

Switch Function
	Select to display the "Destination" screen.*1
	Select to display the media control screen.*1
	Select to display the hands-free control screen.*1
	Select to display the "Apps" screen.*1,2
	When an Apple CarPlay/Android Auto connection is established and this button displays "Apple CarPlay"/"Android Auto", select to display the Apple CarPlay/Android Auto screen.*1,2
	Select to display the information screen.*1(→P.84)

Switch Function
	Select to display the setup screen. *1
	Select to display the air conditioning control screen.(→P.224)
	Select to adjust the contrast and brightness of the screens, turn the screen off, etc. *1, 2

*1: Refer to the "NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".
*2: This function is not available on some models.

Split-screen display (Vehicles with a 10.3-inch display)

Different information can be displayed on the left and right sides of the screen. For example, air conditioning system screen can be displayed and operated while the fuel consumption information screen is being displayed. The large screen on the left of the display is called the main display, and the small screen to the right is called the side display.

■ Main display (Vehicles with a 10.3-inch display)

For details about the functions and operation of the main display, refer to the respective section and "NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

■ Side display (Vehicles with a 10.3-inch display)

The following functions can be displayed and operated on the side display.

Select or to display the desired screen.

A Navigation system*
B Audio*
C Vehicle information ( P.85)

D Air conditioning system ( P.226)
E Show/hide the side display*

*: Refer to the "NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

■ Screen display during low temperatures

When the ambient temperature is extremely low, screen response may be delayed even if the Remote Touch is operated.

Automatic air conditioning system

Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

Press the "MENU" button on the Remote Touch, then select "Climate" to display the air conditioning control screen. (→P.220)

The air conditioning system can be displayed and operated on the side display.

Air conditioning controls

A Left-hand side temperature control switch
B Automatic mode switch
c Off switch
D Fan speed down switch
E Fan speed up switch
F Air flow mode switch
G Right-hand side temperature control switch
H DUAL mode switch
I A/C switch
J Outside/recirculated air mode switch
K Rear window defogger and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch
L Windshield defogger switch

■ Adjusting the temperature setting

To adjust the temperature setting, touch and slide your finger up or down on the sensor.

The temperature setting can also be adjusted by touching on the sensor.

When the temperature setting is changed, a buzzer sounds.

If ("A/C") is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air or heated air.

■ Fan speed setting

Press to increase the fan speed.

Press to decrease the fan speed.

■ Change the airflow mode

To change the airflow, press .

The air outlets used are switched each time the button is pressed.

1 Air flows to the upper body.

2 Air flows to the upper body and feet.

3 Air flows to the feet.

4 Air flows to the feet and the wind-shield defogger operates.

■ Other functions

- Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes (→P.226)

- Defogging the windshield (→P.227)

- Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors (→P.227)

Air conditioning control screen

A Display the air conditioning control

screen

B Display the option control screen ( P.225)
C Adjust the left-hand side temperature setting
D Adjust the fan speed setting
E Select the air flow mode
F Adjust the right-hand side temperature setting
G Function on/off indicators

When the function is on, the indicator illuminates on the control screen.

H Display the sub function menu ( P.225)

Using the Remote Touch, select the button on the screen and activate it by pressing on or double tapping the Remote Touch Pad.

■ Option control screen

Select the air conditioning control screen to display the option control screen. The functions can be switched on and off.

A Adjusting the temperature for driver and passenger seats separately ("DUAL" mode) (→P.226)
B Select to set eco mode on/off (→P.228)
C Set cooling and dehumidification

function on/off

If the "A/C" indicator is turned off, the system will blow ambient temperature air or heated air.

D Removing pollen from the air (Micro dust and pollen filter) (→P.227)

Sub function menu

When the sub function button on the Remote Touch is pressed, the following functions can be switched on and off.

A Set automatic mode on/off (→P.226)
B Turn the fan off
C Set cooling and dehumidification function on/off

If the "A/C" indicator is turned off, the system will blow ambient temperature air or heated air.

D Adjust the temperature for driver and passenger seats separately ("DUAL" mode) (→P.226)
E Select to set eco mode on/off (→P.228)

■ Side display (vehicles with a 10.3-inch display)

A Adjust the left-hand side temperature setting
B Adjust the fan speed setting
C Adjust the right-hand side temperature setting
D Set cooling and dehumidification function on/off

If the "A/C" indicator is turned off, the system will blow ambient temperature air or heated air.

E Adjust the temperature for the driver's and front passenger's seats separately ("DUAL" mode) (→P.226)

F Select the air flow mode

Using automatic mode

1 Press, or select "AUTO" on the air conditioning control screen.
2 Press to switch to automatic air intake mode.
The air conditioning system automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
3 Adjust the temperature setting.

4 To stop the operation, press

* OFF or select "Off" on the sub function menu.

■ Automatic mode indicator

If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that operated is maintained.
- Adjusting the temperature for driver and passenger seats separately ("DUAL" mode)

To turn on the "DUAL" mode, perform any of the following procedures:

• Press DUAL
• Select "DUAL" on the air conditioning control screen.
• Adjust the passenger's side temperature setting.

The indicator comes on when the "DUAL" mode is on.

While in "DUAL" mode, the temperature of the rear air outlets is set at the right-hand side temperature setting.

Other functions

■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press

The mode switches among (recircu-

lated air mode), automatic and (subside air mode) modes each time the button is pressed.

When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning system operates

automatically.

The indicator above the selected button comes on.

■ Micro dust and pollen filter

Pollen is removed from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body.

Select the option control screen.

When the micro dust and pollen filter is on,

is displayed on the air conditioning control screen.

In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the dehumidification function may operate.

Pollen is filtered even if the micro dust and pollen filter is turned off.

■ Defogging the windshield

Defoggers are used to defog the wind-shield and side windows.

Press FRONT

Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.)

To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up.

To return to the previous mode, press

FRONT again when the windshield is defogged.

■ Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors

Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.

Press

The defoggers will automatically turn off after a period of time.

■ Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped)

This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades.

Turns on/off.

The indicator comes on when the wind-shield wiper de-icer is on.

The windshield de-icer will automatically turn off after a period of time.

■ Registering air conditioning settings to electronic keys (vehicles with driving position memory)

- Unlocking the vehicle using an electronic key and turning the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode will recall that key's registered air conditioning settings.

- When the engine switch is turned off, the current air conditioning settings will automatically be registered to the electronic key that was used to unlock the vehicle.

The system may not operate correctly if more than one electronic key is in the vicinity or if the smart access system with push-button start is used to unlock a passenger door.

The doors that can recall the air conditioning setting* when unlocked using the smart access system with push-button start can be changed. For details, contact

your Lexus dealer.

^* : The doors that can recall the driving position memory are changed at the same time.

■ Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions.

Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after is pressed or "AUTO" is selected.

■ Using the voice command system

Air conditioning system can be operated using voice commands. For details, refer to the "NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

■ Fogging up of the windows

The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high. Turning A/C ("A/C") on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively.

- If you turn ("A/C") off, the windows may fog up more easily.

● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.

■ When driving on dusty roads

Close all windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after closing the windows, it is recommended that the air intake mode be set to outside air mode and the fan speed to any setting except off.

■ Outside/recirculated air mode

- Setting to the recirculated air mode temporarily is recommended in preventing dirty air from entering the vehicle interior and helping to cool the vehicle when the outside air temperature is high.

● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting or the inside temperature.

■ When the outside temperature exceeds 75^ F ( 24^ C) and the air conditioning system is on
- In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce fuel consumption.
- Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
- It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing

■ Automatic mode for air intake control

In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.

When the dehumidification function is off, and the fan is operating, turning automatic mode on will activate the dehumidification function.

Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel efficiency:

● Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/cooling capacity
● Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected

To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:

• Adjust the fan speed
  ● Turn off Eco drive mode
  ■ When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32^ F ( 0^ C)

The dehumidification function may not operate even when is pressed or "A/C" is selected.

■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors

- To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.

During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents.

● To reduce potential odors from occurring:

- It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off.

• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.

Air conditioning filter

→P.294

Air conditioning system refrigerant

● A label regarding the refrigerant of the air conditioning system is attached to the hood at the location shown in the following illustration.

Diagram of a car hood with an open lid showing a vehicle and a black arrow pointing upward (no text or symbols)

● The meaning of each symbol on the label are as follows:

	Caution
	Air conditioning system
	Air conditioning system lubricant type
	Requires registered technician to service air conditioning system
	Flammable refrigerant

Customization

Some functions can be customized. (→P.374)

Air outlets

■ Location of air outlets

The air outlets and air volume changes according to the selected airflow mode.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

■ Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

Front

A Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down

B Turn the knob to open or close the vent

▶ Rear

A Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down

To close the vent, move the knob to the most outside position.

WARNING

■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
- Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
- Do not place anything on the instrument panel which may cover the air outlets. Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed, preventing the windshield defoggers from defogging.

Diagram of a vehicle's steering wheel with directional arrows and a no-smoking symbol (no text or labels)

■ To prevent burns
- Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces when the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on.

- Do not touch the glass at lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front pillars when the windshield wiper de-icer is on.

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.
■ When repairing/replacing parts of the air conditioning system

Have repair/replacement performed by your Lexus dealer.

When a part of the air conditioning system, such as the evaporator, is to be replaced, it must be replaced with a new one.

Heated steering wheel ^* /seat heaters ^* /seat ventilators ^*

*: If equipped

Heated steering wheel and seat heaters heat the side grips of the steering wheel and seats, respectively. Seat ventilators maintain good ventilation using a fan built into the seat.

WARNING

■ To prevent minor burn injuries

Care should be taken if anyone in the following categories comes in contact with the steering wheel or seats when the heater is on:

● Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged
- Persons with sensitive skin
● Persons who are fatigued
● Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the seat heaters and seat ventilators

Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not use the functions when the engine is off.

Heated steering wheel

Turn the heated steering wheel on/off The indicator light Aomes on when the heated steering wheel is operating.

Operation condition

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

Timer function

The heated steering wheel will automatically turn off after about 30 minutes.

Seat heaters

▶ Vehicles without seat ventilators

Each time the switch is pressed, the intensity of the seat heater changes and the level indicator lights (amber)
A light as follows:

Hi (3 segments lit)→Mid (2 segments lit)→Lo (1 segment lit)→Off

▶ Vehicles with seat ventilators

Each time the switch is pressed, the intensity of the seat heater changes and the level indicator lights (amber)

A light as follows:

Hi (3 segments lit)→Mid (2 segments lit)→Lo (1 segment lit)→Off

Operation condition

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■ Seat heater timer control

To enable seat heater timer control, press and hold the driver and front passenger seat heater switches at the same time when the vehicle is stopped until a buzzer sounds once. If a seat heater is turned on while seat heater timer control is enabled, the intensity of the seat heater will automatically change from Hi→Mid→Lo.

The timing of the change in seat heater intensity differs depending on the temperature inside the cabin, etc. when the seat heater is operating.

To disable seat heater timer control, press and hold the driver and front passenger seat heater switches at the same time until a buzzer sounds twice.

WARNING

■ To prevent overheating and minor burn injuries

Observe the following precautions when using the seat heaters.

- Do not cover the seat with a blanket or cushion when using the seat heater.

- Do not use seat heater more than necessary.

Seat ventilators

Each time the switch is pressed, the intensity of the seat ventilator changes and the level indicator lights (green)

A light as follows:

Hi (3 segments lit)→Mid (2 segments lit)→Lo (1 segment lit)→Off

Operation condition

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

Interior lights list

Location of the interior lights

A Outer foot lights
B Personal lights ( P.234)
C Front interior light ( P.233)
D Rear interior light ( P.233)
E Door courtesy lights
F Footwell lights

Operating the interior lights

Front

Turns the light on/off (touch the light)

The rear interior light turns on/off together with the front interior light.

Illustration of a printer's front panel with a hand pointing to the cover (no text or symbols visible)

Turns the door position on/off

1 On

2 Off

Rear

Turns the light on/off

If the front interior light is off, the rear light can be turned on/off separately.

Illustration of a device with a highlighted screen and a small inset showing a red arrow pointing to a screen (no text or symbols present)

Operating the personal lights

Turns the lights on/off (touch the lights)

Illustration of a printer's door panel with a magnified inset showing the interior (no text or symbols)

■ Illuminated entry system

The lights automatically turn on/off according to engine switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are

locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are opened/closed.

■ To prevent the battery from being discharged

If the interior lights remain on when the engine switch is turned off, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.

■ When front interior light or personal lights do not respond as normal

- When water, dirt, etc., have adhered to the lens surface

- When operated with a wet hand

- When wearing gloves, etc.

Customization

Some functions can be customized. (→P.374)

NOTICE

■Removing light lenses

Never remove the lens for the front interior light and personal lights. Otherwise, the lights will be damaged.

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is off.

List of storage features

Location of the storage features

A Glove box ( P.236)
B Front cup holders ( P.236)
C Rear cup holders* (→P.236)
D Console box ( P.237)

*: If equipped

WARNING

■ Items that should not be left in the storage spaces

Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:

● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items.

● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard.

Glove box

1 Open (press the button)
2 Unlock with the mechanical key
3 Lock with the mechanical key

Glove box light

The glove box light turns on when the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

■ Trunk opener main switch

The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. (→P.98)

■ Removing the partition

The insert inside the glove box can be removed.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a highlighted section and pink arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■ Caution while driving

Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open glove box or the items stored inside.

Front cup holders

Top-down architectural sketch of a car intake canal with two circular chambers and surrounding structures (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder

Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.

Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

Rear cup holders (if equipped)

Interior view of a car dashboard showing the left side with a highlighted component and the right side with a red arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols present)

■ Removing the insert

Rear cup holder insert can be removed.

Interior view of a car intake canal with a pink arrow pointing to the outlet (no text or symbols visible)

WARNING

■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder

Do not place anything other than cups or beverage cans in the cup holders. Inappropriate items must not be stored in the cup holders even if the lid is closed. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

When not in use

Keep the cup holders closed.

In the event of sudden braking, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the items stored inside.

Console box

Push the knob.

Lift by hand to fully open the console box.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with hand positioning and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

WARNING

■ Caution while driving

Keep the console box closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Trunk features

Cargo hooks

Raise the hooks when needed.

The cargo hooks are provided for securing loose items.

Interior view of a car showing the rear compartment with a highlighted internal component (no text or symbols visible)

WARNING

■ When the cargo net is not in use

To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks on the floor to their stowed positions.

First-aid kit storage belt

1 Loosen the belt
2 Tighten the belt

Other interior features

Power outlet

Please use as a power supply for electronic goods that use less than 12 VDC/10 A (power consumption of 120 W).

Open the lid.

■ The power outlet can be used when

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

■ When turning the engine switch off

Disconnect electrical devices with charging functions, such as mobile battery packs.

If such devices are left connected, the engine switch may not be turned off nor- mally.

■ Using the power outlet

The shape of the console box rim allows power cables to be passed through when the console box lid is closed.

Diagram of a car interior showing hand positioning and colored cable routing (no text or labels)

NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the power outlet

Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.

Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.

■ To prevent the battery from being discharged

Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is off.

Armrest (if equipped)

Fold down the armrest for use.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black seatbelt and a pink arrow indicating force (no text or symbols)

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the armrest

Do not apply too much load on the arm-rest.

Trunk storage extension (if equipped)

Long objects can be loaded in the vehicle by utilizing the trunk space and rearseat area.

1 Pull down the armrest.

Illustration of a car seatbelt buckle being adjusted with a pink arrow (no text or symbols)

2 Separate the fastener and turn back the trunk door cover.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a pink arrow indicating the down-right direction (no text or symbols)

3 Open the inside trunk door from the trunk and load baggage or other items.

Diagram showing a car rear bumper with internal components and a highlighted inset view of the lid (no text or symbols)

WARNING

When not in use

Ensure that the inside trunk door is closed.

In the event of sudden braking, items stored in the trunk may be thrown forward into the cabin, resulting in injury.

Assist grips

An assist grip installed on the ceiling can be used to support your body while sitting on the seat.

Interior view of a car dashboard with seatbelt and rearview mirror (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Assist grip

Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your seat.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the assist grip

Do not put a heavy load on the assist grip.

Coat hooks

To use the coat hook, push it in.

Illustration of a car seatbelt switch with two inset views showing the same switch (no text or symbols present)

WARNING

■ Items that cannot be hung on the coat hook

Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles, causing death or serious injury.

Clock

The GPS clock's time is automatically adjusted by utilizing GPS time information. For details, refer to "NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

Architectural elevation drawing of a building facade with circular window and window-like elements (no text or symbols)

Sun visors

1 To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down.
2 To set the visor in the side position, flip down, unhook, and swing it to the side.

3 To use the side extender, place the visor in the side position, then slide it backward.

Vanity mirrors

Slide the cover to open.

The light turns on when the cover is opened.

Close-up of a car seatbelt with a red arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)

To prevent battery discharge

If the vanity lights remain on when the engine switch is turned off, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.

NOTICE

■ To prevent the battery from being discharged

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is off.

Garage door opener

The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices.

HomeLink® programming procedure

The programming procedures can also be found at the following URL.

Website: www.homelink.com/lexus

For support, contact customer support at the following.

Help Line: 1-800-355-3515

System components

The HomeLink ^® wireless control system in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming methods on the following pages to determine the method which is appropriate for the device.

A HomeLink® indicator light
B Garage door operation indicators
C HomeLink® icon

Illuminates while HomeLink ^® is operating.

D Buttons

■ Codes stored in the HomeLink® memory

● The registered codes are not erased even if the battery cable is disconnected.
- If learning failed when registering a different code to a HomeLink® button that already has a code registered to it, the already registered code will not be erased.

WARNING

■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device
The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety standards

Do not use the HomeLink® compatible transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards.

WARNING

This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.

■ When operating or programming HomeLink®

Never allow a child to operate or play with the HomeLink® buttons.

Programming the HomeLink®

■ Before programming HomeLink®
- During programming, it is possible that garage doors, gates, or other devices may operate. For this reason, make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or other devices to prevent injury or other potential harm.
- It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the remote control transmitter for more accurate programming.
● Garage door opener motors manufactured after 1995 may be equipped with rolling code protection. If this is the case, you may need a stepladder or other sturdy, safe device to reach the "Learn" or "Smart" button on the garage door opener motor.
■ Programming HomeLink®

Steps 1 through 3 must be performed within 60 seconds, otherwise the indicator light will stop flashing and programming will not be able to be

completed.

1 Press and release the HomeLink ^® button you want to program and check that the HomeLink ^® indicator light flashes (orange).
2 Point the remote control transmitter for the device at the rear view mirror, 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink® buttons.

Keep the HomeLink ^® indicator light in view while programming.

Illustration of a white electronic device with control buttons and a separate gray component (no text or symbols visible)

3 Program a device.

Diagram of a printer's front panel with a black clip and pink arrow indicating compression (no text or symbols)

▶ Programming a device other than an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)

Press and hold the handheld transmitter button until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green (rolling code) or continuously lit green (fixed code), then release the button.

▶ Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming a device in the Canadian market

Press and release the remote control transmitter button at 2 second intervals, repeatedly, until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from slowly flashing (orange) to rapidly flashing (green) (rolling code) or continuously lit (green) (fixed code).

4 Test the HomeLink ^® operation by pressing the newly programmed button and observing the indicator light:

- Indicator light illuminates: Programming of a fixed code device has completed. The garage door or other device should operate when a HomeLink® button is pressed and released.

- Indicator light flashes rapidly: The garage door opener motor or other device is equipped with a rolling code. To complete programming, firmly press and hold the HomeLink® button for 2 seconds then release it.

- If the garage door or other device does not operate, proceed to "Programming a rolling code system".

5 Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the remaining HomeLink® buttons.

■ Programming a rolling code system

2 or more people may be necessary to complete rolling code programming.

1 Locate the "Learn" or "Smart" button on the garage door opener motor in the garage.

This button can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. Refer to the owner's manual supplied with the garage door opener motor for details.

Illustration of a worker installing or adjusting an electrical panel with a ladder, next to an inset showing a curved arrow pointing to the panel (no text or symbols present)

2 Press and release the "Learn" or "Smart" button. Perform 3 within 30 seconds after performing 2.

3 Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button (inside the vehicle) for 2 seconds and release it. Repeat this sequence (press/hold/release) up to 3 times to complete programming. If the garage door opener motor operates when the HomeLink® button is pressed, the garage door

opener motor recognizes the HomeLink ^® signal.

Illustration of a white electronic device with three ports and a pink arrow pointing to one port (no text or symbols)

■ Enabling 2-way communication with a garage door (only available for compatible devices)

When enabled, 2-way communication allows you to check the status of the opening and closing of a garage door through indicators in your vehicle.

2-way communication is only available if the garage door opener motor used is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility, refer to www.homelink.com.)

1 Within 5 seconds after programming the garage door opener has been completed, if the garage door opener motor is trained to HomeLink ^® , both garage door operation indicators will flash rapidly (green) and the light on the garage door opener motor will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled.

If the indicators do not flash, perform 2 and 3 within the first 10 presses of the HomeLink® button after programming has been completed.

2 Press a programmed HomeLink ^® button to operate a garage door.

3 Within 1 minute of pressing the HomeLink® button, after the garage door operation has stopped, press the "Learn" or "Smart" button on the garage door opener motor. Within 5 seconds of the establishment of 2-way communication with the garage door opener, both garage door operation indicators in the vehicle will flash rapidly (green) and the light on the garage door opener motor will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled.

■ Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button

When the following procedure is performed, buttons which already have devices registered to them can be overwritten:

1 With one hand, press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.

2 When the HomeLink ^® indicator starts flashing (orange), continue to hold the HomeLink ^® button and perform "Programming HomeLink ^® " 1(it takes 20 seconds for the HomeLink ^® indicator to start flashing).

Before programming

● Install a new battery in the transmitter.
- The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink®.

Operating HomeLink®

Press the appropriate HomeLink ^® button. The HomeLink ^® indicator light should turn on.

The status of the opening and closing of a garage door is shown by the indicators.

A Opening

B Closing

This function is only available if the garage door opener motor used is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility, refer to www.homelink.com.)

Color Status
Orange (flashing)	Currently opening/closing
Green	Opening/closinghas completed
Red (flashing)	Feedback signals cannot be received

The indicators can operate within approximately 820 ft. (250 m) of the garage door. However, if there are obstructions between the garage door and the vehicle, such as houses and trees, feedback signals from the garage door may not be received.

To recall the previous door operation status, press and release either

HomeLink® buttons and

neously. The last recorded status will be displayed for 3 seconds.

Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three codes)

Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the HomeLink ^® indicator light changes from continuously lit (orange) to rapidly flashing (green).

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink® memory.

Diagram of a device with two pink arrows pointing to internal components (no text or symbols)

Compass

*: If equipped

The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading.

Operation and displays

To turn the compass on or off, press and hold the switch for 3 seconds.

Diagram of a car seat with a highlighted door and arrow, showing no text or symbols

Directions are displayed as follows:

Display Direction
“N” North
“NE” Northeast
“E” East
“SE” Southeast
“S” South
“SW” Southwest
“W” West
“NW” Northwest

■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation

The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:

● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.

● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).

● The vehicle has become magnetized. (There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)

● The battery has been disconnected.

A door is open.

WARNING

■ While driving the vehicle

Do not adjust the display. Adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.

NOTICE

■ To avoid compass malfunctions

Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror. Doing this may cause the compass sensor to malfunction.

■ To ensure normal operation of the compass

- Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.

● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.

Calibrating the compass

Deviation

The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the earth's magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle.

If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will deviate. To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.

■ Deviation calibration

1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Press and hold the switch for 6 seconds.

A number (1 to 15) appears on the compass display.

Close-up of a car interior panel with a highlighted digital display showing the number 10 (no text or symbols on the device itself)

3 Press the switch and, referring to the map above, select the number of the zone where you are.

If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is complete.

■ Circling calibration

1 Stop the vehicle in a place where it is safe to drive in a circle.
2 Press and hold the switch for 9 seconds.

"C" appears on the compass display.

Diagram of a device rear panel with a close-up inset showing a highlighted component (no text or symbols present)

3 Drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less in a circle until a direction is displayed.

If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is displayed.

Top-down diagram of a car with a pink circular arrow indicating cycle, no text or symbols present

WARNING

■ When doing the circling calibration

Secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior....250

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior....255

6-2. Matte paint care guide

Basic knowledge about matte clear coat....259

Washing your vehicle .....263

Frequently Asked Questions 264

6-3. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements.. 267

General maintenance.....268

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs......271

6-4. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions 272

Hood....274

Positioning a floor jack......275

Engine compartment......276

Tires 283

Tire inflation pressure......290

Wheels....292

Air conditioning filter......294

Electronic key battery......295

Checking and replacing fuses 297

Headlight aim....299

Light bulbs....300

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

Perform cleaning in a manner appropriate to each component and its material.

Matte paint care guide (body)

Unlike a vehicle with a normal clear coat, special care is necessary to protect the appearance of a vehicle with a matte clear coat. (→P.259, 263, 264)

Cleaning instructions

● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.
- Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.
- For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.
● Wipe away any water.
● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

■ CFRP (Carbon Fiber Reinforced Plastic) part (if equipped)

As the CFRP parts may change color if they are exposed to ultraviolet rays for extended periods of time, Lexus recommends that your vehicle be stored in a place where it will not be exposed to direct sunlight.

• Do not use wax that contains abrasives.
  ■ Black stainless steel window moldings

Side view of a car with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

The stainless steel window moldings are made of black oxide coated stainless steel.

When cleaning the vehicle, do not scrub the moldings with an abrasive cleaner as their finish may be damaged or the color may change.

Self-restoring coat*

The vehicle body has a self-restoring coating that is resistant to small surface scratches caused in a car wash etc.

● The coating lasts for 5 to 8 years from when the vehicle is delivered from the plant.
● The restoration time differs depending on the depth of the scratch and outside temperature.

The restoration time may become shorter when the coating is warmed by applying warm water.

- Deep scratches caused by keys, coins, etc. cannot be restored.

- Do not use wax that contains abrasives.

*: CFRP parts (if equipped) do not have a self-restoring coat.

■ Automatic car washes(vehicles without CFRP parts)

- Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.

- Wash the vehicle with the active rear wing retracted. If the vehicle is washed with the active rear wing raised, depending on the type of automatic car wash, the brushes of the automatic car wash may become stuck on the active rear wing. In

this case, the active rear wing may not be washed very well or may even be scratched or damaged.

• Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface, parts (wheel, etc.) and harm your vehicle's paint.
  ■ Automatic car washes(vehicles with CFRP parts)

Do not use an automatic car wash as they may scratch the CFRP parts and damage their finish or damage the fixed rear wing.

■ High pressure car washes

As water may enter the cabin, do not bring the nozzle tip near the gaps around the doors or perimeter of the windows, or spray these areas continuously.

■ When using a car wash

If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:

• Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system with push-button start. (→P.98)
  ■ Wheels and wheel ornaments (vehicles without matte painted wheels)
• Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent.
  ● Wash detergent off with water immediately after use.
  ● To protect the paint from damage, make sure to observe the following precautions.
• Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive detergent
• Do not use hard brushes
• Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, such as after driving or parking in hot weather

■ Wheels and wheel ornaments (vehicles with matte painted wheels)

A different set of care is necessary for matte painted wheels and wheel ornaments. Contact your Lexus dealer for details.

• Remove dirt using water as early as possible. If the wheels are excessively dirty, use diluted neutral detergent.
• When using detergent, make sure to rinse it off with water immediately. Then use a soft cloth to wipe off the water.
• Use a sponge or soft cloth to remove the dirt by hand.
  ● To prevent the matte paint from being damaged or glossy, make sure to observe the following precautions:
• Do not apply any coatings or wax.
• Do not use acidic, alkaline detergents.
• When using tire cleaners or tire wax, do not allow them to be applied to the wheels.
• Do not scrub or polish the wheels using a brush or dry cloth, etc.
• When using an automatic car wash, do not select the wheel brush function.
• Do not use a high pressure washer or steam cleaner.
• Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, such as after driving or parking in hot weather.
  ■ Diffuser (Vehicles with titanium mufflers)

The cleaning method for the diffuser on vehicles with titanium mufflers differs from that for normal diffusers.

• When using detergent, make sure to rinse it off with water immediately. Then use a soft cloth to wipe off the water.
• To prevent the diffuser from being damaged, make sure to observe the following precautions:
• Do not scrub or polish the diffuser using a brush or dry cloth.
• Do not apply any ceramic coatings or use abrasive detergents.

Close-up of a mechanical component with two cylindrical ports and an arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Brake caliper coating

• When using detergent, use neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners, as they will damage the paint.
• Do not use detergent on the brake calipers when they are hot.
  ● Wash detergent off immediately after use.

■ Brake pads and calipers

Rust may form if the vehicle is parked with wet brake pads or disc rotors, causing them to stick. Before parking the vehicle after it is washed, drive slowly and apply the brakes several times to dry the parts.

Bumpers

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

■ Side windows water-repellent coating

The following precautions can extend the effectiveness of the water-repellent coating.

• Remove any dirt, etc. from the side windows regularly.
• Do not allow dirt and dust to accumulate on the windows for a long period. Clean the windows with a soft, damp cloth as soon as possible.
• Do not use wax or glass cleaners that contain abrasives when cleaning the windows.
• Do not use any metallic objects to remove condensation build up.

Plated portions

If dirt cannot be removed, clean the parts as follows:

• Use a soft cloth dampened with an approximately 5% solution of neutral detergent and water to clean the dirt off.
  ● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to

remove any remaining moisture.

- To remove oily deposits, use alcohol wet wipes or a similar product.

WARNING

■ When washing the vehicle

Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the electrical components, etc. to catch fire.

■ When cleaning the windshield (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

Set the wipers to the intermittent wind-shield wipers. ( P.146)

If AUTO mode is selected, the wipers may operate unexpectedly in the following situations, and may result in hands being caught or other serious injuries and cause damage to the wiper blades.

Hand-drawn sketch of a medical device with a pink arrow pointing to the internal body area (no text or symbols)

• When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is touched by hand
• When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor
• If something bumps against the wind-shield
• If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the raindrop sensor

WARNING

■ Precautions regarding the exhaust pipes

As exhaust gases cause the exhaust pipes to become quite hot, do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately after the engine is turned off.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the exhaust pipes until they have cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes can cause burns.

■ Precaution regarding the rear bumper with Blind Spot Monitor (if equipped)

If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the system may malfunction. If this occurs, consult your Lexus dealer.

NOTICE

■ Application of coatings to the vehicle body (vehicles with CFRP parts)

Do not apply any kind of coating to the vehicle body as doing so may damage the paint or reduce its durability.

■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum wheels etc.)

● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast

• After driving on salted roads

- If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface

- If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint surface

• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances

- If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud

- If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

- If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humidity when storing the wheels.

■ Cleaning the exterior lights

- Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

- Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

■ To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms

When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side wiper arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning the wipers to their original position, do so from the passenger side first.

■ When using an automatic car wash (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

Set the wipers to the intermittent wind-shield wipers. ( P.146)

If AUTO mode is selected, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be damaged.

■ When using a high pressure car wash

- When washing the vehicle, do not spray the camera or its surrounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not operate normally.

- Do not spray water directly on the radar which is equipped behind the emblem. Otherwise it may cause the device to be damaged.

- Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured cover), connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they come into contact with high-pressure water.

- Traction related parts

- Suspension parts

• Steering parts

- Brake parts

- Keep the cleaning nozzle at least 11.9 in. (30 cm) away from the vehicle body. Otherwise resin section, such as moldings and bumpers, may be deformed and damaged. Also, do not continuously hold the nozzle in the same place.

- Do not spray the lower part of the windshield continuously.

If water enters the air conditioning system intake located near the lower part of the windshield, the air conditioning system may not operate correctly.

- Do not wash the underside of the vehicle using a high pressure car washer.

- Do not point the nozzle of a high pressure washer at the areas shown in the illustration, as high pressure water may damage the oil coolers.

Side-by-side comparison of a car's front wheel and rear wheel, showing engine components (no text or symbols)

Hood vent

When washing the vehicle, do not allow a large amount of water to enter the hood vent at once, such as when using a bucket, etc. or point the nozzle of a high pressure washer at the hood vent.

Water may get inside the engine compartment and affect the engine and other components.

Illustration of a car's roof and dashboard with a black arrow pointing to the nose (no text or symbols)

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

Perform cleaning in a manner appropriate to each component and its material.

Protecting the vehicle interior

• Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
• If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%.

Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.

Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.

■ Handling the seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

■ When cleaning the carpeted portions of the glove box, console box, etc.

If a strong adhesive tape is used, there is a possibility that the surface of the carpet could be damaged.

■ CFRP (Carbon Fiber Reinforced Plastic) parts (if equipped)

When cleaning, remove dirt using a soft moist cloth or synthetic chamois, and then wipe the surface with a soft dry cloth to remove any remaining moisture.

WARNING

Water in the vehicle

- Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.

Doing so may cause electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire.

- Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. (→P.30)

An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ Cleaning detergents

• Do not use the following liquids, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
• Center Display: Organic substances such as benzine or gasoline, alkaline solutions, and alcohol
• Seats: Alkaline solutions, organic substances such as thinner or benzine, and alcohol
• Other parts: Organic substances such as benzine or gasoline, alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
• Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other interior part's painted surface may be damaged.

NOTICE

■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces:

• Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
• Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
• Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
  Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.

Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.

■ When cleaning the inside of the wind-shield

Do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens. (→P.156)

■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window
- Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
- Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.

Cleaning the leather areas

• Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
  ● Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.

• Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.
• Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.

Caring for leather areas

Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle's interior.

Cleaning the synthetic leather areas

• Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
• Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%.
• Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.

Cleaning the artificial leather (Alcantara ^® ) areas (if equipped)

It is recommended that regular maintenance should be performed for areas that are frequently touched to maintain quality.

■ Routine maintenance

This maintenance is most effective if performed regularly (around once per month).

1 Soak a cloth in lukewarm water (approximately 104^ F [ 40^ C]), wring it out thoroughly and then wipe the entire body.

Wipe carefully so that the pile is not disheveled. Be sure to prepare a clean cloth. Once you have wiped the part with the cloth, rinse it until it is completely clean before using the cloth again.

2 Once it has dried, use a lint brush or the like to comb the pile.

■ When cleaning the artificial leather (Alcantara®)

• If liquid is spilled onto the surface, apply tissue paper or the like to absorb the liquid.
• If any substance such as mud or coffee dries and becomes stuck to the surface, use a lint brush or the like to lightly brush the dirty area and remove the substance. Then, it is recommended to clean the dried substance from the surface using a vacuum cleaner.
• For oil-based substances, use a dry cloth or tissue paper to wipe off the

substance as much as possible, while being careful not to spread it.

If the substance still cannot be removed, use the following procedure to remove it.

1 Liquid substances: Soak a cloth in lukewarm water (approximately 104^ F [ 40^ C]), wring it out thoroughly and then wipe the dirty area from the outside inward.

Wipe carefully so that the pile is not disheveled. Be sure to prepare a clean cloth and use the clean portion of it to clean the surface.

Oil-based substances: Dab a cloth soaked in benzene, lukewarm water or pure ethyl alcohol (for drinking) within the dirty area from the outside inward, and then dab a dry cloth on the dirty area to absorb the substance.

2 If the pile on the surface is disheveled, use a lint brush or the like to lightly brush the surface, and then allow the surface to dry completely.

■ To remove substances adhered to the pile

To clean dust or other adhered substances, use a lint brush or the like to lightly brush the area and remove the substance. If the substance still cannot be removed, use adhesive tape to remove it.

^* : A I can ^ is a registered trademark of Alcantara S.p.A.

NOTICE

When driving

Areas that are frequently touched are more likely to attract dirt. Ensure that your hands are clean before touching anything.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to artificial leather (Alcantara®)

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of artificial leather (Alcantara ^® ):

• Do not apply excessive force
• Do not dig your nails into it
  Do not rub it with your hands
  ● Do not touch it if your hands are dirty
  ■ When using adhesive tape

If a strong adhesive tape is used, there is a possibility that the surface of the carpet could be damaged.

Basic knowledge about matte clear coat

The body of a vehicle is painted with layers of several different coatings to enhance its durability and appearance. The top layer is called a clear coat.

Unlike a normal clear coat, which enhances the glossy appearance of the base paint, matte clear coat gives the base paint a non-glossy finish with a unique texture.

In order to ensure the longevity of the matte clear coat and its texture, special care must be taken when cleaning the vehicle.

Basic paint structure

Illustrations in this manual are simplified for explanation and may not represent the actual vehicle.

A Top coat (clear): A transparent coating which protects the lower layers of paint. Some clear coats enhance the appearance through improved color depth or gloss.

B Top coat (base): Paint which gives the vehicle body its color.

C Intermediate coat: Enhances the top coat finish and durability.

D Primer: Enhances the rust resistance of steel parts of the vehicle body. Primer is also applied to the inner side of vehicle body and structural components.

Difference between general clear coat and matte clear coat

▶ Normal clear coat

- Cross section

A Light
B Clear
C Base

- Enlarged surface

Solid dark gray square with no visible text, symbols, or features.

▶ Matte clear coat
- Cross section

A Light
B Matting agent
c Clear
D Base

- Enlarged surface

Grayscale abstract texture with no discernible text, symbols, or structured elements

Illustrations in this manual are simplified for explanation and may not represent the actual vehicle.

Glossiness of a surface is seen by the human eyes by a difference in the amount of light that reflects off the surface.

A surface painted with normal clear coat is flat and smooth. As the amount of light that reflects off the surface is large, the vehicle body will appear glossy.

A surface painted with a matte clear coat is slightly uneven due to the added matting agent. As the light shining on an uneven surface is diffused significantly, the amount of light reflected is small, making the vehicle body look not glossy, with a unique texture.

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

If the painted surfaces of the vehicle are dirty, wash the vehicle immediately. (Washing your vehicle → P.263)

A Dirt

Due to the slight unevenness, matte clear coat surfaces are more likely to trap dirt and other foreign matter compared to normal clear coat surfaces.

If dirt or foreign matter is left on the vehicle, it may settle into the textured surface of the matte clear coat, making it more difficult to remove. Additionally, as the surface of the matte clear coat will become more flat when dirty, the vehicle body will start to look glossy, ruining the textured finish.

Therefore, make sure to clean the vehicle regularly and not allow dirt to remain on the vehicle for extended periods of time.

If dirt or foreign matter is allowed to settle and cannot be cleaned off with normal washing, it will be necessary to remove the dirt with the upper layer of the textured finish and then to repaint the entire part.

Ask your Lexus dealer for details.

■ Materials that may become difficult to remove

The following are likely to settle into the vehicle body and should be cleaned off immediately.

● Rain water, sea water, and other liquids that may cause water stains
● Sand, pollen, volcanic ash, and other particulate matter
● Dead insects, bird droppings, etc.
- Sap, leaves, flowers, etc.
● Mud, snow, anti-freezing agents, and other road debris
● Gasoline, engine oil, asphalt, and other oily materials

■ Do not apply a coating to the vehicle

Do not apply a coating to the vehicle body, as it will form a film over the painted surfaces, filling the matte clear coat surface, making it more flat. As a result, it will become more glossy, possibly permanently losing its matte properties.

Repair of paint damage

Take care in order to not damage the painted surfaces.

When minor damage occurs to a vehicle with a normal clear coat, it can be repaired by polishing it or using touch up paint. In contrast, a matte clear coat cannot be repaired using these methods.

If these methods are used the unevenness of the matte clear coat may be removed or filled in. In either case, the surface will become more flat, making

it appear more glossy, possibly permanently losing its matte properties.

In order to maintain the matte finish when repairing damage, it will be necessary to repaint the entire part.

Washing your vehicle

Washing the vehicle by hand is recommended.

How to wash your vehicle

● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.
- Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.
- For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.
● Wipe away any water.

NOTICE

■ Avoiding damage to the painted surfaces

Observe the following precautions. Otherwise, the painted surfaces of your vehicle may be damaged and permanently lose their matte properties.

- When washing the vehicle, do not use a brush.

Black plastic tool with a pink prohibition symbol (no text or numbers on the tool itself)

• Do not use rubbing or polishing compounds (ex. scratch remover).
• Do not rub the vehicle body.

NOTICE

• Do not attach a stickers to or vinyl wrap the vehicle body.
  Before attaching a magnet (sign, etc.) to the vehicle body, make sure to wash and thoroughly dry the area of the vehicle body where the magnet is to be attached.

Frequently Asked Questions

The following are frequently asked questions about the matte clear coat and their answers:

Washing the vehicle

■ General washing tips ( P.263)

Question Answer
Can the vehicle be washed?	Yes. The vehicle should be washed immediately if it is dirty.
Can the vehicle be washed frequently?
Is there anything I should be careful about when washing the vehicle?	Make sure to start by rinsing the entire vehicle with plenty of water from top to bottom.

■ If the vehicle body is dirty ( P.261)

Question: What should I do if any of the following have attached to the vehicle?

Item Answer
Leaves, flowers, branches, etc.	Remove immediately.They may scratch the matte clear coat and if they are allowed to remain on the vehicle, dirt may settle into the matte clear coat, making it more flat. As a result, it will become more glossy, possibly permanently losing its matte properties.
Sand, pollen, and other particulate matter	Wash off with water immediately.If the contaminants are allowed to remain on the vehicle,they may settle into the matte clear coat, making it more glossy, possibly causing it to permanently lose its matte properties.
Asphalt (tar)
Water repellent glass coating	Remove immediately.Even if removed, depending on the contaminant, the matte clear coat may be damaged, possibly permanently losing its matte properties.
Glass treatment remover
Tire cleaner
Gasoline
Oil
Washer fluid

■ Vehicle washing products ( P.263)

Question Answer
What should I use to wipe off dirt?	Use a soft chamois cloth.
What should I use to dry the vehicle?
Can I use a water stain remover?	Lexus does not recommend the use of water stain remov-ers, as they may damage the matte clear coat.
Can the vehicle be waxed?	No. Do not wax the vehicle or apply a coating to the vehicle body, as they may cause the matte clear coat to lose its matte texture.
Can a coating be applied to the vehicle body?
Can I use an iron remover?	No, as it may cause the matte clear coat to lose its matte texture
Can I use tar and pitch remover?	No, as they may damage the matte clear coat.
Can I use a matte paint cleaner/wax?	Lexus does not recommend the use of matte paint cleaners or waxes, as they may cause the matte clear coat to lose its matte texture.
Are there genuine Lexus vehicle washing products available for matte paint?	No. Use a soft chamois cloth for cleaning the vehicle body.
Are there any vehicle washing product brands that Lexus recommends?	No. Use a soft chamois cloth for cleaning the vehicle body.

■ Body coatings

Question Answer
Can a body coating available at a Lexus dealer be applied?	No, as it may cause the matte clear coat to lose its matte texture.
Can an aftermarket body coating be applied?	Lexus does not recommend applying a coating to the vehicle body, as it may cause the matte clear coat to lose its matte texture.
Can an aftermarket body coating designed for matte paint be applied?	Lexus does not recommend applying a coating to the vehicle body, as it may cause the matte clear coat to lose its matte texture.

■ Repairing the vehicle body ( P.262)

Question Answer
Can damage to the paint be repaired?	In order to maintain the matte finish when repairing paint damage, it is necessary to repaint the entire part. Consult your Lexus dealer for details.
Can I use rubbing or polishing compound (ex. scratch remover)?	No. Using a rubbing or polishing compound or touch up paint may damage the matte clear coat. In order to maintain the matte finish when repairing paint damage, it is necessary to repaint the entire part. Consult your Lexus dealer for details.
Can I use touch up paint?

■ Attaching accessories and other objects to the vehicle

Question Answer
Can a sticker or vinyl wrap be attached to the vehicle body?	No. They may damage matte clear coat when they are installed and may cause the matte clear coat to lose its matte texture when they are removed.
Can a magnet be attached to the vehicle body?	Yes. Make sure to wash and thoroughly dry the area around where the magnet is to be attached before attaching it.

Maintenance requirements

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner's responsibility to perform regular checks. Lexus recommends the maintenance below.

■ Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repairs to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.

• Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
• Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle.
• Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.

WARNING

■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained

Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible death or serious injury.

■ Handling of the battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.

• Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.
  ● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (→P.280)

General maintenance

General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer.

Scheduled maintenance

Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.

For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the "Warranty and Service Guide", "Owner's Manual Supplement" or "Scheduled Maintenance".

■ Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required

After the required maintenance is pre-formed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the message.

To reset the message, follow the procedures described below:

1 Select on the multi-information display. (→P.82)
2 Press the or meter control switch on the steering wheel to select "Vehicle Settings" then "Scheduled

Maintenance". (To confirm setting, press 📄.)

3 Select "Yes" and then press.

4 A message will be displayed on the multi-information display when the reset procedure has been completed.

Do-it-yourself maintenance

You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.

Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.

The use of Lexus repair manuals is recommended.

For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate "Owner's Guide", "Warranty and Service Guide", "Owner's Manual Supplement" or "Warranty Booklet".

General maintenance

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the "Warranty and Service Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement". It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for advice.

WARNING

If the engine is running

Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.

Engine compartment

Items Check	points
Battery	Check the indicator (if equipped) and connections. (→P.280)
Brake fluid	Is the brake fluid at the correct level? (→P.280)
Engine coolant	Is the engine coolant at the correct level? (→P.278)
Engine oil	Is the engine oil at the correct level? (→P.276)
Exhaust system	There should not be any fumes or strange sounds.
Radiator and condenser	The radiator and condenser should be free from foreign objects. (→P.279)
Washer fluid	Is there sufficient washer fluid? (→P.282)

Vehicle interior

Items Check	points
Accelerator pedal	The accelerator pedal should move smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching).
Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism	When park slope and the shift lever is in P, is the vehicle securely stopped?
Brake pedal	Does the brake pedal move smoothly?Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor?Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of free play?

Items Check	points
Brakes	The vehicle should not pull to one side when the brakes are applied.The brakes should work effectively.The brake pedal should not feel spongy.The brake pedal should not get too close to the floor when the brakes are applied.
Indicators/buzzers	Do the ind and buzzers function properly?
D on a Lights	Do all the lights come on?
Parking brake	Do es the p brake operate nor-mally?When parked on a slope and the park-ing brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped?
Seat belts	Do the seat belts operate smoothly?The seat belts should not be damaged.

i c a t

k 6

Items Check	points
Seats	• Do the seat controls operate properly?
Steering wheel	• Does the steering wheel rotate smoothly?• Does the steering wheel have the correct amount of free play?• There should any strange sounds coming from the steering wheel.

Vehicle exterior

Items Check	points
Doors/trunk	• Do the doors/trunk operate smoothly?
Engine hood	• Does the hood lock system work properly?
Fluid leaks	• There should any signs of fluid leakage after the vehicle has been parked.

Items Check	points
Tiresd not be	• Is the tire inflation pressure correct?• The tires should not be damaged or excessively worn.• Have the tires been rotated according to the maintenance schedule?• T h e w h e e l should not be loose.
Windshield wipersg i n e	• The wiper blades should not show any signs of cracking, splitting, wear, contamination or deformation.• The wiper blades should clear the windshield without streaking or skipping.

u l d n o t b e

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:

- When the battery is disconnected or discharged

Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.

- When the fuel tank cap is loose

The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several driving trips

The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

Do-it-yourself service pre- cautions

If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these sections.

Maintenance

Items Parts and tools
Battery condition (→P.280)	• W a r m w a t e• B a k i n g s o• G r e a s e• Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level (→P.280)	• SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid• SAE J1704 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 brake fluid• Rag or paper towel• Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid)

Items Parts and tools
Engine coolant level(→P.278)	• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology• For the U.S.A.:“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water.• For Canada Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deionized water.• Funnel (used adding coolant)
Engine oil level(→P.276)	• “Toyota G Motor Oil” or equivalent• Rag or paper towel• Funnel (used adding engine oil)
Fuses(→P.297)	• Fuse with samperage rating as original

Items Parts and tools
Light bulbs(→P.300)	Bulb with s ber and wattage rat-ing as originalPhillips-head screw-driverFlatheads driverWrench
Radiator and condenser (→P.279)	—
Tire inflation pres-sure (→P.290)	Tire pressure gaugeCompress source
Washer fluid(→P.282)	Water or washer fluid containing anti-freeze (for winter use)Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)

WARNING

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions.

■ When working on the engine compartment
- Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fans and engine drive belt.
- Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
- Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine compartment.

• Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. m Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.
• Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
  When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille

Be sure the engine switch is off.

With the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (→P.279)

Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in your eyes.

NOTICE

■ If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air.

Hood

Opening the hood

1 Pull the hood lock release lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

2 Pull up the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.

Diagram showing a car interior with a highlighted component and a magnified view of the exterior (no text or symbols)

If a symbol indicating the hood opens is shown on the multi-information display →P.94

WARNING

■ Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.

If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

Positioning a floor jack

When using a floor jack, follow the instructions in the manual provided with the jack and perform the operation safely.

When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

Location of the jack point

Front

A Jack point

Rear

A Jack point

Engine compartment

Components

A Fuse boxes ( P.297)
B Battery (→P.280)
C Engine oil level dipstick ( P.276)
D Engine coolant reservoir ( P.278)
E Engine oil filler cap ( P.276)
F Brake fluid reservoir ( P.280)
G Washer fluid tank ( P.282)
H Electric cooling fans
I Condenser ( P.279)
J Radiator ( P.279)

Checking the engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.

1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning it off, wait about 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.

2 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out.

Interior view of a car showing engine compartment and dashboard, with an inset close-up highlighting a red arrow pointing to a ring component (no text or symbols present)

3 Wipe the dipstick clean.
4 Reinsert the dipstick fully.
5 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check whether the oil level is above low level mark.

A Low level mark

The shape of the dipstick may differ depending on the type of vehicle or engine.

6 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

NOTICE

■ To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on a regular basis.

■ Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations, oil consumption may increase, and

engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil maintenance intervals.

• When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after replacing the engine
• If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
• When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently
• When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through heavy traffic

■ Engine oil level rise

If the vehicle is repeatedly driven without the engine warmed up, moisture caused by dew condensation inside the engine or fuel which did not burn mixes into the engine oil, resulting in a rise in engine oil level. However, this is not a malfunction. For example, the engine become difficult to be warmed up in the following situations.

• When driving a short distance
• When driving at a low speed
• When the outside temperature is low
  When checking the engine oil, make sure that the engine is warmed up. If the engine oil level exceeds the refill upper limit mark, contact your Lexus dealer.

Adding engine oil

- Checking the oil type and preparing the item needed

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.

• Engine oil selection →P.358
• Oil quantity (Low level mark → Refill upper limit mark) 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)

- Item

Clean funnel

■ Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as that already in the engine.

Diagram of a car's front engine compartment showing the wheel and internal components (no text or labels)

1 Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
2 Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.

Make sure that the oil level does not exceed the refill upper limit mark and is between the low level mark and refill upper limit mark.

A Low level mark
B Refill upper limit mark

The shape of the dipstick may differ depending on the type of vehicle or engine.

3 Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

WARNING

■ Used engine oil

Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
- Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.
- Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE

■ When replacing the engine oil

• Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
• Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
• Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
• Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

Checking the coolant

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the "FULL" and "LOW" lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.

■ Engine coolant reservoir

A Reservoir cap
B "FULL" line
C "LOW" line

If the level is on or below the "LOW" line, add coolant up to the "FULL" line. (→P.352)

Coolant selection

Only use "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" or a similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

U.S.A.:

"Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31°F [-35°C])

Canada:

"Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44°F [-42°C])

For more details about coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.

If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir caps, drain cock and water pump.

If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.

WARNING

■ When the engine is hot

Do not remove the engine coolant reservoir cap. (→P.353)

The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

NOTICE

■ When adding coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.

Checking the radiator and condenser

Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects.

If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

WARNING

■ When the engine is hot

Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.

Checking and adding the brake fluid

- Checking fluid level

The brake fluid level should be between the "MAX" and "MIN" lines on the tank.

Technical illustration of a vehicle engine compartment with an inset showing the internal components (no text or symbols visible)

■ Adding fluid

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.

- Fluid type

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid

SAE J1704 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 brake fluid

- Item

Clean funnel

■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.

WARNING

■ When filling the reservoir

Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

NOTICE

■ If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.

Battery

Check the battery as follows.

Battery exterior

Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

A Terminals

B Hold-down clamp

- Checking battery condition (vehicles with the battery indicator)

Check the battery condition by indicator color.

A Blue: Good condition
B Red: Not working properly. Have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer.
C White: Charging is necessary. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Before recharging

When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, observe the following before recharging:

• If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.
  ● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.

■ After recharging/reconnecting the battery

The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.

1 Shift the shift lever to P.
2 Open and close either door.
3 Restart the engine.
● Unlocking the doors using the smart access system with push-button start may not be possible immediately after reconnecting the battery. If this happens, use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.
- Start the engine with the engine switch in ACCESSORY mode. The engine may not start with the engine switch turned off.

However, the engine will operate normally from the second attempt.

The engine switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the battery is disconnected and reconnected, the vehicle will return the engine switch mode to the status it was in before the battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the engine before disconnecting the battery. Take extra care when connecting the battery if the engine switch mode prior to the battery being disconnected is unknown.

If the system will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Lexus dealer.

WARNING

■ Chemicals in the battery

Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the battery:

• Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
• Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
  ● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
  ● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
  ● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
• Keep children away from the battery.

■ Where to safely charge the battery

Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.

■ How to recharge the battery

Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate.

WARNING

Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
- If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.

- If electrolyte gets on your skin

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.

- If electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.

- If you accidentally swallow electrolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.

NOTICE

■ When recharging the battery

Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

Adding the washer fluid

If any washer does not work or the warning message appears on the multi-information display, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid.

Interior view of a car showing engine compartment with hand operating controls and a motor (no visible text or symbols)

WARNING

■ When adding washer fluid

Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine, etc.

NOTICE

■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine anti-freeze instead of washer fluid.

Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle's painted surfaces, as well as damaging the pump leading to problems of the washer fluid not spraying.

Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.

Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.

Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.

Checking tires

Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires. Also check the tires for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the tread.

Vehicles with a spare tire: Check the spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.

A New tread
B Worn tread
C Treadwear indicator

The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a "TWI" or "mark, etc., molded into the sidewall of each tire.

Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.

- When to replace your vehicle's tires

Tires should be replaced if:

● The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
- You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult your Lexus dealer.

Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

Low profile tires

Compared to normal tires, the grip performance of these tires will be lower on snow covered or icy roads. Be sure to use snow tires when driving on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for the road conditions.

■ Maximum load of tire

Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.

For the GAWR, see the Certification Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. (→P.365)

Interior view of a car showing a door and seat with a black arrow pointing to the door (no text or symbols visible)

Tire types

Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.

Snow tires

For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (→P.215)

If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)

The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.

WARNING

■ When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drivetrain as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

- Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns. Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.

- Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.

- Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).

- Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.

- Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle. Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.

● Vehicles with a spare tire: Do not tow if your vehicle has a spare tire installed.

● Vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit: Do not tow anything if a tire that has been repaired using the emergency tire puncture repair kit is installed. The load on the tire may cause unexpected damage to the tire.

NOTICE

Low profile tires

Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when sustaining impact from the road surface. Therefore, pay attention to the following:

- Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may be damaged more severely.

NOTICE

● Avoid potholes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure to do so may lead to severe tire and wheel damage.

If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

■ Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes. These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle's wheels and body.

Tire rotation

Tires cannot be rotated.

Tire pressure warning system

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise.

- The tire pressure detected by the tire pressure warning system can be displayed on the multi-information display. (→P.75)

The illustration used is intended as an example, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the multi-information display.

- If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is warned by a screen display and a warning light. (→P.320)

■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.

■ Tire inflation pressure

It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode. It may also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted.

● Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be different from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge.

■ Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly

In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate prop-

erly.

• If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used.
• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire.
• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size.
• Tire chains, etc. are equipped.
• An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is equipped.
• If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
• If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel housings.
• If the tire inflation pressure is extremely higher than the specified level.
• If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.
• If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.
  ● Performance may be affected in the following situations.
  • Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device

If tire position information is not correctly displayed due to the radio wave conditions, the display may be corrected by driving and changing the radio wave conditions.

• When the vehicle is parked, the time taken for the warning to start or go off could be extended.
• When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when a tire has burst, the warning may not function.

■ Warning performance of the tire pressure warning system

The warning of the tire pressure warning system will change in accordance with the conditions under which it was initialized. For this reason, the system may give a warning even if the tire pressure does not reach a low enough level, or if the pressure is higher than the pressure that was adjusted to when the system was initialized.

Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When replacing the tires or wheels, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters must be installed to the wheels which will be installed to the vehicle.

When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. ( P.287)

■ Replacing tires and wheels

If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.

NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and tire valve caps
- When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.
Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed, water could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the tire pressure warning valves could be bound.
- When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck.

NOTICE

■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. After use of liquid sealant, make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when repairing or replacing the tire. (→P.286)

Initializing the tire pressure warning system

The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circumstances:

• When rotating the tires.
• When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when changing traveling speed or load weight.
• When changing the tire size.

When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.

■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system

1 Park the vehicle in a safe place, turn the engine switch off and wait 20 minutes or more.

Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.

2 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level.

Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the

specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.

3 Start the engine. ( P.128)

4 Press and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly 3 times.

Then a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

5 Drive straight (with occasional left and right turns) at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more for approximately 10 to 30 minutes.

Initialization is complete when the position of each tire is determined and the inflation pressure of each tire is displayed on the multi-information display.

■ Initialization procedure

● Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization or tire inflation pressure adjustment.
- If you have accidentally turned the engine switch off during initialization, it is not necessary to press the reset switch again as initialization will restart automatically when the engine switch has been turned to IGNITION ON mode for the next time.
- If you accidentally press the reset switch when initialization is not necessary, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold, and conduct

initialization again.

● While the position of each tire is being determined and the inflation pressures are not being displayed on the multi-information display, if the inflation pressure of a tire drops, the tire pressure warning light will come on.
If the tire pressure warning system is not initialized properly
In the following situations, initialization may take longer than usual to be completed or may not be possible. (Usually, the vehicle will need to be driven for approximately 10 to 30 minutes to complete initialization.) If initialization is not complete after driving approximately 30 minutes, continue driving for a while.
- If the vehicle is driven on an unpaved road, it may take longer to complete initialization.
- If the vehicle is backed up while performing initialization, data collected during initialization will be cleared and it will take longer than normal to complete.
- If the vehicle is driven in heavy traffic or another situation where other vehicles are driven close by, it may take time for the system to recognize the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters of your vehicle over those of other vehicles.

If initialization is not complete after driving for approximately 1 hour, park the vehicle in a safe place for approximately 20 minutes and then drive the vehicle again.

In the following situations, initialization will not be started or was not completed properly and the system will not operate properly. Perform the initialization procedure again.
- If, when attempting to start initialization, the tire pressure warning light does not blink 3 times.
- If, when the vehicle has been driven for about 20 minutes after performing initialization, the tire pressure warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then illuminates.
- If initialization cannot be completed after performing the above procedure, contact your Lexus dealer.

WARNING

■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system

Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.

Registering ID codes

Every tire pressure warning valve and transmitter has a unique ID code.

When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID codes.

1 Park the vehicle in a safe place, turn the engine switch off, wait 20 minutes or more, and then start the engine.
2 Start the engine. ( P.128)
3 Press the tire pressure warning reset switch 3 times quickly.

The tire pressure warning light will blink slowly 3 times.

Sensor registration mode will be entered and ID codes registration will begin.

A message will be displayed on the multi-information display and “- -” will be displayed for the tire inflation pressure of each tire.

After this, the tire pressure warning light

will blink for 1 minute and then illuminate.

4 Wait approximately 2 minutes.

If the ID codes are already registered, the tire pressure warning light will turn off.

▶ If the tire pressure warning light turns off
5 Initialize the tire pressure warning system. (→P.287)
▶ If the tire pressure warning light does not turn off
5 Drive at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more until the tire pressure warning light turns off.
6 Initialize the tire pressure warning system. (→P.287)

■ When registering ID codes

● Before performing ID code registration, make sure that no wheels with tire pressure warning valve and transmitters installed are near the vehicle.
● Make sure to initialize the tire pressure warning system after registering the ID codes. If the system is initialized before registering the ID codes, the initialized values will be invalid.
- As the tires will be warm when registration is completed, make sure to allow the tires to cool before performing initialization.
■ Canceling ID code registration
● To cancel ID code registration after it has been started, press the tire pressure

warning reset switch 3 times quickly.

• If ID code registration has been canceled, the tire pressure warning light will turn off.
• If the tire pressure warning light dose not turn off, ID code registration may not have been canceled correctly. To cancel registration, press 3 times quickly again on the tire pressure warning reset switch. Check that the warning light turns off.

If ID codes are not registered properly

In the following situations, ID code registration may take longer than usual to be completed or may not be possible. (Usually, the vehicle will need to be driven for approximately 10 to 30 minutes to complete ID code registration.) If ID code registration is not complete after driving for approximately 30 minutes, continue driving for a while.

• If the vehicle is driven on an unpaved road, it may take longer than normal to complete registration.
• If the vehicle is backed up while performing registration, data collected during registration will be cleared, and it will take longer than normal to complete.
• If the vehicle is driven in heavy traffic or another situation where other vehicles are driven close by, it may take time for the system to recognize the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters of your vehicle over those of other vehicles.
• If a wheel with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter installed is inside or near the vehicle, registration of the ID codes for the installed wheels may not be possible.

If ID registration is not complete after driving for approximately 1 hour, park the vehicle in a safe place for approximately 20 minutes and then perform the ID code registration procedure again.

In the following situations, ID code registration will not be started or was not completed properly and the system will not operate properly. Perform the ID code registration procedure again.
- If, when attempting to start ID code registration, the tire pressure warning light does not blink slowly 3 times.

• If, when the vehicle has been driven for about 20 minutes after performing ID code registration, the tire pressure warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then illuminates.
• If ID code registration cannot be completed after performing the above procedure, contact your Lexus dealer.

Tire inflation pressure

Checking the specified tire inflation pressure

The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are displayed on the tire and loading information label. ( P.361)

Inspection and adjustment procedure

A Tire valve
B Tire pressure gauge

1 Remove the tire valve cap.
2 Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
3 Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.
4 If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the pressure. If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.
5 After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
6 Put the tire valve cap back on.

■ Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Do not forget to check the spare.

■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:

● Reduced fuel economy
● Reduced driving comfort and poor handling
● Reduced tire life due to wear
- Reduced safety
● Damage to the drivetrain
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.

■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:

- Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.

● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appearance.
- It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as heat is generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving.
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

WARNING

■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated.

If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:

Excessive wear
Uneven wear
Poor handling
- Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Air leaking from between tire and wheel
● Wheel deformation and/or tire damage
● Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards, expansion joints, sharp edges on the road, etc.)

NOTICE

■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.

NOTICE

If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and cause an air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.

Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control.

Wheel selection

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and inset ^* .

Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.

*: Conventionally referred to as offset.

Lexus does not recommend using the following:

● Wheels of different sizes or types
• Used wheels
● Bent wheels that have been straightened

When replacing wheels

The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (→P.286)

WARNING

■ When replacing wheels

• Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner's Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.
  ● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
• Use the correct wheel bolts for the wheels to be installed. For details, contact your Lexus dealer.

Wheel bolts

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury:

• Do not over tighten.
  ● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts. Oil and grease may cause the wheel bolts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel bolts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the wheel bolts, or if the surface treatment becomes worn, have the wheel bolts replaced at your Lexus dealer. Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel bolts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.
- Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle. Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.

Aluminum wheel precautions

• Use only Lexus wheel bolts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels.
• When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel bolts are still tight after driving 621 miles (1000 km).
• Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.
• Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.

Removing the air conditioning filter

1 Turn the engine switch off.
2 Open the glove box. Lift up the side with the stay, disconnect the stay tabs and remove the partition by pulling horizontally.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a sliding door mechanism with two pink arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols present)

3 Press the tabs and remove the filter cover.

4 Press the tabs and remove the filter case.

Close-up of a car's front panel showing internal components and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

5 Remove the air conditioning filter from the filter case and replace it with a new one.

The "UP" marks shown on the filter and the filter case should be pointing up.

- Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the "Owner's Manual Supplement" or "Scheduled Maintenance".)

If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

■ Air conditioning filter with deodorizing function

When fragrances are placed in your vehicle, the deodorizing effect may become significantly weakened in a short period.

When an air conditioning odor comes out continuously, replace the air conditioning filter.

NOTICE

■ When using the air conditioning system

Make sure that a filter is always installed. Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.

Electronic key battery

Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.

As the key may be damaged if the following procedure is not performed properly, it is recommended that key battery replacement be performed by your Lexus dealer.

■ If the electronic key battery is depleted

The following symptoms may occur:

• The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will not function properly.
  ● The operational range will be reduced.
  ■ When the card key battery needs to be replaced (if equipped)

The battery for the card key is available only at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer can replace the battery for you.

Items to prepare

● Flathead screwdriver
● Small flathead screwdriver
● Lithium battery CR2032

■ Use a CR2032 lithium battery

• Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, local electrical appliance shops or camera stores.
• Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
• Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.

Replacing the battery

1 Take out the mechanical key.

Diagram of a car door handle and keychain with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

2 Remove the cover.

To prevent damage to the key, wrap the tip of the screwdriver with tape.

Diagram showing a car key inserted into a device with a magnified inset highlighting the internal structure (no text or symbols present)

3 Remove the depleted battery.

Insert a new battery with the "+" terminal facing up.

Illustration of a hand holding a screwdriver next to a device component with a pink arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Battery precautions

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

- Do not swallow the battery. Doing so may cause chemical burns.

A coin battery or button battery is used in the electronic key. If a battery is swallowed, it may cause severe chemical burns in as little as 2 hours and may result in death or serious injury.

- Keep away new and removed batteries from children.

- If the cover cannot be firmly closed, stop using the electronic key and stow the key in the place where children cannot reach, and then contact your Lexus dealer.

- If you accidentally swallow a battery or put a battery into a part of your body, get emergency medical attention immediately.

■ To prevent battery explosion or leakage of flammable liquid or gas

- Replace the battery with a new battery of the same type. If a wrong type of battery is used, it may explode.

- Do not expose batteries to extremely low pressure due to high altitude or extremely high temperatures.

- Do not burn, break or cut a battery.

NOTICE

■ When replacing the battery

Use a flathead screwdriver of appropriate size. Applying excessive force may deform or damage the cover.

NOTICE

■ For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:

● Always work with dry hands. Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
- Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
- Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

Checking and replacing fuses

1 Turn the engine switch off.
2 Open the fuse box cover.

▶ Engine compartment: type A fuse box

Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

Diagram showing a mechanical component with an arrow pointing to a highlighted section, no text or symbols present.

▶ Engine compartment: type B fuse box

Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a component with an arrow indicating direction, alongside a close-up of a mechanical component (no text or symbols present)

Driver's side instrument panel

Remove the lid.

Interior view of a car showing a black plastic door with a pink arrow pointing to the door panel, and a dashboard with steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

3 Remove the fuse with the pullout tool.

Only type A fuses can be removed using the pullout tool.

Interior view of a vehicle chassis with internal components and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

4 Check if the fuse is blown.

Type A and B:

Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Type C and D:

Contact your Lexus dealer.

▶ Type A

Two identical 3D mechanical component diagrams labeled A and B, showing internal channels (no text or symbols beyond labels)

A Normal fuse

B Blown fuse

▶ Type B

Two identical 3D diagrams of a rectangular basin with internal compartments, labeled A and B (no text or symbols on the basin itself)

A Normal fuse

B Blown fuse

▶ Type C

Two identical diagrams labeled A and B showing a curved pipe or tube structure with base supports (no text or symbols beyond labels)

A Normal fuse

B Blown fuse

▶ Type D

Two abstract mechanical or fluidic component diagrams labeled A and B, showing internal flow or flow paths (no text or symbols beyond labels)

A Normal fuse

B Blown fuse

■ After a fuse is replaced

- When installing the lid, make sure that the

tab is installed securely.

• If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

If there is an overload in a circuit

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.

■ When replacing light bulbs

Lexus recommends that you use genuine Lexus products designed for this vehicle. Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent overload, non-genuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be unusable.

WARNING

■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.

● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent. Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
- Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.

NOTICE

■ Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

Headlight aim

Vertical movement adjusting bolts

A Adjustment bolt A
B Adjustment bolt B

Before checking the headlight aim

● Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gasoline and the area around the headlight is not deformed.
● Park the vehicle on level ground.
● Make sure the tire inflation pressure is at the specified level.
- Have someone sit in the driver's seat.
● Bounce the vehicle several times.

Adjusting the headlight aim

1 Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, turn bolt A in either direction.

Remember the turning direction and the

number of turns.

Medical procedure diagram showing a surgical tool inserted into a car body with a pink arrow indicating rotation (no text or labels present)

2 Turn bolt B the same number of turns and in the same direction as step 1.

If the headlight cannot be adjusted using this procedure, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer to adjust the headlight aim.

Medical procedure illustration showing needle insertion and surgical tools (no text or labels)

Light bulbs

You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Lexus dealer.

For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus dealer.

Preparing for light bulb replacement

Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (→P.362)

Bulb locations

Side view of a sedan car with a license plate labeled 'A' pointing to the rear livery (no text or symbols on the car itself)

A Rear turn signal light

■ Bulbs that need to be replaced by your Lexus dealer

• Headlights
  ● Parking lights and daytime running lights
• Front turn signal lights
• Side marker lights

• Side turn signal lights

• Stop/tail lights

• Back-up lights
  ● High mounted stoplight
• License plate lights

■ LED light bulbs

The lights other than the rear turn signal lights each consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced.

■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations:

● Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.

● Water has built up inside the headlight.

■ When replacing light bulbs

→P.299

Replacing light bulbs

■ Rear turn signal lights

1 Open the trunk and apply protective tape to the peripheral of the taillight and the vehicle body around the taillight.

Use masking tape, etc. Do not use duct tape, as it may leave residue or damage the paint when removed.

Abstract 3D rendering of a curved, elongated object with smooth shading (no text or symbols)

2 Using a flathead screwdriver, remove the cover.

To prevent scratching the vehicle, wrap the tip of the flathead screwdriver with a cloth, etc.

Diagram showing a mechanical assembly with an inset close-up of a component, no visible text or symbols

3 Remove the 2 screws.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a component with two pink arrows indicating motion or force directions (no text or symbols present)

4 Pull the light unit toward the rear of the vehicle to remove it.

Diagram of a car interior showing a highlighted vehicle component with a pink arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols present)

5 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

Diagram of a mechanical device with a highlighted circular component and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

6 Remove the light bulb.

Illustration of a plug with a black bulb and cable, showing a pink arrow pointing to the plug (no text or symbols present)

7 Install a new light bulb then install the bulb base to the light unit by inserting it and turning the bulb base clockwise.

After installing the light bulb, turn on the rear turn signal light to visually check that

there is no light leaking from the bulb base.

Diagram showing a mechanical component with a highlighted section and directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols present)

8 Align the tabs and push the light unit toward the front of the vehicle to install it.

Mechanical component diagram showing a highlighted part with a pink arrow, no visible text or symbols

9 Install the 2 screws and cover.

10 Remove the protective tape.

WARNING

■ Replacing light bulbs

Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the lights. The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

- Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb. Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.

WARNING

● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the light unit. This may damage the lights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

■ To prevent damage or fire

● Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
- Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage.

7

7-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers......306

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency....306

If the vehicle is submerged or water on the road is rising 307

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed 309

If you think something is wrong 312

Fuel pump shut off system.....313

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds ......314

If a warning message is displayed 323

If you have a flat tire (vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit) 326

If you have a flat tire (vehicles with a spare tire)....337

If the engine will not start ..... 344

If you lose your keys......345

If the fuel filler door cannot be opened....346

If the electronic key does not operate properly....346

If the vehicle battery is discharged 349

If your vehicle overheats.....352

If the vehicle becomes stuck 354

Emergency flashers

The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has to be stopped on the road due to a breakdown, etc.

Operating instructions

Press the switch to flash all of the turn signal lights.

To turn them off, press the switch once again.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted control panel and warning symbol (no text or labels)

Emergency flashers

If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not operating, the battery may discharge.

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency

Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:

Stopping the vehicle

1 Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.

Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle.

2 Shift the shift lever to N.

▶ If the shift lever is shifted to N

3 After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

4 Stop the engine.

▶ If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N

3 Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible.

4 To stop the engine, press and hold the engine switch for 2 consecutive

seconds or more, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession.

5 Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

WARNING

■ If the engine has to be turned off while driving

Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.

If the vehicle is submerged or water on the road is rising

This vehicle is not designed to be able to drive on roads that are deeply flooded with water. Do not drive on roads where the roads may be submerged or the water may be rising. It is dangerous to remain in the vehicle, if it is anticipated that the vehicle will be flooded or set adrift. Remain calm and follow the following.

• If the door can be opened, open the door and exit the vehicle.
• If the door cannot be opened, open the window using the power window switch and ensure an escape route.
• If the window can be opened, exit the vehicle through the window.
• If the door and window cannot be opened due to the rising water, remain calm, wait until the water level inside the vehicle rises to the point that the water pressure inside of the vehicle equals the water pressure outside of the vehicle and then open the door after waiting for the rising water to enter the vehicle, and exit the vehicle.

When the outside water level exceeds half the height of the door, the door cannot be opened from the inside due to water pressure.

Water level exceeds the floor

When the water level exceeds the floor and time has passed, the electrical equipment will get damaged, the power windows will

not operate, the engine stop, and the vehicle may not be able to get moving.

■ Using an emergency escape hammer\*

Laminated glass is used in the windshield on this vehicle.

Laminated glass cannot be shattered with an emergency hammer.

Tempered glass is used in the windows on this vehicle.

*: Contact your Lexus dealer or aftermarket accessory manufacturer for further information about an emergency hammer.

WARNING

■ Caution while driving

Do not drive on roads where the roads may be submerged or the water may be rising. Otherwise the vehicle may be damaged and cannot move, as well as become flooded and set a drift, which may lead to death.

If your vehicle needs to be towed

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Lexus dealer or commercial towing service, using a wheel-lift type truck or flatbed truck.

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ When towing the vehicle

Be sure to transport the vehicle with all four wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is towed with the tires contacting the ground, the drivetrain and related parts may be damaged or an accident may occur due to a change in direction of the vehicle.

While towing

When towing using cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place excessive stress on the towing eyelets, cables or chains. The towing eyelets, cables or chains may become damaged, broken debris may hit people, and cause serious damage.

■ Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle

Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely. If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck

When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed.

■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

■ To prevent damage to the vehicle during emergency towing

Do not secure cables or chains to the suspension components.

Situations when it is necessary to contact dealers before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Lexus dealer or commercial towing service before towing.

● The engine is running but the vehi-

cle does not move.

● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

Towing with a wheel-lift type truck

From the front

Silhouette illustration of a truck and a car with charging stations (no text or symbols)

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

From the rear

Silhouette illustration of a pickup truck and a car on a road (no text or symbols)

Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

NOTICE

■ Towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck to prevent body damage.

Illustration of a tow truck and a car with a no-smoking symbol (no text or labels)

Using a flatbed truck

When using a flat-bed truck to transport the vehicle, use tire strapping belts. Refer to the owner's manual of the flat-bed truck for the tire strapping method.

In order to suppress vehicle movement during transportation, set the parking brake and turn the engine switch off.

Emergency towing

If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using cables or chains secured to the emergency towing eyelets. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for at most 50 miles (80 km) at under 18 mph (30 km/h).

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle's wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.

Emergency towing procedure

To have your vehicle towed by another vehicle, the towing eyelet must be installed to your vehicle. Install the towing eyelet using the following proce-

dure.

1 Take out the wheel bolt wrench, flathead screwdriver and towing eyelet. (→P.327, 337)
2 Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver.

To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and the vehicle body as shown in the illustration.

Diagram showing a device interacting with a textured surface, with an inset highlighting a component (no text or symbols present)

3 Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand.

Diagram of a mechanical component with arrows indicating motion or force direction (no text or symbols)

4 Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a phillips-head screwdriver or hard metal bar.

Diagram of a mechanical device with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols present)

5 Securely attach cables or chains to the towing eyelet.

Take care not to damage the vehicle body.

6 Enter the vehicle being towed and start the engine.

If the engine does not start, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

7 Shift the shift lever to N and release the parking brake.

When the shift lever cannot be shifted: →P.133

While towing

If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.

Wheel bolt wrench

Wheel bolt wrench is installed in trunk. (→P.327, 337)

If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

Visible symptoms

• Fluid leaks under the vehicle. (Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
  ● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
  ● Engine coolant temperature gauge continually points higher than normal.

Audible symptoms

● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the engine

Operational symptoms

● Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
● Appreciable loss of power
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking

● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
- Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor

Fuel pump shut off system

To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or when an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops the supply of fuel to the engine.

Restarting the engine

Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.

1 Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode or turn it off.
2 Restart the engine.

NOTICE

Before starting the engine

Inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Actions to the warning lights or warning buzzers

Brake system warning light

Warning light Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)or(red)(Canada)	Indicates that:● The brake fluid level is low; or● The brake system is malfunctioning→Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

■ Brake system warning light

Warning light D	Details/Actions
(yellow)	Indicates a malfunction in the parking brake system→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

■ High coolant temperature warning light ^* (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions
	Indicates that the engine coolant temperature is too high→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place. Handling method (→P.352)

* : This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

■ Charging system warning light

Warning light Details/Actions
	Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle's charging system→Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Low engine oil pressure warning light ^* (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions
	Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low→Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.

* : This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

■ Malfunction indicator lamp

Warning light Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)or(Canada)	Indicates a malfunction in:● The electronic engine control system;● The electronic throttle control system; or● The electronic automatic transmission control system→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

■ SRS warning light

Warning light Details/Actions
	Indicates a malfunction in:● The SRS airbag system;● The front passenger occupant classification system; or● The seat belt pretensioner system→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

■ ABS warning light

Warning light Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)or(Canada)	Indicates a malfunction in:● The ABS; or● The brake assist system→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Inappropriate pedal operation warning light ^* (warning buzzer)

Warning light D	Details/Actions
	When a buzzer sounds:● Brake Override System is malfunctioning;● Drive-Start Control is malfunctioning; or● Drive-Start Control is operating→Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.When a buzzer does not sound:Brake Override System is operating→Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake pedal.

* : This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

■ Parking brake warning light (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions
(flashes)(U.S.A.)or(flashes)(Canada)	It is possible that the parking brake is not fully engaged or released→Operate the parking brake switch once again.This light comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released, the system is operating normally.

■ Brake hold operated indicator (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions
(flashes)	Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions
	Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system → Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) indicator (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions
(orange)	Indicates a malfunction in the LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)→Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.(→P.178)

■ PCS warning light

Warning light D

Details/Actions

(flashes or illuminates)

When a buzzer sounds simultaneously:Indicates a malfunction has occurred in the PCS (Pre-Collision System).→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.When a buzzer does not sound:The PCS (Pre-Collision System) has become temporarily unavailable, corrective action may be necessary.→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.(→P.158, 325)If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illuminate.→ P.170

Slip indicator

Warning light D	Details/Actions
	Indicates a malfunction in:● The VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system;● The TRAC (Traction Control) system; or● The hill-start assist control systemThe light will flash when the VSC or the TRAC system is operating.→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

■ Automatic headlight leveling system warning light

Warning light D	Details/Actions
	Indicates a malfunction in the automatic headlight leveling system→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

■ Open door warning light (warning buzzer) ^*

Warning light D	Details/Actions
	Indicates that a door or the trunk is not fully closed→ Check that both side doors and the trunk are closed.

*: Open door warning buzzer: →P.94

■ Low fuel level warning light

Warning light D	Details/Actions
	Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 2.6 gal. (10 L, 2.2 Imp. gal.) or less→ Refuel the vehicle.

Driver's and front passenger's seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer) ^*

Warning light Details/Actions
	Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat belts→ Fasten the seat belt.If the front passenger's seat is occupied, the front passenger's seat belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light (warning buzzer) turn off.

*: Driver's seat belt warning buzzer:

The driver's seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not

fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the buzzer sounds. If the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time after the vehicle reaches a certain speed.

Front passenger's seat belt warning buzzer:

The front passenger's seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is unfastened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time after the vehicle reaches a certain speed.

■ Rear passengers' seat belt reminder lights ^*1 (warning buzzer) ^*2

Warning light Details/Actions
	Warns the rear passengers to fasten their seat belts → Fasten the seat belt.

*1: This light illuminates on the center panel.
*2: Rear passengers' seat belt warning buzzer:

The rear passengers' seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the rear passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is unfastened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time, after the seat belt is fastened and unfastened and the vehicle reaches a certain speed.

■ Master warning light (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions
	A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.→ P.323

■ Tire pressure warning light

Warning light Details/Actions

When the light comes on:Low tire inflation pressure such as● Natural causes (→P.320)● Flat tire (→P.326, 337)→Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. The light will turn off after a few minutes. If the warning light does not turn off after a few minutes, perform initialization (→P.287). If the light does not turn off after performing initialization, have the system checked by your Lexus dealer.When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute:Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system→ Have the system checked by your Lexus dealer.

Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard due to being in a noisy location or audio sound.

■ SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact sensors, side impact sensors (door), side impact sensors (front), side impact sensors (rear), driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system, "AIR BAG ON" indicator light, "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light, front passenger's seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioners, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (→P.31)

Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning buzzer

• If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
• If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly.

■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

First check the following:

• Is the fuel tank empty? If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
• Is the fuel tank cap loose? If it is, tighten it securely.

The light will go off after several driving trips.

If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

When the battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sound.

■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on

Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire pressure warning light.

■ The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes

The tire pressure warning light may come

on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).

■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire

The spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire.

Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function properly →P.285

If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute

If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.

WARNING

■ If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on

Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Lexus dealer. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on

The steering wheel may become extremely heavy. When steering wheel operations are heavier than usual, grip the steering wheel firmly and operate it using more force than usual.

■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.

▶ Vehicles with a spare tire
- Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.
- If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus dealer.
- Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
▶ Vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit
- Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.
- If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire is flat, repair the flat tire by using emergency tire puncture repair kit.
- Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

WARNING

■ Maintenance of the tires

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.

NOTICE

■ To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly

Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

If a warning message is dis- played

The multi-information display shows warnings of system malfunctions, incorrectly performed operations, and messages that indicate a need for maintenance. When a message is shown, perform the correction procedure appropriate to the message.

A Master warning light

The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display.

B Multi-information display

Follow the instructions of the message on the multi-information display.

If any of the warning messages are shown again after the following actions have been performed, contact your Lexus dealer.

Messages and warnings

The warning lights and warning buzzers operate as follows depending on the content of the message. If a message indicates the need for inspection by a dealer, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

	Warning buzzer*	Warning
Comes on Sounds		Indicates an important situation, such as when a system related to driving is malfunctioning or that danger may result if the correction procedure is not performed
Flashes Sounds		Indicates a situation, such as when damage to the vehicle or danger may result
Comes on Does not sound		Indicates a condition, such as malfunction of electrical components, their condition, or indicates the need for maintenance
Flashes Does not sound		Indicates a situation, such as when an operation has been performed incorrectly, or indicates how to perform an operation correctly

• In some situations, the master warning light and warning buzzer may not operate as specified. In this case, follow the instructions displayed in the warning message.
• If a warning light comes on or flashes at the same time that a warning message is displayed, take corrective action according to the warning light. (→P.314)

^* : A buzzer sounds the first time a message is shown on the multi-information display.

■ Warning messages

The warning messages explained below may differ from the actual messages according to operation conditions and vehicle specifications.

■ Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard due to being in a noisy location or audio sound.

If "Engine Oil Level Low Add or Replace" is displayed

The engine oil level is low. Check the level of the engine oil, and add if necessary. (→P.277)

This message may appear if the vehicle is stopped on a slope. Move the vehicle to a level surface and check to see if the message disappears.

If "Engine Stopped Steering Power Low" is displayed

This message is displayed if the engine is stopped while driving.

When steering wheel operations are heavier than usual, grip the steering wheel firmly and operate it using more force than usual.

If "Power Turned Off to Save Battery" is displayed

Power was turned off due to the automatic

power off function. Next time when starting the engine, increase the engine speed slightly and maintain that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery.

If "Headlight System Malfunction Visit Your Dealer" is displayed

The following systems may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

●The LED headlight system
● The automatic headlight leveling system
● Automatic High Beam

If "Radar Cruise Control Unavailable See Owner's Manual" is displayed

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range system is suspended temporarily or until the problem shown in the message is resolved. (causes and coping methods: →P.158)

If "Radar Cruise Control Unavailable" is displayed

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range system cannot be used temporarily. Use the system when it becomes available again.

If a message that indicates the malfunction of front camera is displayed

The following systems may be suspended until the problem shown in the message is resolved. ( P.158, 317)

●PCS (Pre-Collision System)
● LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
●Automatic High Beam
● RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped)
● Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

If a message that indicates the malfunction of radar sensor is displayed

The following systems may be suspended until the problem shown in the message is resolved. ( P.158, 314)

●PCS (Pre-Collision System)
●LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
● Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

If "Maintenance Required Soon" is displayed

Indicates that all maintenance according to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule ^* should be performed soon.

Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) after the message has been reset. If necessary, perform maintenance. Please reset the message after the maintenance is performed. (→P.267)

*: Refer to the separate "Scheduled Maintenance" or "Owner's Manual Supplement" for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.

If "Maintenance Required Visit Your Dealer" is displayed

Indicates that all maintenance is required to correspond to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule ^* .

Comes on approximately 5000 miles (8000 km) after the message has been reset. (The indicator will not work properly unless the message has been reset.) Perform the necessary maintenance. Please reset the message after the maintenance is performed. (→P.267)

*: Refer to the separate "Scheduled Maintenance" or "Owner's Manual Supplement" for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.

If "Engine Maintenance Required Visit Your Dealer" is displayed

The engine or an engine component is malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

If "Active Rear Wing Off Go to Settings to turn On" is displayed

The active rear wing switch was pressed when the active rear wing ^* was disabled. Enable the active rear wing before pressing the active rear wing switch. (→P.208)

*: If equipped

If a message that indicates the need for visiting your Lexus dealer is displayed

The system or part shown on the multi-information display is malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

If "See Owner's Manual" is displayed

• If the following messages are shown, following the instructions, accordingly.
  • "Engine Coolant Temp High" (→P.352)
  • "TransmissionFluidTempHigh" (→P.132)

- If any of the following messages are shown on the multi-information display, it may indicate a malfunction. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

- "Access System with Elec. Key Malfunction"

- If any of the following messages are shown on the multi-information display, it may indicate a malfunction. Immediately stop the vehicle and contact your Lexus dealer.

• "Braking Power Low"
  • "Charging System Malfunction"
• "Oil Pressure Low"

NOTICE

■ "High Power Consumption Partial Limit On AC/Heater Operation" is frequently shown

There is a possible malfunction relating to the charging system or the battery may be deteriorating. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

If you have a flat tire (vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit)

Your vehicle is not equipped with a spare tire, but instead is equipped with an emergency tire puncture repair kit.

A puncture caused by a nail or screw passing through the tire tread can be repaired temporarily with the emergency tire puncture repair kit.

WARNING

If you have a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire. Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair. Driving with a flat tire may cause a circumferential groove on the side wall. In such a case, the tire may explode when using the emergency tire puncture repair kit, resulting in death or serious injury.

Before repairing the vehicle

• Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.
• Set the parking brake.
• Shift the shift lever to P.
• Stop the engine.
• Turn on the emergency flashers. (→P.306)
• Check the degree of the tire damage.

A tire should only be repaired with the emergency tire puncture repair kit if

the damage is caused by a nail or screw passing through the tire tread.

• Do not remove the nail or screw from the tire. Removing the object may widen the opening and disenable emergency repair with the kit.
  • To avoid sealant leakage, move the vehicle until the area of the puncture, if known, is positioned at the top of the tire.

Side profile illustration of a car wheel rim and side panel, showing no text or symbols

A flat tire that cannot be repaired with the emergency tire puncture repair kit

In the following cases, the tire cannot be repaired with the emergency tire puncture repair kit. Contact your Lexus dealer.

• When the tire is damaged due to driving without sufficient air pressure
• When the tire lost air pressure due to a crack or damage in the tire sidewall
• When the tire is visibly separated from the wheel
• When the cut or damage to the tread is 0.16 in. (4 mm) long or more
• When the wheel is damaged
• When 2 or more sharp objects, such as nails or screws, have passed through the tread on a single tire
• When there is more than one hole or cut in the damaged tire
• When the sealant has expired

Location of the emergency tire puncture repair kit and tools

A Wheel bolt wrench

B Jack handle*
C Wheel bolt socket
D Guide pin
E Screwdriver
F Emergency tire puncture repair kits
G Towing eyelet
H Jack*

(Use of the jack:→P.339)

*: They can be purchased at your Lexus dealer.

Emergency tire puncture repair kit components

▶ Bottle

A Air pressure gauge
B Compressor switch
C Power plug
D Hose
E Air release cap

Emergency tire puncture repair kit

● The sealant has a limited lifespan. The expiry date is marked on the bottle. The

sealant should be replaced before the expiry date. Contact your Lexus dealer for replacement.

● The sealant stored in the emergency tire puncture repair kit can be used only once to temporarily repair a single tire. If the sealant in the bottle and other parts of the kit have been used and need to be purchased, contact your Lexus dealer.

● The sealant can be used when the outside temperature is from -40^ ( -40^ ) to 140^ ( 60^ ).

● The kit is exclusively designed for size and type of tires originally installed on your vehicle. Do not use it for tires that a different size than the original ones, or for any other purposes.

- If the sealant gets on your clothes, it may stain.

- If the sealant adheres to a wheel or the surface of the vehicle body, the stain may not be removable if it is not cleaned at once. Immediately wipe away the sealant with a wet cloth.

● During operation of the kit, a loud operation noise is produced. This does not indicate a malfunction.

- Do not use the emergency tire puncture repair kit to check or to adjust the tire pressure.

■ Note for checking the emergency tire puncture repair kit

- Check the sealant expiry date occasionally. The expiry date is shown on the bottle.

- Do not use sealant whose expiry date has already passed. Otherwise, repairs conducted using the emergency tire puncture repair kit may not be performed properly.

- Replace the liquid sealant bottle of the emergency tire puncture repair kit before it's expiration date. For information on replacement, contact your Lexus dealer.

WARNING

■ Caution while driving

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause an accident.

● The emergency tire puncture repair kit is made exclusively for your vehicle. Do not use it on other vehicles.

- Do not use the emergency tire puncture repair kit for tires that are a different size than the specified ones or for any other purpose. Doing so may cause the tires to not be repaired properly.

■ Precautions for use of the sealant

- Ingesting the sealant is hazardous to your health. If you ingest sealant, consume as much water as possible, then immediately consult a doctor.

- If sealant gets in eyes or adheres to skin, immediately wash it off with water. If discomfort persists, consult a doctor.

Taking out the emergency tire puncture repair kits

1 Hold the hook and lift up the luggage mat.

Diagram showing a device inside a car with an arrow indicating rotation, and a magnified inset highlighting the device's rotation (no text or symbols present)

2 Secure the luggage mat using the hook.

Interior view of a car trunk with a plastic cover and an inset showing a close-up of the blade (no text or symbols visible)

3 Take out the emergency tire puncture repair kits.

Top-down view of a car's front compartment showing internal components and two red arrows indicating specific areas (no text or symbols present)

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to luggage mat

When closing the trunk lid, do not leave the luggage mat lever hooked on the edge of the trunk.

Emergency repair method

1 Remove the emergency tire puncture repair kit from the plastic bag.

The sticker enclosed with the bottle will be attached at a specified location. (See step 10.)

2 Pull out the hose and power plug from the compressor.

Diagram of an electronic device showing internal components with two pink arrows indicating directional flow (no text or symbols present)

3 Connect the bottle to the compressor.

Insert the bottle straight into the compressor to connect it, and make sure that the claws are securely engaged to the compressor as shown in the illustration.

4 Connect the hose to the bottle.

Make sure that the hose is securely connected to the bottle, as shown in the illus-

tration.

5 Remove the valve cap from the valve of the punctured tire.

Diagram of a car wheel with a highlighted circular component and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

6 Extend the hose and remove the air release cap.

Store the air release cap where it will not

be lost, as it will be used later.

3D illustration of a cable with threaded end and connector, showing a pink arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

You will use the air release cap again. Therefore keep it in a safe place.

7 Connect the hose to the valve of the flat tire.

Screw the end of the hose clockwise as far as possible.

Diagram of a car wheel with a cable inserted, showing a red arrow pointing to the wheel (no text or symbols present)

8 Make sure that the compressor switch is off.

9 Connect the power plug to the power outlet socket. (→P.238)

10 Attach the sticker at a position where it is easily seen from the driver's seat.

Tire inflation pressure is specified on the label as shown. (→P.361)

Interior view of a car door with a black arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

12 Start the engine. ( P.128)

13 To inject the sealant and inflate the tire, turn the compressor switch on.

Illustration of a vintage computer with an inset showing a black key inserted into the screen (no text or symbols visible)

14 Inflate the tire until the specified air pressure is reached.

A The tire pressure gauge will temporarily rise to 44-58 psi (300-400 kPa, 3.0-4.0 kg/cm ^2 ) and then gradually decrease.

B Approximately 1-5 minutes after the switch is turned on, the tire pressure gauge will display the actual tire inflation pressure..

When checking the tire inflation pressure, turn the compressor switch off. In order to not over inflate the tire, check the tire inflation pressure multiple times while inflating the tire.

It takes approximately 5-20 minutes (depending on ambient temperature) to inflate the tire to the specified tire inflation pressure. If the specified tire inflation pressure is not reached after 25 minutes or more, the tire cannot be repaired. Turn the compressor switch off and contact your Lexus dealer.

If the tire inflation pressure exceeds the specified air pressure, let out some air to adjust the tire inflation pressure. ( P.334,

361)

15 Make sure that the compressor switch is off and then disconnect the power plug from the power outlet and the hose from the valve of the tire.

Some sealant may leak when the hose is removed.

16 Install the valve cap onto the valve of the emergency repaired tire.

17 Attach the air release cap to the end of the hose.

If the air release cap is not installed, liquid sealant may leak onto clothing, the vehicle, etc.

Illustration of a cable with threaded end and pink arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

18 Temporarily store the bottle in the trunk while it is connected to the compressor.

19 To ensure the liquid sealant is distributed evenly within the tire, safely drive the vehicle approximately 3 miles (5 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) or less immediately.

20 After driving, park the vehicle on a level surface and connect the emergency tire puncture repair kit again.

Before connecting the hose, be sure to

remove the air release cap.

Diagram showing car interior components with zoomed-in insets highlighting a cable being inserted (no text or symbols present)

21 Turn the compressor switch on for a few seconds and then turn it off and check the tire inflation pressure.

A If the tire inflation pressure is below 19 psi (130 kPa, 1.3 kgf/cm ^2 or bar): The puncture cannot be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer.

B If the tire inflation pressure is 19 psi (130 kPa, 1.3 kgf/cm ^2 or bar) or higher, but less than the specified air pressure: Proceed to 22.

C If the tire inflation pressure is the specified air pressure ( P.361): Proceed to 23.

22 Turn the compressor switch on to inflate the tire until the specified air pressure is reached. Drive for about 3 miles (5 km) and then perform 20.

23 Attach the air release cap to the end of the hose.

If the air release cap is not installed, liquid sealant may leak onto clothing, the vehicle, etc.

Illustration of a cable with threaded end and pink arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

24Store the bottle in the trunk while it is connected to the compressor.

25 Carefully drive the vehicle at a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or less to a Lexus dealer within 62 miles (100 km), taking care to avoid sudden braking, acceleration and steering inputs.

When having the tire repaired or replaced at a Lexus dealer, be sure to inform them that the emergency tire puncture repair kit has been used.

■ After a tire is repaired with the emergency tire puncture repair kit

● The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter should be replaced.

● Even if the tire inflation pressure is at the recommended level, the tire pressure warning light may come on/flash.

If the tire is inflated to more than the recommended level

1 Disconnect the hose from the valve.

2 Install the air release cap to the end of the hose and push the protrusion on the

air release cap into the valve to let some air out.

Close-up of a car wheel rim with attached cable and a small inset showing a pink arrow pointing to a specific area (no text or symbols visible)

3 Disconnect the hose from the valve, remove the air release cap from the hose and then reconnect the hose.
4 Turn the compressor switch on for a few seconds and then turn it off and check the tire inflation pressure.

If the tire inflation pressure is lower than the specified tire inflation pressure, turn the compressor switch on and increase the tire inflation pressure until it reaches the specified value.

■ When disposing of the liquid sealant

The liquid sealant contains materials which are harmful to the environment.

When disposing of liquid sealant or a liquid sealant bottle, contact your Lexus dealer or contact your local government for information on the appropriate authorized waste disposal method.

WARNING

When a tire is flat

Do not drive continuously on a flat tire. Driving even a short distance with a flat tire may damage the tire and wheel beyond repair. If a flat tire is driven on continuously, cracks may form in the sidewall of the tire. If the emergency tire puncture repair kit is used in this situation, the tire may explode.

■ When fixing the flat tire

- Stop your vehicle in a safe and flat area.

WARNING

- Do not touch the wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the vehicle has been driven. After the vehicle has been driven, the wheels and the area around the brakes may be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts may result in burns.

- Connect the valve and hose securely with the tire installed on the vehicle.

- If the hose is not properly connected to the valve, air leakage may occur or sealant may be sprayed out.

- If the hose comes off the valve while inflating the tire, there is a risk that the hose will move abruptly due to air pressure.

● After inflation of the tire has completed, the sealant may splatter when the hose is disconnected or some air is let out of the tire.

● Follow the operation procedure to repair the tire. If the procedure is not followed, the sealant may spray out.

- Keep back from the tire while it is being repaired, as there is a chance of it bursting while the repair operation is being performed. If you notice any cracks or deformation of the tire, turn off the compressor switch and stop the repair operation immediately.

- If the emergency tire puncture repair kit is continuously operated for a long time, the compressor may overheat. Do not operate the compressor for 40 minutes or more continuously.

● Parts of the emergency tire puncture repair kit become hot during operation. Be careful when handling it during and after operation. Do not touch the metal parts around where the bottle and compressor connect as they will be extremely hot.

- Do not attach the vehicle speed warning sticker to an area other than the one indicated. If the sticker is attached to an area where an SRS airbag is located, such as the pad of the steering wheel, it may prevent the SRS airbag from operating properly.

■ Driving to spread the liquid sealant evenly

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.

●Drive the vehicle carefully at a low speed. Be especially careful when turning and cornering.

- If the vehicle does not drive straight or you feel a pull through the steering wheel, stop the vehicle and check the following:

- Tire condition. The tire may have separated from the wheel.

- Tire inflation pressure. If tire inflation pressure is 19 psi (130 kPa, 1.3 kgf/cm or bar) or below, this may indicate severe tire damage.

NOTICE

■ When performing an emergency repair

● Perform the emergency repair without removing the nail or screw that has punctured the tread of the tire. If the object that has punctured the tire is removed, repair by the emergency tire puncture repair kit may not be possible.

The kit is not waterproof. Make sure that the kit is not exposed to water, such as when it is being used in the rain.

NOTICE

• Do not put the kit directly onto dusty ground such as sand at the side of the road. If the kit vacuums up dust etc., a malfunction may occur.
• Use the kit with the top facing upward. The kit cannot work properly if it is laid on its side.
  ■ Handling the emergency tire puncture repair kit
  ● The compressor power source should be 12 V DC suitable for vehicle use. Do not connect the compressor to any other source.
• If gasoline splatters on the kit, the kit may deteriorate. Take care not to allow gasoline to contact it.
  ● Put the emergency tire puncture repair kit in the plastic bag and store it where it will be free from dust and water.
• Store the emergency tire puncture repair kit in the trunk. The kit may be thrown around during sudden braking and so forth, damaging the kit.
• Store the kit in its assigned place out of reach of children.
• Do not disassemble or modify the kit. Do not subject parts such as the air pressure indicator to impacts. This may cause a malfunction.
  ■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. After use of liquid sealant, make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when repairing or replacing the tire. (→P.286)

If you have a flat tire (vehicles with a spare tire)

Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be replaced with the spare tire.

For details about tires: →P.283

WARNING

If you have a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire. Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair, which could result in an accident.

Before jacking up the vehicle

• Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.
• Set the parking brake.
• Shift the shift lever to P.
• Stop the engine.
• Turn on the emergency flashers. (→P.306)

Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

A Spare tire
B Tool bags
C Wheel bolt wrench
D Towing eyelet

E Screwdriver
F Guide pin
G Wheel bolt socket
H Jack handle
I Jack

WARNING

■ Using the tire jack

Observe the following precautions. Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack, leading to death or serious injury.

- Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains.

- Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle or a jack designed for this vehicle, purchased from a lexus dealer, when replacing a flat tire. Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.

● Put the jack properly in its jack point.

- Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack.

- Do not start the engine or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by the jack.

- Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.

- When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.

- Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.

- Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

- When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If there are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering.

Taking out the jack

1 Remove the luggage mat.

Top-down view of a car trunk with a highlighted internal component and an upward arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

2 Take out the jack.

1 For tightening

2 For loosening

If the jack is too tightly installed to be removed by hand, insert a tool, such as the screwdriver included with the vehicle, into the hole of the jack (portion □ and loosen the jack.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to luggage mat

When closing the trunk lid, do not leave the luggage mat lever hooked onthe edge of the trunk.

Taking out the spare tire

1 Remove the luggage mat.

Top-down view of a car's rear intake frame with a pink arrow pointing to the center (no text or symbols)

2 Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.

If the center fastener cannot be turned by hand, use the wheel bolt wrench that is stored in the trunk. (To secure the tire, tighten the center fastener by hand. Do not use the wrench or other tools.)

Top-down view of a car wheel rim with a circular arrow symbol indicating rotation (no text or labels)

WARNING

■ When storing the spare tire

Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the spare tire and the body of the vehicle.

Replacing a flat tire

1 Chock the tires.

Illustration of a sedan with visible wheel and tire, showing motion blur (no text or symbols)

Flat tire	Wheel chock positions
Front left-hand side	Behind the rear right-hand side tire
Front right-hand side	Behind the rear left-hand side tire
Rear left-hand side	In front of the front right-hand side tire
Rear right-hand side	In front of the front left-hand side tire

2 Using a wheel bolt wrench, slightly loosen the wheel bolts (approximately one turn).

Illustration of a car wheel rim with a tool inserted, showing no text or symbols

3 Turn the tire jack portion by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.

The jack point guides are located under

the rocker panel. They indicate the jack point positions.

4 Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.

Hand-drawn sketch of a car wheel and bicycle leg with a pink curved arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

5 Remove the uppermost wheel bolt and install the guide pin 📂y hand.

Turn the guide pin clockwise to tighten it until it stops.

Diagram of a car wheel with labeled component 'A' (no text or symbols beyond label)

6 Remove the remaining wheel bolts and the tire.

When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to

avoid scratching the wheel surface.

Close-up of a jet engine fan blade with a red arrow pointing to the blade (no text or symbols visible)

WARNING

■ Replacing a flat tire

Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the vehicle has been driven. After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.

NOTICE

■ Precaution for CCB (Carbon Ceramic Brake) discs (if equipped)

Do not subject the carbon ceramic brake disc to strong impact.

It the carbon ceramic brake disc has been subjected to a strong impact, even if there is no obvious damage, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Installing the spare tire

1 Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surfaces and wheel bolts.

If foreign matter is not removed, the wheel bolts may loosen while the vehicle is in

motion, and the wheel may come off.

Illustration of car tire maintenance procedure showing hands adjusting wheel rim and wheel rim (no text or symbols)

2 Align a wheel bolt hole on the spare tire with the guide pin and install the spare tire

Align the center hole of the wheel with the center of the hub and securely set the spare tire so that the wheel and hub contact surfaces are touching.

3D rendering of a car wheel with a highlighted red arrow pointing to the wheel rim (no text or symbols)

3 Loosely tighten each wheel bolt by hand or using a wheel bolt socket A.

Do not use the wheel bolt socket for anything other than loosely tightening the wheel bolts by hand.

Diagram of a car wheel with a screwdriver inserted, labeled 'A' (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

4 Remove the guide pin and loosely tighten the wheel bolt as in step 3.

Diagram of a car wheel with a pink arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

5 Lower the vehicle.

Diagram showing a bicycle track with a red curved arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols present)

6 Securely tighten the wheel bolts two or three times in the order shown in the illustration using a wheel bolt wrench.

Tightening torque: 103 ft·lbf (140 N·m, 14.3 kgf·m)

7 Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.

The spare tire

- Use the spare tire temporarily, and only in

an emergency.

● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the spare tire. (→P.361)

■ When using the spare tire

As the spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.

■ When the spare tire is equipped

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires.

WARNING

Installing the tire

Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel bolts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.

The contact surfaces of the wheel bolt and wheel are designed specifically to fit together. When using wheels that were installed when the vehicle was shipped from the factory, use specialized Lexus genuine wheel bolts. Do not use wheel bolts designed for other models, model years or types even if they are Lexus genuine parts. If the vehicle does not have wheels that were installed to the vehicle when it was shipped from the factory, the factory-installed wheel bolts may not be appropriate for the wheel. Contact either the retailer where the wheels were purchased or the manufacturer of the wheels for proper installation advice.

● Never apply oil or grease to the wheel bolts or their contact surface on the wheel A.

Doing so may cause the wheel bolts to be tightened excessively, leading to damage to the wheel bolts, the threaded portion the wheel bolts install to Br the wheel.

Remove any oil or grease that has adhered when installing the wheel bolts.

● After replacing a tire, check the tightening torque as soon as possible.

- Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while the vehicle is moving.

- If a wheel bolt hole in a wheel or the threads of a wheel bolt or the wheel hub are deformed, cracked, rusty or otherwise damaged, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■ When tightening the wheel bolts

Do not tighten the wheel bolts excessively. Doing so may cause the wheel bolts, the threads of the wheel hub, or the wheel to be damaged.

Guide pin

When removing or installing a tire, make sure to use the guide pin.

Also, the guide pin is made of resin. It may be damaged if the wheel is placed anywhere other than Ar if a large amount of force is applied to the guide pin.

WARNING

Simple line drawing of a pen-like object with a labeled section 'A' (no text or symbols on the object itself)

■ When using the spare tire

- Remember that the spare tire provided is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your spare tire on another vehicle.

- Do not use more than one spare tire simultaneously.

- Replace the spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.

● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.

■ When the spare tire is attached

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:

• ABS & Brake assist

• VSC

• TRAC

• Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

• PCS (Pre-Collision System)

- EPS

• Adaptive Variable Suspension System

• LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

• VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management)

- Tire pressure warning system

• Lexus parking assist m
- Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)
- Navigation system (if equipped)

■ Speed limit when using the spare tire

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a spare tire is installed on the vehicle.

The spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

■ After using the tools and jack

Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking.

NOTICE

■ Driving with tire chains and the spare tire

Do not fit tire chains to the spare tire. Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.

■ When replacing the tires

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

■ Precaution for CCB (Carbon Ceramic Brake) discs (if equipped)

→P.340

If the engine will not start

If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are being followed ( P.128), consider each of the following points:

The engine will not start even though the starter motor operates normally.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

• There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle's tank. Refuel the vehicle.
• The engine may be flooded. Try to restart the engine again following correct starting procedures. (→P.128)
• There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system. (→P.59)

The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

● The battery may be discharged. (→P.349)
● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded. (→P.280)

The starter motor does not turn over

The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as electronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse. However, an interim measure is available to start the engine. ( P.344)

The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected. (→P.280)
● The battery may be discharged. (→P.349)

Emergency start function

When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the engine if the engine switch is functioning normally:

1 Set the parking brake.
2 Shift the shift lever to P.
3 Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode.
4 Press and hold the engine switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.

Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may be

malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

If you lose your keys

New genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using another mechanical key and the key number stamped on your key number plate.

Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.

NOTICE

■ When an electronic key is lost

If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit your Lexus dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys and the card key that were provided with your vehicle.

If the fuel filler door cannot be opened

If the fuel filler door cannot be opened by pressing the center of the rear edge of the fuel filler door with the doors unlocked, the following procedure can be used to open the fuel filler door.

Opening the fuel filler door

Remove the cover inside the trunk and pull the lever.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a component with highlighted parts and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

If the electronic key does not operate properly

If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted ( P.100) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be opened and the engine can be started by following the procedure below.

■ When the electronic key does not work properly
● Make sure that the smart access system with push-button start has not been deactivated in the customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on.
- Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function. (→P.100)

NOTICE

In case of a smart access system with push-button start malfunction or other key-related problems

Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle, including the card key, to your Lexus dealer.

Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk

■ Unlocking the door

Use the mechanical key ( P.88) in order to perform the following operations:

1 Insert the mechanical key while pulling on the driver's door handle.

Diagram of a car door with a pink arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols present)

2 Unlocking the door.

Diagram of a car interior with a hand holding a battery and a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

3 Remove the key, return the handle, and then pull the handle again.

■ Locking the door

1 Move the inside lock button to the lock position.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing the intake compartment with a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

2 Close the door.

■ Opening the trunk

Turn the mechanical key clockwise to open. ( P.60)

Diagram of a car showing a hand holding a tool near the window, with an inset highlighting a mechanical component (no text or symbols present)

■ Key linked functions

1 Locks both side door
2 Closes the windows and moon roof (if equipped) (turn and hold) ^*
3 Unlocks the door

Turning the key rearward unlocks the driver's door. Turning the key again unlocks the other door.

4 Opens the windows and moon roof (if equipped) (turn and hold) ^*

*: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

WARNING

■ When using the mechanical key and operating the power windows or moon roof

Operate the power window or moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window or moon roof. Also, do not allow children to operate the mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the power window or moon roof.

Starting the engine

1 Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.
2 Touch the Lexus emblem side of the electronic key to the engine switch.

Illustration of a person using a steering wheel and a handheld device to switch a car (no text or symbols visible)

When the electronic key is detected, a buzzer sounds and the engine switch will turn to IGNITION ON mode.

When the smart access system with push-button start is deactivated in customization setting, the engine switch will turn to ACCESSORY mode.

3 Firmly depress the brake pedal and

check that is shown on the multi-information display.

4 Press the engine switch.

In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Stopping the engine

Shift the shift lever to P and press the engine switch as you normally do when stopping the engine.

Electronic key battery

As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. ( P.295)

■ Alarm (For Canada)

Using the mechanical key to lock the doors will not set the alarm system.

If a door is unlocked using the mechanical key when the alarm system is set, the alarm may be triggered.

■ Changing engine switch modes

Release the brake pedal and press the engine switch in step 3 above.

The engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed. (→P.130)

If the vehicle battery is discharged

The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle's battery is discharged.

You can also call your Lexus dealer or a qualified repair shop.

Restarting the engine

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below.

1 Confirm that the electronic key is being carried.

When connecting the jumper (or booster) cables, depending on the situation, the alarm may activate and doors locked.

(→P.61)

Illustration of a person standing beside a car with two inset photos showing a battery device (no text or symbols visible)

2 Open the hood. ( P.274)

3 Remove the engine cover. Raise the front of the engine cover to remove the front clips, and then raise the rear of the engine cover to remove the rear clips.

4 Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to A on your vehicle and connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to B in the second vehicle. Then, connect a negative cable clamp to C in the second vehicle and connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to D

Use jumper cables that can reach the specified terminals and connecting point.

A Positive (+) battery terminal (your vehicle)

B Positive (+) battery terminal (second vehicle)
C Negative (-) battery terminal (second vehicle)
D Metallic point shown in the illustration

5 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.

6 Open and close any of the door of your vehicle with the engine switch off.

7 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the engine of your vehicle by turning the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

8 Once the vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected.

Once the engine starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged

The engine cannot be started by push-starting.

■ To prevent battery discharge

● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
- Charging the battery

The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges automatically during driving.)

■ When recharging or replacing the battery

• In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart access system with push-button start when the battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.
  ● The engine may not start on the first attempt after the battery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.
  The engine switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the battery, turn the engine switch off. If you are unsure what mode the engine switch was in before the battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting the battery.

■ When replacing the battery

• Use a battery that conforms to European regulations.
  Use a battery that the case size is same as the previous one (LN3), 20 hour rate capacity (20HR) is equivalent (70Ah) or greater, and performance rating (CCA) is equivalent (592A) or greater.
• If the sizes differ, the battery cannot be properly secured.
• If the 20 hour rate capacity is low, even if the time period where the vehicle is not used is a short time, battery may discharge and the engine may not be able to start.
• For details, consult your Lexus dealer.

WARNING

■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery:

Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.

- Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the "+" terminal to come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as brackets or unpainted metal.

- Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with each other.

- Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the battery.

Battery precautions

The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery:

- When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.

- Do not lean over the battery.

In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention. Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received.

● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts.

- Do not allow children near the battery.

NOTICE

■ When handling jumper cables

When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in the cooling fans or engine drive belt.

■ When connecting jumper cables

Make sure to connect jumper cables to the specified terminals and connecting point. Failure to do so may adversely affect the electronic devices or damage to them.

If your vehicle overheats

The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.

• The engine coolant temperature gauge ( P.68) is in the red zone or a loss of engine power is experienced. (For example, the vehicle speed does not increase.)
• “Engine Coolant Temp High Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s Manual” is shown on the multi-information display.
• Steam comes out from under the hood.

Correction procedures

1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system, and then stop the engine.
2 If you see steam: Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides. If you do not see steam: Carefully lift the hood.
3 After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses and

radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.

A Cooling fans
B Radiator

If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Lexus dealer.

4 The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the full ("FULL") and low ("LOW") lines on the reservoir.

A Reservoir cap
B "FULL"
C "LOW"

5 Add coolant if necessary.

Water can be used in an emergency if

coolant is unavailable.

Illustration of a car engine with a funnel pouring liquid into a container, showing internal components and wiring (no text or symbols)

6 Start the engine and turn the air conditioning system on to check that the radiator cooling fans operate and to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.

The fans operate when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a cold start. Confirm that the fans are operating by checking the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly.

(The fans may not operate in freezing temperatures.)

7 If the fans are not operating:

Stop the engine immediately and contact your Lexus dealer.

If the fans are operating:

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer.

WARNING

■ When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.

- If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.

- Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from the fans and belts. Failure to do so may cause the hands or clothing to be caught, resulting in serious injury.

● While the engine and radiator are hot, do not loosen or remove the coolant reservoircap. High temperature steam or coolant could spray out.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a close-up inset showing a camera lens (no text or symbols visible)

NOTICE

■ When adding engine coolant

Add coolant slowly after the engine has cooled down sufficiently. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.

■ To prevent damage to the cooling system

Observe the following precautions:

● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.).

- Do not use any coolant additive.

If the vehicle becomes stuck

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:

Recovering procedure

1 Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.
2 Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the rear wheels.
3 Place wood, stones or some other material under the rear wheels to help provide traction.
4 Restart the engine.
5 Shift the shift lever to D or R and release the parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.

■ When it is difficult to free the vehicle

Press the

itch to turn off TRAC.

WARNING

■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.

■ When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the rear wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than necessary.
- If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.

8-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) 356

Fuel information......363

Tire information....365

8-2. Customization

Customizable features......374

8-3. Items to initialize

Items to initialize....384

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions and weight

Overall length 185.4 in. (4710 mm)
Overall width 72.6 in. (1845 mm)
Overall height*		54.7 in. (1390 mm)
Wheelbase 107.5 in. (2730 mm)
Tread*	Front 61.2 in. (1555 mm)
	Rear 61.4 in. (1560 mm)
Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants + luggage) 700 lb. (320 kg)

*: Unladen vehicle

Seating capacity

Seating capacity 4 (Front 2, Rear 2)

Vehicle identification

■ Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel and in the engine compartment.

Diagram of a car interior showing a highlighted rectangular component with an arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols present)

Interior view of a car engine bay with visible structural components and airflow direction arrow (no text or symbols)

This number is also on the Certification

Label.

Interior view of a car showing the side panel and seatbelt with an arrow pointing to a specific component (no text or symbols visible)

■ Engine number

The engine number is located as shown.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)

Engine

Model 5.0 L 8-cylinder (2UR-GSE) engine
Type 8-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke	3.70 × 3.52 in. (94.0 × 89.5 mm)
Displacement	303.2 cu. in. (4969 cm ^3 )
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment

Fuel

Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Octane Rating 91 (Research Octane Number	96) or higher
Fuel tank capacity (Reference) 17.5 gal. (66.4 L, 14.6 Imp. gal.)

Lubrication system

■ Oil capacity (Drain and refill [Reference ^* ])

With filter 9.3 qt. (8.8 L, 7.7 Imp. qt.)
Without filter 8.3 qt. (7.9 L, 7.0 Imp. qt.)

*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine oil. When actually adding the engine oil, make sure that the oil level is between the low level mark and refill upper limit mark (→P.276). Warm up and turn off the engine, wait about 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.

■ Engine oil selection

"Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved "Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.

Oil grade: ILSAC GF-6A multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.

If SAE 5W-30 is not available, SAE 10W-30 oil may be used. However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W-30 at the next oil change.

A Outside temperature

Oil viscosity (5W-30 is explained here as an example):

• The 5W in 5W-30 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

How to read oil container label:

The International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.

Cooling system

Capacity*	12.2 qt. (11.5 L, 10.1 Imp. qt.)
Coolant type	Use either of the following:“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technologyDo not use plain water alone.

*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.

Ignition system (spark plug)

- Spark plug

Make DENSO FK20HBR-J8
Gap 0.031 in. (0.8 mm)

NOTICE

■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.

Electrical system (battery)

Open voltage at 68°F (20°C):	12.3 V or higherIf the voltage is lower than the standard value,charge the battery.(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the engineand all lights are turned off.)
Charging rates 5 A max.

Automatic transmission

Fluid capacity*	11.8 qt. (11.2 L, 9.9 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS

* : The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.

NOTICE

■ Automatic transmission fluid type

Using transmission fluid other than the above type may cause abnormal noise or vibration, or damage the transmission of your vehicle.

Differential

Oil capacity 1.42 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and viscosity	Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil LX 75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent*1

*1: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with "Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil" at the factory. Use Lexus approved "Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil" or an equivalent oil of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.

Brakes

Pedal clearance*	4.0 in. (101 mm) Min.
Pedal free play	0.04—0.24 in. (1.0—6.0 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Fluid type	SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3, or SAE J1704 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 brake fluid

*: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112.4 lbf (500 N, 51.0 kgf) while the engine is running.

Steering

Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

Tires and wheels

▶ Type A

Tire size	Front tires: 255/35ZR19 (92Y)Rear tires: 275/35ZR19 (96Y)
Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)	Driving under normal conditionsFront: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)Driving at high speeds (above 137 mph [220 km/h]) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)Add 8 psi (50 kPa, 0.5 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the fronttires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum coldtire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size	Front wheels: 19 × 9JRear wheels: 19 × 10J
Wheel bolt torque 103 ft·lbf (1	40 N·m, 14.3 kgf·m)

▶ Type B

Tire size	Front tires: 255/35ZR19 (92Y)Rear tires: 275/35ZR19 (96Y)Spare tire: 225/40ZR19 (93Y)
Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)	Driving under normal conditionsFront: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)Spare: 42 psi (290 kPa, 2.9 kgf/cm2 or bar)Driving at high speeds (above 137 mph [220 km/h]) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)Add 8 psi (50 kPa, 0.5 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the fronttires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum coldtire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size	Front wheels: 19 × 9JRear wheels: 19 × 10JSpare wheels: 19 × 8 1/2J
Wheel bolt torque 103 ft·lbf (1	40 N·m, 14.3 kgf·m)

Light bulbs

	Light bulbs Bulb No. W Type
Exterior	Rear turn signal lights	—	21	A
Interior	Vanity lights — 8 B
	Footwell lights 194 3.8 B
	Trunk light — 5 B

A: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
B: Wedge base bulbs (clear)

Fuel information

You must only use unleaded gaso- line.

Select premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance and fuel economy.

If the octane rating is less than 91, damage to the engine may occur and may void the vehicle warranty.

At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A..

Gasoline quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.

■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
- Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid the build-up of engine deposits.
- All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems, per EPA's lowest additives concentration program.
- Lexus strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to the official website www.toptiergas.com.
■ Recommendation of the use of low emissions gasoline

Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol, as well as reformulated gasolines, are available in some cities. These fuels are typically acceptable for use, providing they meet other fuel requirements.

Lexus recommends these fuels, since the formulations allow for reduced vehicle emissions.

■ Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline
- Use only gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol. DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that could contain more than 15% ethanol, including from any pump labeled E30 (30% ethanol [A] E50 (50% ethanol [B], E85 (85% ethanol [ ]) C (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 15% ethanol).

• If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 91.
• Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
  ■ Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.

If your engine knocks

• Consult your Lexus dealer.
• You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or

driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

NOTICE

■ Notice on fuel quality

- Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be damaged.

- Do not use leaded gasoline. Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle's three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.

- Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated. Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.

- Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level previously stated may cause persistent heavy knocking. At worst, this may lead to engine damage and will void the vehicle warranty.

■ When refueling with gasohol

Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.

■ Fuel-related poor driveability

If poor driveability (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.) is encountered after using a different type of fuel, discontinue the use of that type of fuel.

Tire information

Typical tire symbols

A Tire size ( P.366)
B DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (→P.366)
C Location of treadwear indicators ( P.283)
D Tire ply composition and materials

Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.

E Radial tires or bias-ply tires

A radial tire has "RADIAL" on the sidewall. A tire not marked "RADIAL" is a bias-ply tire.

F TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE

A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

G Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure ( P.368)

H Maximum cold tire inflation pressure ( P.368)

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

I Uniform tire quality grading

For details, see "Uniform Tire Quality Grading" that follows.

J Summer tires or all season tires ( P.284)

An all season tire has "M+S" on the sidewall. A tire not marked "M+S" is a summer tire.

Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

▶ Type A

graph TD
    A["DOT"] --> B["A"]
    C["XX"] --> D["C"]
    E["XX"] --> F["D"]
    G["XXX"] --> H["E"]
    I["XXXX"] --> J["F"]
    K["G"] --> L["G"]

A DOT symbol*
B Tire Identification Number (TIN)
C Tire manufacturer's identification mark
D Tire size code
E Manufacturer's optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)
F Manufacturing week
G Manufacturing year

*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

▶ Type B

graph TD
    A["DOT"] --> B["A"]
    C["XXX"] --> D["C"]
    F["XXXXXXXX"] --> G["F"]
    H["XXXXX"] --> I["D"]
    J["XXXXX"] --> K["E"]

A DOT symbol*
B Tire Identification Number (TIN)

C Tire manufacturer's identification mark
D Manufacturing week
E Manufacturing year
F Manufacturer's code

*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

Tire size

■ Typical tire size information

The illustration indicates typical tire size.

A Tire use (P = Passenger car, T = Temporary use)
B Section width (millimeters)
C Aspect ratio (tire height to section width)
D Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
E Wheel diameter (inches)
F Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
G Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)

Tire dimensions

A Section width
B Tire height
C Wheel diameter

Tire section names

A Bead
B Sidewall
C Shoulder
D Tread
E Belt
F Inner liner
G Reinforcing rubber
H Carcass
I Rim lines
J Bead wires
K Chafer

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.

Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

DOT quality grades

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use.

Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

■ Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

■ Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire inflation pressure	Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
Maximum inflation pressure	The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended inflation pressure	Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
Accessory weight	The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not)
Curb weight	The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine
Maximum loaded vehicle weight	The sum of:(a) Curb weight(b) Accessory weight(c) Vehicle capacity weight(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight	150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows
Occupant distribution	Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1* below
Production options weight	The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim
Rim	A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation	The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity)	The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity
Vehicle maximum load on the tire	The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on the tire	The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing by two
Weather side	The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire
Bead	The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation	A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead
Bias ply tire	A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
Carcass	The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking The breaking away of pieces	of the tread or sidewall
Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation	The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds
Cracking	Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material
CT	A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire	A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner	The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire
Innerliner separation	The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass
Intended outboard sidewall	(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire	A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating	The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating	The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible inflation pressure	The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated
Measuring rim	The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements
Open splice	Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width	The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
Passenger car tire	A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation	A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies
Pneumatic tire	A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load
Radial ply tire	A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire	A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
Section width	The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands
Sidewall That portion of a tire between	the tread and bead
Sidewall separation	The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall
Snow tire	A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( at least one sidewall
Test rim	The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
Tread	That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road
Tread rib	A tread section running circumferentially around a tire
Tread separation Pulling away of the	tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators (TWI)	The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture	The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

*: Table 1 - Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants	Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants	Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in front
5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat
11 through 15 5		2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat
16 through 20 7		2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

Customizable features

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. The settings of these features can be changed by using the meter control switches, the Remote Touch or at your Lexus dealer.

Customizing vehicle features

■ Changing by using the meter control switches

1 Press or < to select.

2 Operate the switches to select a desired item.

3 Change the setting by referring to the message displayed on the screen.

■ Changing by using the Remote Touch

1 Press the "MENU" button on the Remote Touch.

2 Select "Setup" on the menu screen and select "Vehicle".

3 Select "Vehicle Customization", "LEXUS Park Assist" or "Drive Mode Customization".

This system can also be operated by the touch screen.

Various setting can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can be changed for details.

For details on the Remote Touch, refer to the "NAVIGATION AND MULTI-MEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

■ When customizing using the Remote Touch

Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P. Also, to prevent battery discharge, leave the engine running while customizing the features.

WARNING

During customization

As the engine needs to be running during customization, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE

During customization

To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while customizing features.

Customizable features

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.

A Settings that can be changed using the Remote Touch
B Settings that can be changed using the meter control switches

C Settings that can be changed by your Lexus dealer

Definition of symbols: O = Available, - = Not available

■ Gauges, meters and multi-information display ( P.64, 68, 75)

Function^*1	Default setting Customized setting		A	B	C
Language English		French	○○-
		Spanish
Units^*2	miles (MPG US)	km (km/L)	○○-
		km (L/100 km)
		miles (MPG Impe-rial)
Switch settings	Drive information 1	Desired status screen *3	-○-
Drive information 1	Current fuel con-sumption	Customizable items: →P.77	-○-
	Average fuel econ-omy (after reset)
Drive information 2	Distance (driving range)
	Average vehicle speed (after reset)
Drive information 3	Average fuel con-sumption (after refuel)
	Elapsed time (after start)
Pop-up display On Off - O-
Rev indicator Setting 2		Setting 1	-○-Setting
		Off
Rev peak On Off - O-
Gauge options Normal		Custom	- O	-Eco drive
		Sport
Speed indicator Off On - O -
Speed indicator settings 75 mph (120 km/h)		30 mph to 100 mph(50 km/h to 160km/h) ^*4	- O	-
Eco Driving Indicator Light	On	Off	-	O	-
Clock^*5	12-hour display 24-hour display - O -

*1: For details about each function: →P.82
*2: The default setting varies according to country.
*3. Some status screens cannot be registered (indicated on the multi-information display)
*4: Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.
*5: On multi-information display

■ Door lock ( P.92, 95, 346)

Function	Default setting	Customized setting	A	B	C
Unlocking using a mechanical key	Driver's door unlocked in one step, both side doors unlocked in two steps	Both side doors unlocked in one step	-	-	O
Automatic door lock	Shifting the shift lever to position other than P	Off	O	O
		Vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher
Automatic door unlock	Shifting the shift lever to P	Off	O	O
		Driver's door is opened
Locking/unlocking of the trunk when both side doors are locked/unlocked	On Off	- - O

■ Smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control ( P.92, 95)

Function Default setting	Customized setting		A	B	C
Operation buzzer volume 5		Off	O-	O
		1 to 7
Operation signal (Emergency flashers)	On Off O-	O
Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked	60 seconds	Off	O-	O30	seconds
		120 seconds
Open door warning buzzer On	Off--O
Welcome light illumination control	On Off O-	O

Smart access system with push-button start ( P.92, 95, 98)

Function Default setting	Customized setting		A	B	C
Smart access system with push-button start	On Off -- O
Smart door unlocking	Driver's door	Both side doors	O	-	O
Number of consecutive door lock operations	2 times As many as desired -- O

■ Wireless remote control ( P.88, 92, 95)

Function Default setting	Customized setting		A	B	C
Wireless remote control	On	Off	-	-	O
Unlocking operation	Driver's door unlocked in one step, both side doors unlocked in two steps	Both side doors unlocked in one step	O-	O
Function Default setting Customized setting			A	B	C
Trunk unlocking operation	Press and hold (short)	One short press	--	O
		Push twice
		Press and hold (long)
		Off
Alarm (panic mode) On Off -	- O

■ Driving position memory ^* (→P.105)

Function Default setting	Customized setting		A	B	C
Selecting the door linking driving position memory with door unlock operation	Driver's door Both side doors — — O

*: If equipped

■ Power easy access system ( P.105)

Function Default setting Customized setting			A	B	C
Driver's seat movement when exiting the vehicle	Full	Off	O-	O
		Partial
Steering wheel movement*	On Off--O

*: If equipped

■ Power windows ( P.112)

Function Default setting	Customized setting		A	B	C
Mechanical key linked operation	Off On -- O
Wireless remote control linked operation	Off On (Open only) -- O
Wireless remote control linked operation signal (buzzer)	On Off -- O

■ Moon roof ^* (→P.114)

Function Default setting Customized setting			A	B	C
Mechanical key linked operation	Off On -- O
Wireless remote control linked operation	Off On (Open only) -- O
Wireless remote control linked operation signal (buzzer)	On Off -- O

*: If equipped

■ Turn signal lever ( P.135)

Function Default setting Customized setting			A	B	C
The number of times the turn signal lights flash automatically when the turn signal lever is moved to the first position during a lane change*1	3	5	--	O
		7
		Off^*2
		Off^*3

*1: After flashing the turn signal lights when turning left or right while this function is off and the turn signal lever is moved to the first position in the direction of the flashing light, the turn signal lights can be selected to be flashing or off.
*2: The turn signal lights keep flashing if the turn signal lever is moved to the first position in the direction of flashing light.
*3: The turn signal lights will be off if the turn signal lever is moved to the first position in the direction of flashing light.

■ Automatic light control system ( P.141)

Function Default setting	Customized setting		A	B	C
Light sensor sensitivity	Standard	-2 to 2	O	-	O
Time elapsed before head-lights automatically turn off after doors are closed	30 seconds	Off	O	-	060 sec
		90 seconds

Lights ( P.141)

Function Default setting Customized setting			A	B	C
Daytime running light system(except Canada)	On Off O – O

■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) ( P.160)

Function Customized setting		A	B	C
PCS (Pre-Collision System) On, Off	- O -
Adjust alert timing Early, Middle, Late	- O -

*: The system is automatically enabled each time the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.

■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) ( P.170)

Function Customized setting		A	B	C
Lane centering function	On, Off	-	O	-
Alert type	Steering wheel vibration, Buzzer	- O	-
Alert sensitivity	High, Standard	-	O	-
Vehicle sway warning function	On, Off	-	O	-
Vehicle sway warning sensitivity	High, Standard, Low	-	O	-

■ RSA (Road Sign Assist) ^*1 (→P.179)

Function	Customized setting	A	B	C
RSA (Road Sign Assist)	On, Off	-	○	-
Excess speed notification method	Display only, Display and buzzer, No notification	- ○	-
Excess speed notification level	1 mph (2 km/h), 3 mph (5 km/h), 5 mph (10 km/h)	- ○	-
Other notifications method (No-entry notification) ^2	Display only, Display and buzzer, No notification	- ○	-

*1: If equipped
*2: Vehicles with navigation system

■ Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range ( P.181)

Function Customized setting
Curve speed reduction function strength	High, Low, Off	-	O	-

Intuitive parking assist ^* (→P.200)

Function Default setting Customized setting			A	B	C
Detection distance of the front center sensor	Far Near O - O
Detection distance of the rear center sensor	Far Near O - O
Buzzer volume 21 to 3 O - O

*: If equipped

- Driving mode select switch (→P.205)

Function Default setting Customized setting
			A	B	C
Powertrain control in custom mode	Normal	Power	O-	-
		Eco
Chassis control in custom mode	Normal Sport	O--
Air conditioning operation in custom mode	Normal	Eco	O	-	-

■ Active rear wing ^* (→P.208)

Function Default setting Customized setting
Operation of the active rear wing	Off On	- ○ ○

*: If equipped

■ Automatic air conditioning system ( P.223)

Function Default setting Customized setting			A	B	C
A/C auto switch operation	On	Off	○	-	○
Exhaust gas sensor sensitivity	Standard	-3 to 3	○	-	○

■ Seat heaters* (→P.231)

Function Default setting Customized setting			A	B	C
Seat heater timer control Off On O - O

*: If equipped

■ Illumination(→P.233)

Function Default setting	Customized setting		A	B	C
Time elapsed before the interior lights turn off	15 seconds	Off	O-	O7.5	seconds
		30 seconds
Operation after the engine switch is turned off	On Off--O
Operation when the doors are unlocked	On Off--O
Operation when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person	On Off--O
Remote Touch pad light On Off--O
Time elapsed before the outer foot lights turn off	15 seconds	Off	O-	O7.5	seconds
		30 seconds
Operation of the outer foot lights when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person	On Off--O
Operation of the outer foot lights when the doors are unlocked with the power door lock switch	On Off--O
Operation of the outer foot lights when a door is opened	On Off--O
Fading out of the outer foot lights when they turn off	Long Short--O

■ Seat belt reminder ( P.318)

Function Default setting	Customized setting		A	B	C
Vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer	On Off -- O

■ Vehicle customization

• When the smart access system with push-button start is off, the entry unlock function cannot be customized.
• When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the timer activated automatic door lock function activates, signals will be generated in accordance with the operation buzzer volume and operational signal (Emergency flashers) function settings.
  Some settings can be changed using a switch or the Center Display. If a setting is changed using a switch, the changed setting will not be reflected on the Center Display screen until the engine switch is turned off and then to IGNITION ON mode.

Items to initialize

The following items must be initialized for normal system operation after such cases as the battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on the vehicle:

List of items to initialize

Item When to initialize Reference
Message indicating maintenance is required	After the maintenance is performed P.267
Tire pressure warning system	When rotating the tiresWhen changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or load weight, etc.	P.287

9-1. For owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners ....386

Reporting safety defects for Canadian owners....386

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French).....387

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French).....388

Headlight aim instructions for Canadian owners (in French) 394

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-25-LEXUS).

If NHTSA receives similar com- plaints, it may open an investiga- tion, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA can- not become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave. SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting safety defects for Canadian owners

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defects Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll-free hotline [phone], mail Transport Canada - ASFAD, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5, or complete the online form at https://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls.

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.

See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English.

Two-panel illustration showing a person seated in a car seat, labeled A and B (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

A Non vrillée

B Vrillée

Silhouette of a person wearing a suit and holding a belt, seated in a car seat (no text or symbols)

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.

See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English.

Illustration of a person sitting on a chair using a seatbelt with a no-smoking symbol (no text or labels present)

AVERTISSEMENT

Illustration of a person wearing a seatbelt inside a car, with a no-smoking symbol (no text or labels present)

Illustration of a person sitting in a car with a pink prohibition symbol (no text or labels)

Illustration of a cartoon character with wings and a large 'no' symbol in the background (no readable text or symbols)

Headlight aim instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of headlight aim instructions from the headlight aim section in this manual.

Technical line drawing of a sewing machine needle with a pink curved arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Index

What to do if... (Troubleshooting) 396

Alphabetical Index......399

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your Lexus dealer.

The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed

You lose your keys

• If you lose your mechanical keys, new genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Lexus dealer. (→P.345)
• If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. (→P.345)

The electronic key does not operate properly

- Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? (→P.295)

The doors cannot be locked or unlocked

• Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?
  When locking the doors, turn the engine switch off. ( P.130)
• Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?

When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on your person.

- The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio wave. (→P.100)

The trunk lid is closed with the electronic key left inside

- The function to prevent the electronic key from being left inside the trunk will operate and you can open the trunk as usual. Take the key out from the trunk. (→P.97)

If you think something is wrong

The engine does not start

• Did you press the engine switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal? (→P.128)
• Is the shift lever in P? (→P.128)
• Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle? (→P.99)
• Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted?

In this case, the engine can be started in a temporary way. ( P.348)

- Is the battery discharged? (→P.349)

The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress the brake pedal

- Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?

If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode. (→P.133)

The windows do not open or close by operating the power window switches

● Is the window lock switch pressed?

The power window except for the one at the driver's seat cannot be operated if the window lock switch is pressed. (→P.113)

The engine switch is turned off automatically

- The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode (the engine is not running) for a period of time. (→P.130)

A warning buzzer sounds during driving

● The seat belt reminder light is flashing

Are the driver and the front passenger wearing the seat belts? (→P.318)

● The parking brake indicator is on Is the parking brake released? (→P.136)

Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound. (→P.314, 323)

An alarm is activated and the horn sounds

- Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the alarm?

The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. (→P.60)

Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm:

• Unlock the doors.
• Open the trunk using the entry function or wireless remote control.
• Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or start the engine.

A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle

- Is the message displayed on the multi-information display?

Check the message on the multi-information display. (→P.323)

A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed

- When a warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed, refer to P.314, 323.

When a problem has occurred

If you have a flat tire

- Vehicle with a spare tire Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare tire. (→P.337)

● Vehicle with an emergency tire puncture repair kit

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and repair

the flat tire temporarily with the emergency tire puncture repair kit. (→P.326)

The vehicle becomes stuck

- Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow. (→P.354)

Alphabetical Index

A

A/C

Air conditioning filter 294

Automatic air conditioning system... 223

Micro dust and pollen filter......227

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)......211

ABS warning light....316

Active rear wing....208

Adaptive Variable Suspension System. 211

Air conditioning filter....294

Air conditioning system

Air conditioning filter 294

Automatic air conditioning system... 223

Micro dust and pollen filter......227

Airbags

Airbag operating conditions....32

Airbag precautions for your child..... 34

Correct driving posture.... 25

Curtain shield airbag operating conditions....32

Curtain shield airbag precautions ..... 34

Front passenger occupant classification system ....38

General airbag precautions 34

Locations of airbags....30

Modification and disposal of airbags ..37

Side airbag operating conditions......32

Side airbag precautions.... 34

Side and curtain shield airbags operating conditions....32

Side and curtain shield airbags precautions.... 34

SRS airbags 30

SRS warning light 315

Alarm....60

Warning buzzer....314

Anchor brackets....45, 53

Antennas (smart access system with push-button start)....98

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)......211

ABS warning light....316

Approach warning......187

Armrest....238

Assist grips....239

Audio system-linked display......82

Automatic air conditioning system..... 223

Automatic headlight leveling system....142

Automatic headlight leveling system warning light....318

Automatic High Beam 143

Automatic light control system......141

Automatic transmission....132

M mode 134

Paddle shift switches....133, 134

Average fuel economy....77

Average vehicle speed....77

B

Back-up light

Replacing light bulbs.... 301

Battery

Battery checking.... 280

Charging system warning light......315

If the battery is discharged....349

Preparing and checking before winter 215

Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)....192

Brake

Brake hold....139

Brake system warning light 314

Fluid 360

Parking brake 136

Brake assist....211

Break-in tips....119

Brightness control

Instrument panel light control....75

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)....192

Buzzer

Hands off steering wheel warning (LTA)

177

C

Card key 88

Care

Exterior 250, 259, 263

Interior......255

Seat belts....255

Wheels and wheel ornaments......251

Cargo capacity....126

Cargo hooks 237

Center Display 220

Chains....216

Child restraint system

Fixed with a LATCH system ....51

Fixed with a seat belt....48

Front passenger occupant classification system ....38

Installing a CRS to the front passenger seat 46

Points to remember 44

Riding with children 44

Types of child restraint system installation method 45

Using an anchor bracket.... 53

Child safety

Airbag precautions.... 34

Battery precautions......281, 351

Child restraint system.... 45

Heated steering wheel or seat heater precautions....231

How your child should wear the seat belt 27

Moon roof precautions 116

Power window lock switch.... 113

Seat belt extender precautions ......27

Seat belt precautions.... 44

Trunk precautions....95

Cleaning

Exterior 250,259,263

Interior......255

Radar sensor....156

Seat belts....255

Wheels and wheel ornaments...... 251

Clock....240

Clock settings....240

Coat hooks....239

Compass....246

Condenser 279

Console box....237

Consumption screen....84

Cooling system....278

Engine overheating....352

Cruise control

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range....181

Cup holders

Front cup holders....236

Rear cup holders....236

Current fuel consumption 77

Curtain shield airbags 30

Customizable features.... 374

D

Daytime running light system....141

Daytime running lights

Replacing light bulbs....301

Defogger

Outside rear view mirrors...... 227

Rear window 227

Windshield 227

Differential

Differential oil 360

Dimension 356

Dinghy towing....127

Display

Center Display....220

Drive information....77

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range....181

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)......175

Multi-information display....75

Warning message....323

Do-it-yourself maintenance......268

Door courtesy lights....233

Door lock

Doors....92

Smart access system with push-button start....98

Wireless remote control....90

Doors

Automatic door locking and unlocking system 94

Door glasses....112

Door lock....92

Open door warning buzzer 93, 94, 318

Outside rear view mirrors .....110

Drive distance....77

Drive info 1/Drive info 2/Drive info 3.....77

Drive information 77

Driver's and front passenger's seat belt reminder light....318

Driver's seat position memory

Driving position memory....105

Memory recall function 106

Power easy access system....105

Drive-Start Control (DSC)

Sudden start restraint control......124

Driving

Break-in tips 119

Correct driving posture.... 25

Driving mode select switch.....205

Procedures 118

Winter drive tips....215

Driving information display....77

Driving position memory....105

Memory recall function 106

Power easy access system....105

Driving range 77

Driving support system information display 82

DSC (Drive-Start Control)

Sudden start restraint control......124

Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range....181

Warning message....190

E

Eco Driving Indicator....78

Eco Driving Indicator Light....78

EDR (Event data recorder)......8

Elapsed time....77

Electric Power Steering (EPS) ......211

Electric power steering system warning light 317

Electronic key......88

Battery-saving function....99

If the electronic key does not operate properly....346

Replacing the battery....295

Emergency flashers....306

Emergency tire puncture....326

Emergency, in case of

If a warning buzzer sounds....314

If a warning light turns on....314

If a warning message is displayed.....323

If the battery is discharged....349

If the electronic key does not operate properly....346

If the engine will not start....344

If the fuel filler door cannot be opened 346

If the vehicle is submerged or water on the road is rising....307

If you have a flat tire 326,337

If you lose your keys....345

If you think something is wrong......312

If your vehicle becomes stuck......354

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency.... 306

If your vehicle needs to be towed....309

If your vehicle overheats....352

Engine

ACCESSORY mode....130

Compartment......276

Engine switch....128

Fuel pump shut off system.... 313

Hood....274

How to start the engine....128

Identification number......357

If the engine will not start 344

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency 306

Ignition switch (engine switch) .....128

Overheating....352

Tachometer....68

Engine coolant

Capacity.... 358

Checking 278

Preparing and checking before winter 215

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....68

Engine immobilizer system....59

Engine oil

Capacity....357

Checking 276

Low engine oil pressure warning light 315

Preparing and checking before winter 215

Engine switch....128

Auto power off function 130

Changing the engine switch modes. 130

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency 306

EPS (Electric Power Steering) ......211

Electric power steering system warning light 317

Event data recorder (EDR)......8

F

First-aid kit storage belt.... 237

Flat tire

Tire pressure warning system......285

Vehicles with a spare tire 337

Vehicles without a spare tire ....326

Floor mats....24

Fluid

Automatic transmission....359

Brake....280,360

Washer 282

Footwell light....233

Front passenger occupant classification system ....38

Front seats

Adjustment....103

Cleaning....255

Correct driving posture 25

Driving position memory......105

Memory recall function....106

Power easy access system 105

Seat heaters 231

Seat position memory 105

Seat ventilators....231

Front side marker light

Light switch 141

Front turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs....301

Turn signal lever 135

Fuel

Capacity....357

Fuel gauge....68

Fuel pump shut off system.... 313

Information 363

Low fuel level warning light 318

Refueling....153

Type....357

Fuel consumption

Average fuel economy 77

Current fuel consumption....77

Fuel filler door

If the fuel filler door cannot be opened 346

Refueling....153

Fuel gauge....68

Fuel pump shut off system....313

Fuses....297

G

Garage door opener....241

Gauges....68

Gear Position....78

G-force....80

Glove box....236

Glove box light....236

H

Headlight aim....299

Headlights

Automatic High Beam system......143

Light switch....141

Replacing light bulbs.... 301

Heated steering wheel....231

Heaters

Automatic air conditioning system... 223

Heated steering wheel....231

Outside rear view mirrors 227

Rear window....227

Seat heaters....231

High mounted stoplight

Replacing light bulbs.... 301

Hill-start assist control......211

Hood

Open 274

Hooks

Cargo hooks.... 237

Coat hooks....239

Retaining hooks (floor mat)......24

Horn....109

|

I/M test 271

Identification

Engine 357

Vehicle....356

Ignition switch (engine switch)......128

Auto power off function 130

Changing the engine switch modes. 130

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency 306

Illuminated entry system....234

Indicators......65

Initialization

Items to initialize 384

Maintenance....267

Power windows....112

Tire pressure warning system ......287

Inside rear view mirror....109

Instrument panel light control....75

Interior lights....233

Front interior light 233

Rear interior light....233

Intuitive parking assist

Function 200

Warning message....202

J

Jack

Positioning a floor jack....275

Vehicle-equipped jack ......327, 337

Jack handle 327,337

Jam protection function

Moon roof 115

Power windows....112

K

Keyless entry

Smart access system with push-button start 98

Wireless remote control....90

Keys

Battery-saving function....99

Electronic key 88

Engine switch....128

If the electronic key does not operate properly....346

If you lose your keys....345

Key number plate 88

Keyless entry....92, 98

Mechanical key 88

Replacing the battery....295

Warning buzzer....99

Wireless remote control....90

Knee airbags ....30

L

Lane Tracing Assist

LTA indicator....317

Lane Tracing Assist (LTA)

Operation....170

Warning messages ....178

Language (multi-information display) ...82

LATCH anchors....51

Launch control....207

Lever

Auxiliary catch lever 274

Hood lock release lever....274

Shift lever....132

Turn signal lever....135

Wiper lever....146

Lexus Enform Safety Connect....55

Lexus Safety System + 2.5

Automatic High Beam....143

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range....181

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....170

PCS (Pre-Collision System)....160

RSA (Road Sign Assist) 179

License plate lights

Light switch....141

Replacing light bulbs.... 301

Light bulbs

Replacing....300

Lights

Automatic High Beam system......143

Front interior lights....233

Headlight switch 141

Interior lights....233

Interior lights list....233

Personal lights.... 234

Rear interior lights 233

Replacing light bulbs.... 301

Trunk light....97

Turn signal lever....135

Vanity lights....240

Wattage....362

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

Operation....170

Warning messages....178

M

Maintenance

Do-it-yourself maintenance 272

General maintenance 268

Maintenance date 356

Maintenance requirements .....267

Malfunction indicator lamp....315

Master warning light....319

Matte paint care guide.....259, 263, 264

Menu icons....76

Meter

Changing the display....73

Indicators......65

Instrument panel light control....75

Meter control switches 76

Meters....68

Multi-information display....75

Settings....82

Units....78

Warning lights....314

Warning message....323

Micro dust and pollen filter 227

Mirrors

Inside rear view mirror....109

Outside rear view mirror defoggers227

Outside rear view mirrors......110

Vanity mirrors....240

Moon roof

Door lock linked moon roof operation 115

Jam protection function....115

Operation....114

Multi-information display....75

Audio system-linked display......82

Drive information 1/Drive information 2/Drive information 3....77

Drive information display....77

Driving support system information display 82

Dynamic radar cruise control .....181

Eco Driving Indicator 78

"F" content....79

Gear Position....78

G-force....80

History (Lap timer) 79

Lap timer....79

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)......175

Menu icons....76

Meter control switches....76

Navigation system-linked display .....82

Pop-up display....75

Settings 82

Tire pressure....78,285

Units 78

Warning message.... 323

Warning message display 82

N

Navigation system-linked display......82

Noise from under vehicle 6

O

"ODO TRIP" switch....74

Odometer 74

Odometer and trip meter display .....74

Display items....74

"ODO TRIP" switch....74

Oil

Differential oil....360

Engine oil 357

Opener

Fuel filler door....153

Hood....274

Trunk....96

Outer foot lights

Location....233

Outside rear view mirrors

Adjustment....110

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)....192

Folding....111

Linked mirror function when reversing111

Mirror position memory....105

Outside rear view mirror defoggers227

RCTA function....192

Outside temperature....68

Overheating....352

P

Paddle shift switches....133, 134

Panic mode....90

Parking brake

Operation....136

Parking brake engaged warning buzzer 138

Parking brake warning light 316

Warning message....138

Parking lights

Light switch 141

Replacing light bulbs.... 301

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

Function 160

PCS OFF switch 163

PCS warning light 317

Personal lights....233

Power control unit coolant

Preparing and checking before winter 215

Power easy access system....105

Power outlet......238

Power steering (Electric power steering system)....211

Electric power steering system warning light 317

Power windows

Door lock linked window operation...113

Jam protection function.... 112

Operation....112

Window lock switch....113

Pre-Collision System (PCS)

Function 160

PCS OFF switch....163

PCS warning light....317

R

Radar cruise control (dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range)....181

Radiator 279

RCTA

Function....192

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)......192

Rear passengers' seat belt reminder lights 319

Rear seats

Seat heaters....231

Seat ventilators....231

Rear side marker lights

Light switch....141

Rear turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs.... 301

Turn signal lever....135

Wattage....362

Rear view mirror

Inside rear view mirror....109

Outside rear view mirrors .....110

Rear window defogger....227

Refueling

Capacity....357

Fuel types....357

If the fuel filler door cannot be opened 346

Opening the fuel tank cap....153

Remote Touch....218

Replacing

Electronic key battery....295

Fuses 297

Light bulbs.... 300

Tires.... 337

Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required....267

Rev indicator....72

Rev peak....73

Road Sign Assist....179

RSA (Road Sign Assist)....179

S

Seat belt reminder light....318, 319

Seat belts....26

Automatic Locking Retractor......28

Child restraint system installation......45

Cleaning and maintaining the seat belt 255

Driver's and front passenger's seat belt reminder light and buzzer ....318

Emergency Locking Retractor......28

How to wear your seat belt.... 27

How your child should wear the seat belt 27

Pregnant women, proper seat belt use 26

Rear passengers' seat belt reminder lights and buzzer 319

Seat belt extender 27

Seat belt pretensioners....29

SRS warning light 315

Seat heaters....231

Seat position memory....105

Seat ventilators....231

Seating capacity....126

Seats

Adjustment....103

Child seats/child restraint system installation 44

Cleaning....255

Driving position memory......105

Power easy access system .....105

Properly sitting in the seat 25

Seat heaters 231

Seat position memory 105

Seat ventilators....231

Sensor

Automatic headlight system.... 141

Automatic High Beam system.....143

Inside rear view mirror....110

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....170

Radar sensor....156,193

Rain-sensing windshield wipers......151

Service reminder message ......267

Shift lever

Automatic transmission....132

Side airbags 30

Side marker lights

Light switch....141

Replacing light bulbs.... 301

Side mirrors

Adjustment....110

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) 192

Folding 111

Linked mirror function when reversing111

Mirror position memory....105

RCTA function....192

Side turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs.... 301

Turn signal lever....135

Side windows....112

Slip indicator....318

Smart access system with push-button start

Antenna location....98

Entry functions.... 92

Starting the engine....128

Snow tires....215

Spare tire.... 337

Storage location.... 337

Spark plug 359

Specifications....356

Speed indicator....72

Speed meter

Speed indicator 72

Speedometer....68

Steering wheel

Adjustment....108

Heated steering wheel....231

Meter control switches....76

Power easy access system....105

Steering wheel position memory ..... 105

Stop lights

Replacing light bulbs.... 301

Storage features 235

Stuck

If the vehicle becomes stuck......354

Sun visors....240

Sunshade

Roof....115

Switches

Activating the Automatic High Beam143

Active rear wing switch 208

Automatic High Beam system......143

Brake Hold switch....139

Door lock switches....94

Driving mode select switch 205

Driving position memory switches....105

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range switch ....181

Emergency flashers switch 306

Engine switch....128

Garage door opener switches......241

Heated steering wheel switch......231

Ignition switch....128

Instrument panel light control switches 75

Intuitive parking assist switch...... 200

"LAUNCH" switch.....207

Light switches 141

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch.....175

Meter control switches 76

Moon roof switches....114

"ODO TRIP" switch 74

Outside rear view mirror switches.....110

Paddle shift switches....133, 134

Parking brake switch....136

PCS OFF switch 163

Power door lock switch 94

Power window switches 112

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch ....223

Seat heater switches....231

Seat ventilator switches 231

"SOS" button 55

Tilt and telescopic steering control switch 108

Tire pressure warning reset switch ..287

Trunk opener main switch .....98

Trunk opener switch....96

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.....181

VSC OFF switch.... 212

Window lock switch 113

Windshield wiper and washer switch146

Windshield wiper de-icer switch .....227

T

Tachometer....68

Rev indicator....72

Rev peak 73

Tail lights

Light switch....141

Replacing light bulbs.... 301

Theft deterrent system

Alarm 60

Engine immobilizer system ....59

Theft prevention labels....62

Tire inflation pressure

Maintenance data....361

Tire inflation pressure display function 285

Tire pressure warning light....320

Tire information....365

Glossary....368

Size....366

Tire identification number ....366

Uniform Tire Quality Grading......367

Tire inflation pressure 78

Tire pressure display....285

Tire pressure warning system

Function......285

Initializing 287

Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters ....286

Registering ID codes....288

Tire pressure warning light....320

Tires

Chains 216

Checking 283

Emergency tire puncture repair kit...326

If you have a flat tire ....326, 337

Inflation pressure....290

Information 365

Replacing 337

Rotating tires 285

Size.... 361

Snow tires 215

Spare tire....337

Tire inflation pressure display function 285

Tire pressure warning light 320

Tire pressure warning system ...... 285

Tools....327,337

Top tether strap....45, 53

Total load capacity....356

Towing

Dinghy towing....127

Emergency towing.... 309

Towing eyelet....310

Trailer towing....127

TRAC (Traction Control)......211

Traction Control (TRAC)...... 211

Trailer towing....127

Transmission

Automatic transmission....132

Driving mode select switch 205

M mode 134

Paddle shift switches....133, 134

Trip meters....74

Trunk....95

Smart access system with push-button start 96

Trunk features.... 237

Trunk grip 97

Trunk light....97

Trunk opener main switch....98

Trunk opener switch 96

Trunk storage extension....238

Wireless remote control.... 97

Turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs.... 301

Turn signal lever....135

V

Vanity lights....240

Vanity mirrors....240

VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management)....211

Vehicle data recording....7

Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management (VDIM)....211

Vehicle identification number......356

Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)......211

Ventilators (seat ventilators)......231

VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)......211

W

Warning buzzer

Open door 318

Warning buzzers

Approach warning......187

Brake hold....317

Brake Override System....316

Downshifting....134, 135

Driver's and front passenger's seat belt 318

Drive-Start Control 316

Electric power steering ....317

Hands off steering wheel warning (LTA) 177

High coolant temperature ....314

Low engine oil pressure....315

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)......170, 173

Open door....93, 94

Open window....113

Parking brake 316

Pre-collision braking....162

Rear passengers' seat belt......319

Warning lights....314

ABS....316

Automatic headlight leveling system 318

Brake hold operated indicator ....317

Brake Override System 316

Brake system....314

Charging system.... 315

Driver's and front passenger's seat belt reminder light 318

Drive-Start Control.... 316

Electric power steering......317

High coolant temperature....314

Low engine oil pressure.... 315

Low fuel level 318

LTA indicator 317

Malfunction indicator lamp.... 315

Master warning light 319

Open door warning......318

Parking brake indicator 316

Pre-collision system....317

Rear passengers' seat belt reminder lights 319

Slip indicator....318

SRS 315

Tire pressure 320

Warning message....323

Warning message display......82

Washer

Checking 282

Preparing and checking before winter 215

Switch....146

Washing and waxing....250

Weight

Cargo capacity....126

Load limits 126

Weight 356

Wheels....292

Size 361

Window lock switch....113

Windows

Power windows....112

Rear window defogger .....227

Washer....146

Windshield wiper de-icer....227

Windshield wipers 146

Winter driving tips....215

Wireless remote control

Battery-Saving Function 99

Locking/Unlocking....90

Replacing the battery....295

For information regarding the equipment listed below, refer to the "NAVIGATION AND MULTI-MEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL".

• Navigation system
  · Audio/visual system
  · Lexus parking assist monitor
  · Lexus Enform

Certifications

Immobilizer system

FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-3

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

▶ Smart access system with push-button start

FCC ID: NI4TMLF12-4

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

00

CA

NOTE:

This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

02

CA

NOTE:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator (antenna) and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

NOTE:

This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This equipment complies with ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of the ISED radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more away from person's body.

NOTE:

Intuitive parking assist sensor

Certification

▶ For vehicles sold in the U.S.A

Product name: intuitive parking assist

Compliance statement: This device complies with part 18 of the FCC Rules.

Responsible Party: Panasonic Automotive Systems of America Division of Panasonic Corporation of North America

Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102-5490

General Contact: http://shop.panasonic.com/support

Blind Spot Monitor

FCC ID : OAYSRR3A

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

C3-002

This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Radiofrequency radiation exposure information:

This equipment complies with radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.

C3-005

▶ Garage door opener

This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Innovation, Science, and Economic Development Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and ISED rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Innovation, Science, and Economic Development Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING. The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and ISED rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacture could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This equipment complies with IC RSS-102 radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled environment.

The antennas used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of least 20cm from all persons.

FCC/IC AVERTISSEMENT:

▶ Tire pressure warning system

FCC ID: PAXPMVE000

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

FCC ID: PAXPMVE100

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

NOTE

"Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate."

GAS STATION INFORMATION

A Auxiliary catch lever ( P.274)
B Trunk opener ( P.96)
C Fuel filler door ( P.154)
D Hood lock release lever ( P.274)
E Tire inflation pressure ( P.361)

Fuel tank capacity (Ref-erence)	17.5 gal. (66.4 L, 14.6 Imp. gal.)
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only		P.357
		P.363
Cold tire inflation pres-sure		P.361
Engine oil capacity(Drain and refill—ref-erence)		P.357
Engine oil type P.357

LEXUS

Owner's Manual:

Publication No. OM24B72U

Part No. 01999-24B72

Printed in Japan 01-2310-00 N

RC F (北米U)